ABB Relion REG670 Page 42 Technical Manual Download

Page: 42 / 1298

GPS antenna...........................................................................1196

Introduction.........................................................................1196
Design................................................................................ 1196
Technical data.................................................................... 1198

IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B...........................1198

Introduction.........................................................................1198
Design................................................................................ 1198
Settings.............................................................................. 1199
Technical data.................................................................... 1199

Dimensions...................................................................................1200

Case without rear cover...........................................................1200
Flush mounting dimensions.....................................................1202
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions.................................1203
Wall mounting dimensions.......................................................1204
External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection1204
External current transformer unit.............................................1206

Mounting alternatives................................................................... 1206

Flush mounting........................................................................1206

Overview............................................................................ 1206
Mounting procedure for flush mounting..............................1207

19” panel rack mounting..........................................................1208

Overview............................................................................ 1208
Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting...............1209

Wall mounting..........................................................................1210

Overview............................................................................ 1210
Mounting procedure for wall mounting............................... 1210
How to reach the rear side of the IED................................ 1211

Side-by-side 19” rack mounting...............................................1212

Overview............................................................................ 1212
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting.......... 1212
IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case...........1213

Side-by-side flush mounting.................................................... 1213

Overview............................................................................ 1213
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting......... 1214

Technical data.............................................................................. 1215

Enclosure.................................................................................1215
Electrical safety....................................................................... 1215
Connection system..................................................................1215
Influencing factors................................................................... 1216
Type tests according to standard............................................ 1217

Section 22 Injection equipment hardware.................................... 1221

Overview.......................................................................................1221

Table of contents

Technical manual

Summary of Contents for Relion REG670

Page 1: ...Relion 670 series Generator protection REG670 2 0 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 2: ......

Page 4: ...erms of such license This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org This product includes cryptographic software written developed by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com and Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Trademarks ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be...

Page 5: ...product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons including but not limited to personal injuries or death shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be compl...

Page 6: ...nd concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits Low voltage directive 2006 95 EC This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255 26 for the EMC directive and with the product standards EN 60255 1 and EN 60255 27 for the low voltage directive The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of ...

Page 7: ...ontrol and monitoring functions 55 Communication 59 Basic IED functions 61 Section 3 Analog inputs 63 Introduction 63 Function block 63 Signals 64 Settings 66 Monitored data 71 Operation principle 72 Section 4 Binary input and output modules 75 Binary input 75 Binary input debounce filter 75 Oscillation filter 75 Settings 75 Setting parameters for binary input modules 75 Setting parameters for bin...

Page 8: ...ality 88 Status LEDs 88 Indication LEDs 89 Function keys 97 Functionality 97 Operation principle 97 Section 6 Differential protection 101 Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF 101 Identification 101 Functionality 101 Function block 103 Signals 104 Settings 107 Monitored data 112 Operation principle 113 Function calculation principles 114 Logic diagram 135 Technical data 140 1Ph H...

Page 9: ...ricted earth fault protection REFPDIF 165 Identification 165 Functionality 165 Function block 166 Signals 166 Settings 167 Monitored data 168 Operation principle 168 Fundamental principles of the restricted earth fault protection 168 Restricted earth fault protection low impedance differential protection 170 Calculation of differential current and bias current 172 Detection of external earth fault...

Page 10: ...racteristic ZDMRDIR 200 High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS 203 Identification 203 Functionality 203 Function block 205 Signals 205 Settings 208 Monitored data 212 Operation principle 212 Filtering 212 Distance measuring zones 213 Phase selection criteria 214 Directional criteria 215 Fuse failure 216 Power swings 216 Measuring principles 216 Load encroachment 219 Simplified logic schemes 220 Te...

Page 11: ...tion OOSPPAM 259 Identification 259 Functionality 259 Function block 260 Signals 260 Settings 261 Monitored data 262 Operation principle 262 Lens characteristic 265 Detecting an out of step condition 267 Maximum slip frequency 268 Taking care of the circuit breaker 269 Design 271 Technical data 272 Loss of excitation LEXPDIS 272 Identification 272 Functionality 272 Function block 273 Signals 273 S...

Page 12: ...signals 294 Function block 296 Signals 296 Settings 297 Monitored data 298 Operation principle 299 Configuration principle 299 Generator system earthing methods 302 100 Stator earth fault protection function 306 General measurement of earth fault impedance 310 Measuring reference impedance 312 Simplified logic diagram 317 Technical data 318 Under impedance protection for generators and transformer...

Page 13: ...37 Settings 339 Monitored data 344 Operation principle 345 Second harmonic blocking element 349 Technical data 350 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC 351 Identification 351 Functionality 351 Function block 351 Signals 351 Settings 352 Monitored data 352 Operation principle 352 Technical data 353 Four step residual overcurrent protection Zero sequence or negative sequence directio...

Page 14: ...ored data 381 Operation principle 381 Operating quantity within the function 381 Internal polarizing facility of the function 382 External polarizing for negative sequence function 383 Internal negative sequence protection structure 383 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages 383 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function 384 Technical data 387 Sensitive dire...

Page 15: ...415 Monitored data 415 Operation principle 415 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker 418 Unsymmetrical current detection 418 Technical data 418 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 419 Identification 419 Functionality 419 Function block 420 Signals 420 Settings 421 Monitored data 422 Operation principle 422 Low pass filtering 424 Calibration of analog inputs 425 Technical data 426 D...

Page 16: ...PVOC 442 Identification 442 Functionality 443 Function block 443 Signals 443 Settings 444 Monitored data 444 Operation principle 444 Technical data 445 Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC 446 Identification 446 Functionality 446 Function block 447 Signals 447 Settings 448 Monitored data 449 Operation principle 449 Measured quantities 449 Base quantities 449 Overcurrent protection...

Page 17: ...ication 477 Functionality 477 Function block 478 Signals 478 Settings 479 Monitored data 481 Operation principle 481 Measurement principle 482 Time delay 482 Blocking 488 Design 489 Technical data 491 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 491 Identification 491 Functionality 492 Function block 492 Signals 492 Settings 493 Monitored data 495 Operation principle 495 Measurement principle 496 Time ...

Page 18: ... time of the overexcitation protection 522 Cooling 525 Overexcitation protection function measurands 525 Overexcitation alarm 526 Logic diagram 527 Technical data 527 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV 528 Identification 528 Functionality 528 Function block 528 Signals 528 Settings 529 Monitored data 530 Operation principle 530 Technical data 531 100 Stator earth fault protection 3rd harmonic...

Page 19: ... 548 Functionality 549 Function block 549 Signals 549 Settings 550 Monitored data 550 Operation principle 550 Measurement principle 550 Time delay 551 Blocking 551 Design 551 Technical data 552 Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC 553 Identification 553 Functionality 553 Function block 553 Signals 553 Settings 554 Monitored data 554 Operation principle 554 Measurement principle 555 Time dela...

Page 20: ...rcurrent protection steps 578 Built in undercurrent protection steps 583 Built in overvoltage protection steps 584 Built in undervoltage protection steps 584 Inadvertent generator energizing 584 Logic diagram 586 Technical data 591 Section 12 System protection and control 595 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC 595 Identification 595 Functionality 595 Function block 595 Signals 595 Settings 596 Operation...

Page 21: ...ation 619 Functionality 619 Function block 620 Signals 620 Settings 621 Monitored data 621 Operation principle 622 Technical data 623 Section 14 Control 625 Synchrocheck energizing check and synchronizing SESRSYN 625 Identification 625 Functionality 625 Function block 626 Signals 626 Settings 628 Monitored data 631 Operation principle 631 Basic functionality 631 Logic diagrams 632 Technical data 6...

Page 22: ...lity 656 Function block 656 Logic diagram 657 Signals 657 Interlocking for bus coupler bay ABC_BC 658 Identification 658 Functionality 659 Function block 660 Logic diagram 661 Signals 663 Interlocking for 1 1 2 CB BH 666 Identification 666 Functionality 666 Function blocks 667 Logic diagrams 669 Signals 674 Interlocking for double CB bay DB 678 Identification 678 Functionality 678 Logic diagrams 6...

Page 23: ...dling 706 Bay control QCBAY 709 Functionality 709 Function block 709 Signals 709 Settings 710 Operation principle 710 Local Remote switch LOCREM 712 Function block 712 Signals 713 Settings 714 Operation principle 714 Switch controller SCSWI 715 Functionality 716 Function block 716 Signals 716 Settings 718 Operation principle 718 Circuit breaker SXCBR 723 Functionality 723 Function block 723 Signal...

Page 24: ... TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC 744 Operation principle 744 Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC 748 Function block 752 Signals 753 Settings 756 Monitored data 758 Operation principle 758 Technical data 759 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC 760 Identification 760 Functionality 760 Function block 761 Signals 761 Settings 763 Monitored data 763 Ope...

Page 25: ...mmand function for DNP3 0 AUTOBITS 771 Identification 771 Functionality 772 Function block 772 Signals 772 Settings 773 Operation principle 788 Single command 16 signals SINGLECMD 788 Identification 788 Functionality 788 Function block 789 Signals 789 Settings 790 Operation principle 790 Section 15 Logic 791 Tripping logic common 3 phase output SMPPTRC 791 Identification 791 Functionality 791 Func...

Page 26: ...805 Signals 805 Settings 806 Operation principle 806 Technical data 807 Logic for group indication INDCALH 807 Identification 807 Functionality 807 Function block 807 Signals 808 Settings 808 Operation principle 808 Technical data 809 Basic configurable logic blocks 809 AND function block AND 810 Function block 810 Signals 811 Technical data 811 Controllable gate function block GATE 811 Function b...

Page 27: ...a 816 Set reset with memory function block SRMEMORY 817 Function block 817 Signals 817 Settings 817 Technical data 818 Settable timer function block TIMERSET 818 Function block 818 Signals 818 Settings 819 Technical data 819 Exclusive OR function block XOR 819 Function block 819 Signals 820 Technical data 820 Configurable logic blocks Q T 820 ANDQT function block 821 Function block 822 Signals 822...

Page 28: ...imer function block PULSETIMERQT 828 Function block 829 Signals 829 Settings 829 Technical data 829 Reset Set function block RSMEMORYQT 830 Function block 830 Signals 830 Settings 831 Technical data 831 Set Reset function block SRMEMORYQT 831 Function block 831 Signals 832 Settings 832 Technical data 832 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT 832 Function block 833 Signals 833 Settings 833 Techn...

Page 29: ... Function block 840 Signals 840 Settings 841 Monitored data 841 Operation principle 841 Technical data 842 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 842 Identification 842 Functionality 842 Function block 843 Signals 843 Setting parameters 844 Operation principle 844 Technical data 845 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation ITBGAPC 845 Identification 845 Functionality 845 Func...

Page 30: ...ty 857 Function block 859 Signals 861 Settings 864 Monitored data 875 Operation principle 878 Measurement supervision 878 Measurements CVMMXN 882 Phase current measurement CMMXU 887 Phase phase and phase neutral voltage measurements VMMXU VNMMXU 888 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI CMSQI 888 Technical data 888 Gas medium supervision SSIMG 890 Identification 890 Functionality 890 Fun...

Page 31: ...6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring 907 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring 908 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication 909 Technical data 909 Event function EVENT 910 Identification 910 Functionality 910 Function block 910 Signals 911 Settings 912 Operation principle 914 Disturbance report DRPRDRE 915 Identification 915 Functionality 915 Function block 916 Signals 917 Settings 922 Monitor...

Page 32: ...red data 980 Technical data 980 Section 17 Metering 981 Pulse counter logic PCFCNT 981 Identification 981 Functionality 981 Function block 981 Signals 982 Settings 982 Monitored data 983 Operation principle 983 Technical data 985 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR 985 Identification 985 Functionality 985 Function block 986 Signals 986 Settings 987 Monitored data 988 Operat...

Page 33: ...gs 998 Monitored data 999 Operation principle 999 IEC 61850 8 1 redundant station bus communication 999 Functionality 999 Function block 999 Signals 1000 Settings 1000 Monitored data 1000 Principle of operation 1000 LON communication protocol 1002 Functionality 1002 Settings 1002 Operation principle 1002 Technical data 1020 SPA communication protocol 1020 Functionality 1020 Design 1020 Settings 10...

Page 34: ...F 1035 Functionality 1035 Identification 1035 Function block 1035 Signals 1035 Settings 1035 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870 5 103 I103FLTPROT 1036 Functionality 1036 Identification 1036 Function block 1037 Signals 1037 Settings 1038 IED status for IEC 60870 5 103 I103IED 1038 Functionality 1038 Identification 1039 Function block 1039 Signals 1039 Settings 1039 Supervison status for...

Page 35: ... 103 I103USRCMD 1046 Functionality 1046 Identification 1046 Function block 1046 Signals 1046 Settings 1047 Function commands generic for IEC 60870 5 103 I103GENCMD 1047 Functionality 1047 Identification 1047 Function block 1048 Signals 1048 Settings 1048 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870 5 103 I103POSCMD 1048 Functionality 1048 Identification 1049 Function block 1049 Signals 1049...

Page 36: ...CV 1068 Identification 1068 Functionality 1068 Function block 1069 Signals 1069 Settings 1069 Operation principle 1069 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV 1070 Identification 1070 Functionality 1070 Function block 1070 Signals 1070 Settings 1071 Operation principle 1071 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV 1071 Identification 1071 Functionality 1...

Page 37: ... 1085 Operation principle 1086 Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit 1087 Function block 1087 Signals 1087 Section 20 Basic IED functions 1089 Authority check ATHCHCK 1089 Identification 1089 Functionality 1089 Operation principle 1090 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED 1092 Authority management AUTHMAN 1095 Identification 1095 AUTHMAN 1095 Settings 1095 FTP acc...

Page 38: ...clock RTC operation 1111 Synchronization alternatives 1112 Technical data 1115 Parameter setting groups 1115 Functionality 1115 Function block 1116 Signals 1116 Settings 1117 Operation principle 1117 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK 1118 Functionality 1118 Function block 1119 Signals 1119 Operation principle 1119 Test mode functionality TESTMODE 1120 Functionality 1120 Function block 1120 Signals 1120 ...

Page 39: ...rix for analog inputs SMAI 1128 Functionality 1128 Function block 1128 Signals 1129 Settings 1130 Operation principle 1132 Frequency values 1133 Global base values GBASVAL 1134 Identification 1134 Functionality 1134 Settings 1134 Primary system values PRIMVAL 1135 Identification 1135 Functionality 1135 Settings 1135 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM 1135 Functionality 1135 Function block 1136 Signals...

Page 40: ... Local HMI 1151 Transformer input module TRM 1151 Introduction 1151 Design 1152 Technical data 1153 Analog digital conversion module with time synchronization ADM 1154 Introduction 1154 Design 1154 Binary input module BIM 1156 Introduction 1156 Design 1156 Signals 1159 Settings 1160 Monitored data 1160 Technical data 1160 Binary output modules BOM 1161 Introduction 1161 Design 1161 Signals 1163 Se...

Page 41: ...echnical data 1186 Galvanic RS485 communication module 1187 Introduction 1187 Design 1187 Technical data 1188 Optical ethernet module OEM 1189 Introduction 1189 Functionality 1189 Design 1189 Technical data 1190 Line data communication module LDCM 1190 Introduction 1190 Design 1190 Technical data 1191 Galvanic X 21 line data communication X 21 LDCM 1192 Introduction 1192 Design 1193 Functionality ...

Page 42: ...h mounting 1207 19 panel rack mounting 1208 Overview 1208 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting 1209 Wall mounting 1210 Overview 1210 Mounting procedure for wall mounting 1210 How to reach the rear side of the IED 1211 Side by side 19 rack mounting 1212 Overview 1212 Mounting procedure for side by side rack mounting 1212 IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case 1213 Side by side flu...

Page 43: ...citor unit REX061 1230 Introduction 1230 Design 1230 Shunt resistor unit REX062 1231 Introduction 1231 Design 1231 Technical data 1232 Hardware 1232 Type tests according to standards 1234 Influencing factors 1236 Section 23 Labels 1237 Labels on IED 1237 Labels on injection equipment 1239 Section 24 Connection diagrams 1243 Section 25 Inverse time characteristics 1245 Application 1245 Principle of...

Page 44: ...38 ...

Page 45: ...d during normal service 1 2 Intended audience This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel who use technical data during engineering installation and commissioning and in normal service The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems protection equipment protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs The installa...

Page 46: ...0 project and insert IEDs to the project structure The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection and control functions LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 61850 and DNP3 The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED The manual provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation The chapters are o...

Page 47: ...n blocks logic diagrams input and output signals setting parameters and technical data sorted per function The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase installation and commissioning phase and during normal service The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported by the IED The manual concentrates on the vendor specific implementatio...

Page 48: ...anual IEC 61850 Edition 2 1MRK 511 303 UEN Communication protocol manual LON 1MRK 511 305 UEN Communication protocol manual SPA 1MRK 511 306 UEN Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012 BEN Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 309 UEN Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003 BEN Test system COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001 BEN 1 4 Document symbols and conventions 1 4 1 Symbols The electrical warnin...

Page 49: ... also contains definitions of important terms Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button icons For example to navigate between the options use and HMI menu paths are presented in bold For example select Main menu Settings LHMI messages are shown in Courier font For example to save the changes in non volatile memory select Yes and press Parameter names a...

Page 50: ...tion 1 edition 2 mapping Table 1 IEC 61850 edition 1 edition 2 mapping Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC AGSAL AGSAL SECLLN0 AGSAL ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH ALTIM ALTIM ALTMS ALTMS ALTRK ALTRK BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BBCSWI BDCGAPC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIG...

Page 51: ...USPTRC BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BBTPLLN0 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BUTPTRC_B8 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC BZISGGIO BZISGGIO BZISGAPC BZITGGIO BZITGGIO BZITGAPC BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZASGAPC BZASPDIF BZNSGAPC BZNSPDIF BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZBSGAPC B...

Page 52: ...PTUC GF2PTUV GF2PVOC PH1PTRC GF2MMXN GF2PHAR GF2PTOV GF2PTUC GF2PTUV GF2PVOC PH1PTRC CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN D2PTOC D2LLN0 D2PTOC PH1PTRC D2PTOC PH1PTRC DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH EF2PTOC EF2LLN0 EF2PTRC EF2RDIR GEN2PHAR PH1PTOC EF2PTRC EF2RDIR GEN2PHAR PH1PTOC EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC EF4PTRC EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR P...

Page 53: ...DUP GUPPDUP PH1PTRC HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC L3CPDIF L3CPDIF L3CGAPC L3CPDIF L3CPHAR L3CPTRC L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L6CPDIF L6CPDIF L6CGAPC L6CPDIF L6CPHAR L6CPTRC LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LAPPPDUP LAPPPUPF LAPPPDUP LAPPPUPF LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC ...

Page 54: ...C EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC EF4PTRC EF4RDIR PH1PTOC O2RWPTOV GEN2LLN0 O2RWPTOV PH1PTRC O2RWPTOV PH1PTRC OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC PH3PTRC GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC PH3PTRC OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OOSPPAM OOSPPAM OOSPPAM OOSPTRC OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV PH1PTRC OV2PTOV PH1PTRC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT PH4SPTOC GEN4PHAR OCNDLLN0 PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC GEN4PHAR PH1BPTOC PH1...

Page 55: ...RSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN SINGLELCCH SCHLCCH SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG SSIML SSIML SSIML STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS STBPTOC STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR SXSWI SXSWI SX...

Page 56: ...OV VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU VRPVOC VRLLN0 PH1PTRC PH1PTUV VRPVOC PH1PTRC PH1PTUV VRPVOC VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV...

Page 57: ...FPDIS PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 1 Introduction 51 Technical manual ...

Page 58: ...52 ...

Page 59: ...d earth fault protection low impedance 0 3 1 A01 1 Impedance protection ZMHPDIS 21 Fullscheme distance protection mho characteristic 0 4 3 3 3 ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element for mho characteristic 0 2 1 1 1 ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance protection 0 1 ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection for series compensated lines 0 1 PSPPPAM 78 Pole slip out of step protection 0 1 1 B21 1 B21 ...

Page 60: ...0 3 1 2 3 CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0 4 2 4 4 STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0 4 2 2 2 GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0 4 2 4 4 GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0 4 2 4 4 BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check NS2PTOC 46I2 Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines 0 2 1 1 1 AEGPVOC 50AE Accidental energizing p...

Page 61: ... 3 3 FTAQFVR 81A Frequency time accumulation protection 0 12 12 E03 12 E03 12 E03 Multipurpose protection CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 1 12 6 6 6 General calculation SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0 6 1 67 requires voltage 2 67N requires voltage 2 3 Control and monitoring functions IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Generator REG670 REG670 A20 REG670 B30 REG670 C30 Control SESRSYN ...

Page 62: ... for DNP3 0 3 3 3 3 SINGLECMD Single command 16 signals 4 4 4 4 I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870 5 103 1 1 1 1 I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 60870 5 103 50 50 50 50 I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870 5 103 50 50 50 50 I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870 5 103 1 1 1 1 I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC 60870 5 103 1 1 1 1 Secondary ...

Page 63: ...16 to Integer conversion 18 18 18 18 BTIGAPC Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with Logic Node representation 16 16 16 16 IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18 18 18 18 ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node representation 16 16 16 16 TIGAPC Delay on timer with input signal integration 30 30 30 30 TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision...

Page 64: ...on 3 3 3 3 SSCBR Circuit breaker monitoring 0 4 2 M12 4 M14 4 M14 I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870 5 103 1 1 1 1 I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870 5 103 3 3 3 3 I103AR Function status auto recloser for IEC 60870 5 103 1 1 1 1 I103EF Function status earth fault for IEC 60870 5 103 1 1 1 1 I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for IEC 60870 5 103 1 1 1 1 I103IED IED s...

Page 65: ...ion protocol 1 1 1 1 CHSEROPT DNP3 0 for TCP IP and EIA 485 communication protocol 1 1 1 1 MST1TCP MST2TCP MST3TCP MST4TCP DNP3 0 for serial communication protocol 1 1 1 1 DNPFREC DNP3 0 fault records for TCP IP and EIA 485 communication protocol 1 1 1 1 IEC61850 8 1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850 1 1 1 1 GOOSEINTLKR CV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59 59 59 59 GOOS...

Page 66: ...ce information 1 1 1 1 PCMACCS IED Configuration Protocol 1 1 1 1 SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103 1 1 1 1 FSTACCS Field service tool access via SPA protocol over ethernet communication 1 1 1 1 ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters 1 1 1 1 ALTRK Service Tracking 1 1 1 1 SINGLELCCH Single ethernet port link status 1 1 1 1 PRPSTATUS Dual ethernet por...

Page 67: ...matrix for binary inputs SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs SMAI1 SMAI20 Signal matrix for analog inputs 3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase ATHSTAT Authority status ATHCHCK Authority check AUTHMAN Authority management FTPACCS FTP access with password SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol DOSFRNT Denial of service frame rate contro...

Page 68: ... general protocol DNPGENTCP DNP3 0 communication general TCP protocol CHSEROPT DNP3 0 for TCP IP and EIA 485 communication protocol MSTSER DNP3 0 for serial communication protocol OPTICAL103 IEC 60870 5 103 Optical serial communication RS485103 IEC 60870 5 103 serial communication for RS485 IEC61850 8 1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850 HORZCOMM Network variables via LON LONSPA SPA communic...

Page 69: ...d to facilitate service values reading This analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input module TRM ...

Page 70: ...signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status CH1 I STRING Analogue current input 1 CH2 I STRING Analogue current input 2 CH3 I STRING Analogue current input 3 CH4 I STRING Analogue current input 4 CH5 I STRING Analogue current input 5 CH6 I STRING Analogue current input 6 CH7 U STRING Analogue voltage input 7 CH8 U STRING Analogue voltage input 8 CH9 U STRING Analogue ...

Page 71: ...CH9 U STRING Analogue voltage input 9 CH10 U STRING Analogue voltage input 10 CH11 U STRING Analogue voltage input 11 CH12 U STRING Analogue voltage input 12 Table 7 TRM_9I_3U Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status CH1 I STRING Analogue current input 1 CH2 I STRING Analogue current input 2 CH3 I STRING Analogue current input 3 CH4 I STRING Analogue current...

Page 72: ...gs basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description CTStarPoint1 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec1 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim1 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint2 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec2 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTp...

Page 73: ...3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint9 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec9 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim9 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint10 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec10 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim10 1 99999 A 1 3000 Ra...

Page 74: ...001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim7 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec8 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim8 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec9 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim9 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec10 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT sec...

Page 75: ...ject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec1 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim1 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint2 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec2 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim2 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint3 FromObject ToObj...

Page 76: ...ct ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec1 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim1 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint2 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec2 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim2 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint3 FromObject ToObjec...

Page 77: ... 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim10 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec11 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim11 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rated VT primary voltage VTsec12 0 001 999 999 V 0 001 110 000 Rated VT secondary voltage VTprim12 0 05 2000 00 kV 0 05 400 00 Rated VT primary voltage 3 5 Monitored data Table 14 AISVBAS ...

Page 78: ... the CT The main CTs are typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object or away from the object This information must be set in the IED The convention of the directionality is defined as follows Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the object Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the directi...

Page 79: ... settings of the primary CT is correct that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or ToObject according to the plant condition then a positive quantity always flows towards the protected object and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object The settings of the IED is performed in primary values The ratios of the main CTs and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED The user has to se...

Page 80: ...74 ...

Page 81: ... 1 2 Oscillation filter Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields from for example nearby breakers An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from the system when a binary input starts oscillating An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s If the counter value is greater than the set value OscBlock the inp...

Page 82: ...t Description Operation Off On On Binary input output module in operation On or not Off DebounceTime 0 001 0 020 s 0 001 0 001 Debounce time for binary inputs OscBlock 1 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit OscRelease 1 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit Section 4 1MRK502052 UEN B Binary input and output modules 76 Technical manual ...

Page 83: ... DefaultScreen 0 Default screen EvListSrtOrder Latest on top Oldest on top Latest on top Sort order of event list AutoIndicationDRP Off On Off Automatic indication of disturbance report SubstIndSLD No Yes No Substitute indication on single line diagram InterlockIndSLD No Yes No Interlock indication on single line diagram BypassCommands No Yes No Enable bypass of commands 5 2 Local HMI signals 5 2 ...

Page 84: ...LEAN Yellow LED on the LCD HMI is steady YELLOW F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD HMI is flashing CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD HMI are cleared LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD HMI are not active 5 3 Basic part for LED indication module 5 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device nu...

Page 85: ...ck the operation of the LEDs RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge reset the indication LEDs Table 26 LEDGEN Output signals Name Type Description NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is set ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged Table 27 GRP1_LED1 Input signals Name Type Default Description HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1 local HMI alarm ...

Page 86: ...d 0 18 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1 alarm group 1 is red LabelYellow 0 18 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1 alarm group 1 is yellow LabelGreen 0 18 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1 alarm group 1 is green 5 3 5 Monitored data Table 30 GRP1_LED1 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description LEDStatus INTEGER 1 Red flash 2 Red steady 3 Yellow flash 4 Yellow...

Page 87: ...olled by function key 5 4 4 Settings Table 33 FNKEYMD1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Mode Off Toggle Pulsed Off Output operation mode PulseTime 0 001 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Pulse time for output controlled by LCDFn1 LabelOn 0 18 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state LabelOff 0 18 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state Table 34 FNKEYTY1 Non group settings basic...

Page 88: ...vsd IEC13000239 V2 EN Figure 7 Local human machine interface The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements Keypad Display LCD LED indicators Communication port for PCM600 Section 5 1MRK502052 UEN B Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 82 Technical manual ...

Page 89: ... can vary The amount of characters and rows fitting the view depends on the character size and the view that is shown The display view is divided into four basic areas IEC13000063 2 en vsd 1 3 4 2 IEC13000063 V2 EN Figure 8 Display layout 1 Path 2 Content 3 Status 4 Scroll bar appears when needed 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 83 Technical manual ...

Page 90: ...ars on the right The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in the display horizontally Truncation is indicated with three dots IEC13000045 2 en vsd IEC13000045 V2 EN Figure 9 Truncated path The number after the function instance for example ETHFRNT 1 indicates the instance number The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the functio...

Page 91: ...D panel The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time Each panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display Both the panels have dynamic width that depends on the label string length that the panel contains 5 5 1 2 LEDs The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display...

Page 92: ...d The LHMI keypad contains push buttons which are used to navigate in different views or menus The push buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms reset indications provide help and switch between local and remote control mode The keypad also contains programmable push buttons that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons Section 5 1MRK502052 UEN B Local Human Machine Interfac...

Page 93: ...eypad with object control navigation and command push buttons and RJ 45 communication port 1 5 Function button 6 Close 7 Open 8 Escape 9 Left 10 Down 11 Up 12 Right 13 Key 14 Enter 15 Remote Local 16 Uplink LED 17 Not in use 18 Multipage 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 87 Technical manual ...

Page 94: ...ignalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality 5 5 2 2 Status LEDs There are three status LEDs above the LCD in front of the IED green yellow and red The green LED has a fixed function that presents the healthy status of the IED The yellow and red LEDs are user configured The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report is triggered steady or that the IED is ...

Page 95: ... the re starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance Only LEDs defined for re starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 LatchedReset S will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximu...

Page 96: ...are available Sequence 1 Follow S Sequence 2 Follow F Sequence 3 LatchedAck F S Sequence 4 LatchedAck S F Sequence 5 LatchedColl S Sequence 6 LatchedReset S For sequence 1 and 2 which are of the Follow type the acknowledgment Ack reset function is not applicable because the indication shown by the LED follows its input signal Sequence 3 and 4 which are of the Latched type with acknowledgement are ...

Page 97: ...ordance with the color described above An example of the operation when two colors are activated in parallel to the same LED is shown in figure15 Activating signal GREEN LED IEC09000312_1_en vsd G R G G Activating signal RED IEC09000312 V1 EN Figure 15 Operating sequence 1 two colors Sequence 2 Follow F This sequence is the same as Sequence 1 Follow S but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing s...

Page 98: ...r acknowledgment In figure 17 it is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets Activating signal RED LED Acknow IEC09000313_1_en vsd Activating signal GREEN R R G IEC09000313 V1 EN Figure 17 Operating Sequence 3 Lat...

Page 99: ...nce 3 three colors involved alternative 2 Sequence 4 LatchedAck S F This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3 but steady and flashing light have been alternated Sequence 5 LatchedColl S This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode At the activation of the input signal the indication will light up with a steady light The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indic...

Page 100: ... which are set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset S are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset S Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual reset that is immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is perf...

Page 101: ...disturbance Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed IEC01000240_2_en vsd Activating signal 2 LED 2 Manual reset Activating signal 1 Automatic reset LED 1 Disturbance tRestart Disturbance tRestart IEC01000240 V2 EN Figure 23 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two different disturbances 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 95 ...

Page 102: ... 2 LED 2 Manual reset Activating signal 1 Automatic reset LED 1 Disturbance tRestart IEC01000241 V2 EN Figure 24 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between Figure 25 shows the timing diagram for manual reset Section 5 1MRK502052 UEN B Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 96 Technical manual ...

Page 103: ... fast way to navigate between default nodes in the menu tree When used as a control the button can control a binary signal 5 5 3 2 Operation principle Each output on the FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMI function keys By pressing a function button on the LHMI the output status of the actual function block will change These binary outputs can in turn be used to contr...

Page 104: ...w Input value Output value IEC09000331_1_en vsd 500ms 500ms 500ms IEC09000331 V2 EN Figure 27 Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE Setting PULSED In this mode the output sets high 1 when the function key has been pressed for more than 500ms and remains high according to set pulse time After this time the output will go back to 0 The input attribute is reset when the function block detects it being ...

Page 105: ... type CONTROL then the corresponding input on this function block becomes active and will light the yellow function button LED when high This functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off It has been implemented this way for safety reasons the idea is that the function key LEDs should always reflect the actual status of any primary equipment monitored by these ...

Page 106: ...100 ...

Page 107: ...protection three winding T3WPDIF are provided with internal CT ratio matching vector group compensation and settable zero sequence current elimination The function can be provided with up to six three phase sets of current inputs All current inputs are provided with percentage bias restraint features making the IED suitable for two or three winding transformer in multi breaker station arrangements...

Page 108: ...ee sides Figure 29 CT group arrangement for differential protection The setting facilities cover the application of the differential protection to all types of power transformers and auto transformers with or without load tap changer as well as shunt reactors and local feeders within the station An adaptive stabilizing feature is included for heavy through fault currents By introducing the load ta...

Page 109: ...ge of power transformer windings turn to turn faults 6 1 3 Function block IEC06000249_2_en vsd T2WPDIF I3PW1CT1 I3PW1CT2 I3PW2CT1 I3PW2CT2 TAPOLTC1 OLTC1AL BLOCK BLKRES BLKUNRES BLKNSUNR BLKNSSEN TRIP TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRNSUNR TRNSSENS START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 BLKWAV BLKWAVL1 BLKWAVL2 BLKWAVL3 IDALARM OPENCT OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL...

Page 110: ...tion I3PW1CT1 GROUP SIGNAL Three phase winding primary CT1 I3PW1CT2 GROUP SIGNAL Three phase winding primary CT2 I3PW2CT1 GROUP SIGNAL Three phase winding secondary CT1 I3PW2CT2 GROUP SIGNAL Three phase winding secondary CT2 TAPOLTC1 INTEGER 1 Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 1 OLTC1AL BOOLEAN 0 OLTC1 alarm BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for restrained dif...

Page 111: ...monic block signal phase L2 BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal phase L3 BLKWAV BOOLEAN Common block signal waveform criterion from any phase BLKWAVL1 BOOLEAN Block signal waveform criterion phase L1 BLKWAVL2 BOOLEAN Block signal waveform criterion phase L2 BLKWAVL3 BOOLEAN Block signal waveform criterion phase L3 IDALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three phases OPENCT...

Page 112: ...l feature BLKNSSEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for sensitive neg seq differential feature Table 38 T3WPDIF Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General common trip signal TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip signal from restrained differential protection TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection TRNSUNR BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestr neg seq diff protection TRNSSENS BOOLEAN...

Page 113: ...urrent phase L3 IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq diff current phase L1 IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq diff current phase L2 IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq diff current phase L3 IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current which is common to all phases IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current 6 1 5 Settings Table 39 T2WPDIF Group settings ba...

Page 114: ...eristic in I2 I1Ratio 5 0 100 0 0 1 15 0 Max ratio of 2nd harm to fundamental harm dif curr in I5 I1Ratio 5 0 100 0 0 1 25 0 Max ratio of 5th harm to fundamental harm dif curr in OpenCTEnable Off On Off Open CT detection feature Open CTEnable Off On tOCTAlarmDelay 0 100 10 000 s 0 001 3 000 Open CT time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected tOCTResetDelay 0 100 10 000 s 0 001 0 250 Reset dela...

Page 115: ...nch 1 on transf W2 side CT2RatingW2 1 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A T branch 2 on transf W2 side LocationOLTC1 Not Used Winding 1 W1 Winding 2 W2 Not Used Transformer winding where OLTC1 is located LowTapPosOLTC1 0 10 1 1 OLTC1 lowest tap position designation e g 1 RatedTapOLTC1 1 100 1 6 OLTC1 rated tap mid tap position designation e g 6 HighTapPsOLTC1 1 100 1 11 OLTC1 highest tap positio...

Page 116: ... section 2 of operate restrain characteristic in SlopeSection3 30 0 100 0 0 1 80 0 Slope in section 3 of operate restrain characteristic in I2 I1Ratio 5 0 100 0 0 1 15 0 Max ratio of 2nd harm to fundamental harm dif curr in I5 I1Ratio 5 0 100 0 0 1 25 0 Max ratio of 5th harm to fundamental harm dif curr in OpenCTEnable Off On Off Open CT detection feature Open CTEnable Off On tOCTAlarmDelay 0 100 ...

Page 117: ...for W1 side On Off ZSCurrSubtrW2 Off On On Enable zer seq current subtraction for W2 side On Off ZSCurrSubtrW3 Off On On Enable zer seq current subtraction for W3 side On Off TconfigForW1 No Yes No Two CT inputs T config for winding 1 YES NO CT1RatingW1 1 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A T branch 1 on transf W1 side CT2RatingW1 1 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary in A T branch 2 on transf W1 side Tco...

Page 118: ...TC2 0 10 1 1 OLTC2 lowest tap position designation e g 1 RatedTapOLTC2 1 100 1 6 OLTC2 rated tap mid tap position designation e g 6 HighTapPsOLTC2 1 100 1 11 OLTC2 highest tap position designation e g 11 TapHighVoltTC2 1 100 1 1 OLTC2 end tap position with winding highest no load voltage StepSizeOLTC2 0 01 30 00 0 01 1 00 Voltage change per OLTC2 step in percent of rated voltage 6 1 6 Monitored da...

Page 119: ...rotection is to determine whether a fault is within the protected zone or outside of the protected zone The protected zone is limited by the position of current transformers see Figure 32 and in principle can include more objects than just a transformer If the fault is found to be internal the faulty power transformer must be quickly disconnected from the system The main CTs are normally supposed ...

Page 120: ...culate off line matrix coefficients required in order to perform the on line current comparison by means of a fixed equation The negative sequence current based internal external fault discriminator is used with advantage in order to determine whether a fault is internal or external It not only positively discriminates between internal and external faults but can also independently detect minor fa...

Page 121: ...nce side whenever possible the first winding with star connection all currents magnitudes are always referred to the first winding of the power transformer typically transformer high voltage side The two steps of conversion are made simultaneously on line by the pre programmed coefficient matrices as shown in equation1 for a two winding power transformer and in equation 2 for a three winding power...

Page 122: ... the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W2 side IL2_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W2 side IL3_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W2 side IL1_W3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W3 side IL2_W3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W3 side IL3_W3 is the fundamenta...

Page 123: ...nated see section Optional Elimination of zero sequence currents then the differential currents can consist only of the positive and the negative sequence currents When the zero sequence current is subtracted on one side of the power transformer then it is subtracted from each individual phase current As it can be seen from equation 1 and equation 2 the first entered winding W1 is always taken for...

Page 124: ... 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 1 1 0 é ù ê ú ê ú ê ú ë û EQUATION1232 V1 EN Equation 8 Not applicable Matrix on the left used Matrix for winding with 120 lagging 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 1 2 1 é ù ê ú ê ú ê ú ë û EQUATION1233 V1 EN Equation 9 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 é ù ê ú ê ú ê ú ë û EQUATION1234 V1 EN Equation 10 Matrix for winding with 150 lagging 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 3 0 1 1 é ù ê ú ê ú ê ú ë û EQUATION1235 V1 EN Equation 11 No...

Page 125: ...or group and enabled zero sequence current reduction on HV side will be derived From the given power transformer vector group the following is possible to be concluded 1 The HV star Y connected winding will be used as the reference winding and zero sequence currents shall be subtracted on that side 2 The LV winding is lagging for 150 With the help of table 47 the following matrix equation can be w...

Page 126: ...on bias current The fundamental frequency differential currents are the usual differential currents the magnitudes which are applied in a phase wise manner to the operate restrain characteristic of the differential protection The magnitudes of the differential currents can be read as service values from the function and they are available as outputs IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG from the differential pr...

Page 127: ... within the protected power transformer three winding differential protection in the IED can on line compensate for up to two load tap changers within the protected power transformer Differential current alarm Fundamental frequency differential current level is monitored all the time within the differential function As soon as all three fundamental frequency differential currents are above the set...

Page 128: ...to determine the bias current for such T configuration the two separate currents flowing in the T side are scaled down to the protected power transform level by means of additional settings This is done in order to prevent unwanted de sensitizing of the overall differential protection In addition to that the resultant currents the sum of two currents into the protected power transformer winding wh...

Page 129: ...h differential currents where it should be beyond any doubt that the fault is internal This settable limit is constant and not proportional to the bias current Neither harmonic nor any other restrain is applied to this limit which is therefore allowed to trip the power transformer instantaneously The restrained stabilized part of the differential protection compares the calculated fundamental diff...

Page 130: ...restrained operate characteristics where 100 Ioperate slope Irestrain D D EQUATION1246 V1 EN The operate restrain characteristic is tailor made and can be designed freely by the user after his needs The default characteristic is recommended to be used It gives good results in a majority of applications The operate restrain characteristic has in principle three sections with a section wise proporti...

Page 131: ...system possibly a fault in the protected power transformer The negative sequence currents are a measurable indication of an abnormal condition similar to the zero sequence current One of the several advantages of the negative sequence currents compared to the zero sequence currents is that they provide coverage for phase to phase and power transformer turn to turn faults Theoretically the negative...

Page 132: ...rrent on the W2 side in primary amperes phase L1 reference Ur_W1 is the transformer rated phase to phase voltage on the W1 side setting parameter Ur_W2 is the transformer rated phase to phase voltage on W2 side setting parameter a is the complex operator for sequence quantities 120 1 3 2 2 j a e j o EQUATION1248 V1 EN Equation 24 Because the negative sequence currents always form the symmetrical t...

Page 133: ... dependability between internal and external faults The internal external fault discriminator responds to the magnitudes and the relative phase angles of the negative sequence fault currents at the different windings of the protected power transformer The negative sequence fault currents must first be referred to the same phase reference side and put to the same magnitude reference This is done by...

Page 134: ...urrent is higher than 110 of IBase then 10 of the bias current is added to the IminNegSeq Only if the magnitudes of both negative sequence current contributions are above the actual limit the relative position between these two phasors is checked If either of the negative sequence current contributions which should be compared is too small less than the set value for IminNegSeq no directional comp...

Page 135: ...ransformer after compensation of the transformer turns ratio and phase displacement by using equation 23 for an unsymmetrical external fault Observe that the relative phase angle between these two phasors is 180 electrical degrees at any point in time No current transformer saturation was assumed for this case en05000189 vsd 0 1 kA 30 210 60 240 90 270 150 330 180 0 0 2 kA 0 3 kA 0 4 kA steady sta...

Page 136: ...or internal fault with CT saturation It shall be noted that additional security measures are implemented in the internal external fault discriminator algorithm in order to guarantee proper operation with heavily saturated current transformers The trustworthy information on whether a fault is internal or external is typically obtained in about 10ms after the fault inception depending on the setting...

Page 137: ...n The sensitive negative sequence current based turn to turn fault protection detects the low level faults which are not detected by the traditional differential protection until they develop into more severe faults including power transformer iron core The sensitive protection is independent from the traditional differential protection and is a very good complement to it The essential part of thi...

Page 138: ...fferential currents during power transformer energizing are shown in figure 37 The harmonic analysis is only applied in those phases where start signals have been set For example if the content of the 2nd harmonic in the instantaneous differential current of phase L1 is above the setting I2 I1Ratio then a block signal is set for that phase which can be read as BLK2HL1 output of the differential pr...

Page 139: ...bias characteristic that is in the restrain region cross blocking from that phase will be inhibited In this way cross blocking of the temporary nature is achieved It should be noted that this is the default setting value for this parameter When parameter CrossBlockEn Off any cross blocking between phases will be disabled It is recommended to use the value Off with caution in order to avoid the unw...

Page 140: ...ecisely the same time this feature cannot operate differential protection generates a trip signal if the false differential current is sufficiently high An open CT circuit is typically detected in 12 14 ms and if the load in the protected circuit is relatively high about the nominal load the unwanted trip cannot always be prevented Still the information about what was the cause of the open CT seco...

Page 141: ...I regarding which open CT circuit has been detected 1 CT input No 1 2 CT input No 2 4 Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding in which phase an open CT circuit has been detected 1 Phase L1 2 Phase L2 3 Phase L3 Once the open CT condition is declared the algorithm stops to search for further open CT circuits It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected...

Page 142: ...rrent contributions from individual windings Fundamental frequency phasor based Diff current phase L3 phase current contributions from individual windings Negative sequence diff current NS current contribution from individual windings en06000554 3 en vsd MAX Settings for Zer Seq Current Reduction IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IDNSMAG IDL2 IDL1 IDL3 IBIAS Open CT logic on W1 side Open CT logic on W2 side...

Page 143: ... from each of the three fundamental frequency differential currents and at the same time from the common bias current 2 Calculates three instantaneous differential currents They are used for harmonic and waveform analysis Instantaneous differential currents are useful for post fault analysis using disturbance recording 3 Calculates negative sequence differential current Contributions to it from bo...

Page 144: ...Figure 40 Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for external internal fault discriminator en05000278 vsd TRIPRESL1 TRIPRESL2 TRIPRESL3 OR TRIPRES TRIPUNREL1 TRIPUNREL2 TRIPUNREL3 OR TRIPUNRE OR TRIP TRNSUNR TRNSSENS IEC05000278 V1 EN Figure 41 Transformer differential protection internal grouping of tripping signals Section 6 1MRK502052 UEN B Differential protection 138 Tech...

Page 145: ...n any eventual block signals are overridden and unrestrained negative sequence trip TRNSUNR and common trip TRIP are issued without any further delay This feature is called the unrestrained negative sequence protection 110 bias 4 The sensitive negative sequence differential protection is independent of any start signals It is meant to detect smaller internal faults such as turn to turn faults whic...

Page 146: ...ed as well as common that is three phase signals a b a b t tAlarm Delay IDALARM a b a b a b a b IDL1 MAG I Diff Alarm I Diff Alarm I Diff Alarm IDL2 MAG IDL3 MAG en06000546 vsd IEC06000546 V1 EN Figure 43 Differential current alarm logic 6 1 8 Technical data Table 48 T2WPDIF T3WPDIF technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic Adaptable 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I I...

Page 147: ...ter fault currents The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to double on one side and decreasing same phase current to zero on the other side 6 2 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF 6 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF Id SYMBOL CC V2 EN...

Page 148: ... Name Type Default Description ISI GROUP SIGNAL Single phase current input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip Table 50 HZPDIF Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal MEASVOLT REAL Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side 6 2 5 Settings Table 51 HZPDIF Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ...

Page 149: ...resistor RS with high ohmic value and an over current element Thus the high impedance differential protection responds to the current flowing through the measuring branch However this current is result of a differential voltage caused by this parallel CT connection across the measuring branch Non linear resistor that is metrosil is used in order to protect entire scheme from high peak voltages whi...

Page 150: ... suitable value for setting resistor RS is selected in such a way that the saturated CT secondary winding provides a much lower impedance path for the false differential current than the measuring branch In case of an external fault causing current transformer saturation the non saturated current transformers drive most of the spill differential current through the secondary winding of the saturat...

Page 151: ...ts available as well IEC05000301 V1 EN Figure 46 Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF 6 2 8 Technical data Table 53 HZPDIF technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage 10 900 V I U R 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio 95 at 30 900 V Maximum continuous power U Trip2 SeriesResistor 200 W Operate time at 0 to 10 x Ud Min 5 ms Max 15 ms Res...

Page 152: ...nsient stability of the non faulted generators Normally the short circuit fault current is very large that is significantly larger than the generator rated current There is a risk that a short circuit can occur between phases close to the neutral point of the generator thus causing a relatively small fault current The fault current can also be limited due to low excitation of the generator Therefo...

Page 153: ... input1 I3PNCT2 GROUP SIGNAL Neutral side input2 I3PTCT1 GROUP SIGNAL Terminal side input1 I3PTCT2 GROUP SIGNAL Terminal side input2 BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip command by the restrained diff protection BLKUNRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip by unrestrained instantaneous diff prot BLKNSUNR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestr neg seq differential feature BLKNSSEN BOOL...

Page 154: ...y IDL1 REAL Instantaneous differential current L1 in primary Amperes IDL2 REAL Instantaneous differential current L2 in primary Amperes IDL3 REAL Instantaneous differential current L3 in primary Amperes IDNSMAG REAL Negative Sequence Differential current in primary Amperes IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the common Bias current in primary Amperes 6 3 5 Settings Table 56 GENPDIF Group settings basic Name V...

Page 155: ...cent TempIdMin 1 0 5 0 IdMin 0 1 2 0 Temp Id pickup when input raisePickUp 1 multiple of IdMin AddTripDelay 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Additional trip delay when input raisePickUp 1 OperDCBiasing Off On Off Operation DC biasing On Off OpenCTEnable Off On Off Open CT detection feature Off On tOCTAlarmDelay 0 100 10 000 s 0 001 1 000 Open CT time to alarm if an open CT is detected in sec tOCTResetDe...

Page 156: ... is internal the faulty generator must be quickly tripped that is disconnected from the network the field breaker tripped and the agent to the prime mover interrupted GENPDIF function always uses reference default directions of CTs towards the protected generator as shown in figure 48 Thus it always measures the currents on the two sides of the generator with the same reference direction towards t...

Page 157: ...of the stator winding The DC and the 2nd and 5th harmonic components of each separate instantaneous differential current are extracted inside the differential protection 6 3 7 1 Function calculation principles To make a differential protection as sensitive and stable as possible the restrained differential characteristic is used The protection must be provided with a proportional bias which makes ...

Page 158: ... with less risk to operate for external faults The maximum principle brings as well more meaning to the breakpoint settings of the operate restrain characteristic max 1 2 3 1 2 3 Ibias IL n IL n IL n IL t IL t IL t EQUATION1666 V1 EN Equation 26 IL1n IL1t IL1n IL1t Idiff IEC07000018_3_en vsd IEC07000018 V3 EN Figure 49 Internal fault IL1n IL1t External fault IL1n IL1t IL1n IL1t Idiff 0 en07000019 ...

Page 159: ...nt The operate value is stabilized by the bias current This operate restrain characteristic is represented by a double slope double breakpoint characteristic The restrained characteristic is determined by the following 5 settings IdMin Sensitivity in section 1 set as multiple of generator rated current EndSection1 End of section 1 set as multiple of generator rated current EndSection2 End of secti...

Page 160: ... at high through fault currents which can be expected in this section Temporarily decreased sensitivity of differential protection is activated if the binary input DESENSIT is temporarily set to 1 TRUE In this case a new separate limit is superposed to the otherwise unchanged operate bias characteristic This limit is called TempIdMin and it is available as a setting The value of the setting TempId...

Page 161: ...y differential current Similar to the desensitization described above a separate temporary additional limit is activated The value of this limit is bounded to either the generator rated current or 3 times IdMin whichever is smaller This temporary extra limit decays exponentially from its maximum value with a time constant equal to T 1 second This feature must be used when unmatched CTs are used on...

Page 162: ...ant external fault can be suspected This conclusion can be drawn because at external faults major false differential currents can only exist when one or more current transformers saturate transiently In this case the false instantaneous differential currents are highly polluted by higher harmonic components the 2nd and the 5th The existence of relatively high negative sequence currents is in itsel...

Page 163: ...range 0 02 0 20 of the protected generator rated current Adaptability is introduced if the bias current is higher than 150 rated current Adaptability is introduced 10 ms after this limit of 150 rated current has been crossed so that the internal external discriminator is given the time to detect correctly a fault before an eventual CT saturation sets in The threshold IMinNegSeq is dynamically incr...

Page 164: ...on are ignored and the differential protection operates immediately without any further delay This makes the overall generator differential protection very fast Operation of this protection is signaled on the output of GENPDIF as TRNSUNRE Sensitive negative sequence differential protection The difference from the unrestrained negative sequence differential protection described above is that the se...

Page 165: ...arily a minor internal fault is assumed to have happened simultaneously with a predominant external one A trip command is then allowed 6 3 7 5 Open CT detection feature Transformer differential protection has a built in advanced open CT detection feature A sudden inadvertently opened CT circuit may cause an unexpected and unwanted operation of the Transformer differential protection under normal l...

Page 166: ... then all the differential functions are blocked except the unrestrained instantaneous differential An alarm signal is also produced after a settable delay tOCTAlarmDelay to report to operational personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected When the open CT condition is removed that is the previously open CT is reconnected the functions remain blocked for a specified interval of...

Page 167: ...eme According to the cross block logic to issue a common trip command the harmonic contents in all phases with a start signal set start TRUE must be below the limit defined with the setting HarmDistLimit In the opposite case no trip command is issued The cross block logic is active if the setting OpCrossBlock Yes By always using the cross block logic the false trips can be prevented for external f...

Page 168: ...r IL1N neg seq Phasor IL1T neg seq Internal External Fault Discriminator and Sensitive differential protection Calculation negative sequence Idiff Harm Block Analog Outputs INTFAULT EXTFAULT OPENCT OPENCTAL en06000434 2 vsd The sensitive protection is deactivated above bias current 150 rated current IEC06000434 V3 EN Figure 54 Simplified principle design of the Generator differential protection GE...

Page 169: ...ULT IEC07000020 V2 EN Figure 55 Generator differential logic diagram 1 Internal External Fault discrimin ator STL1 STL2 STL3 OR AND EXTFAULT INTFAULT TRNSSENS TRNSUNR en07000021 vsd Constant IBIAS a b b a Neg Seq Diff Current Contributions OpNegSeqDiff On AND BLKNSSEN BLKNSUNR BLOCK IEC07000021 V2 EN Figure 56 Generator differential logic diagram 2 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 6 Differential protectio...

Page 170: ...F technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Unrestrained differential current limit 1 50 p u of IBase 1 0 of set value Reset ratio 95 Minimum pickup 0 05 1 00 p u of IBase 1 0 of Ir Negative sequence current level 0 02 0 20 p u of IBase 1 0 of Ir Operate time at 0 to 2 x IdMin restrained function Min 25 ms Max 35 ms Reset time at 2 to 0 x IdMin restrained function Min 10 ms Max 25 ms Operate...

Page 171: ...7 2 device number Restricted earth fault protection low impedance REFPDIF IdN I SYMBOL AA V1 EN 87N 6 4 2 Functionality Restricted earth fault protection low impedance function REFPDIF can be used on all directly or low impedance earthed windings The REFPDIF function provides high sensitivity and high speed tripping as it protects each winding separately and thus does not need inrush stabilization...

Page 172: ...DIFF ANGLE I2RATIO IEC06000251 V2 EN Figure 60 REFPDIF function block 6 4 4 Signals Table 61 REFPDIF Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for neutral current input I3PW1CT1 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for primary CT1 current input I3PW1CT2 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for primary CT2 current input I3PW2CT1 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for secondary CT1 current input I3...

Page 173: ...t Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On IdMin 4 0 100 0 IB 0 1 10 0 Maximum sensitivity in of IBase CTFactorPri1 1 0 10 0 0 1 1 0 CT factor for HV side CT1 CT1rated HVrated current CTFactorPri2 1 0 10 0 0 1 1 0 CT factor for HV side CT2 CT2rated HVrated current CTFactorSec1 1 0 10 0 0 1 1 0 CT factor for MV side CT1 CT1rated MVrated current CTFactorSec2 1 0 10 0 0 1 1 0 CT...

Page 174: ...ower transformer winding can have The high sensitivity and the high speed tend to make such a protection unstable Special measures must be taken to make it insensitive to conditions for which it should not operate for example heavy through faults of phase to phase type or heavy external earth faults REFPDIF is a differential protection of the low impedance type All three phase currents and the neu...

Page 175: ... L1 L2 L3 IN 3Izs1 Uzs Current in the neutral measured as IN serves as a directional reference because it has the same direction for both internal and external faults zone of protection Izs1 Izs1 Izs1 Return path through transformer IL1 IL2 IL3 3I0 3I0 3Izs2 Summation in the IED 3Izs1 L2 L3 Ifault L1 Power system Izs2 Izs2 Izs2 ROA block IN reference 3I0 block block operate Zero sequencedifferenti...

Page 176: ...internally processed zero sequence currents are 3Io and IN The vectorial sum is the REFPDIF differential current which is equal to Idiff IN 3Io The line zero sequence residual current is calculated from 3 line terminal currents A bias quantity must give stability against false operations due to high through fault currents To stabilize REFPDIF at external faults a fixed bias characteristic is imple...

Page 177: ...ith a high bias difficult conditions can be suspected and it will be more likely that the calculated differential current has a component of a false current primarily due to CT saturation This law is formulated by the operate bias characteristic This characteristic divides the Idiff Ibias plane in two areas The area above the operate bias characteristic is the operate area while the one below is t...

Page 178: ...hich the instrument current transformers operate Dependent on the magnitude of the bias current the corresponding zone section of the operate bias characteristic is applied when decidingwhetherto trip or nottotrip Ingeneral thehigherthebiascurrent thehigher the differential current required to produce a trip The bias current is the highest current of all separate input currents to REFPDIF that is ...

Page 179: ...nly appears if one or more current transformers saturate An external earth fault is thus assumed to have occurred when a high neutral current suddenly appears while at the same time the differential current Idiff remains low at least for a while This condition must be detected before a trip request is placed within REFPDIF Any search for external fault is aborted if a trip request has been placed ...

Page 180: ...o is at least 3 of the IBase current If a directional check is either unreliable or not possible to do due to too small currents then the direction is cancelled as a condition for an eventual trip If a directional check is executed the REFPDIF protection operation is only allowed if currents 3Io and IN as seen in Figure 61 and Figure 62 are both within the operating region determined by the set va...

Page 181: ... temporarily desensitized 7 If point P Ibias Idiff is found to be above the operate bias characteristic so that trip request counter is more than zero a directional check can be made The directional check is made only if Iresidual 3Io is more than 3 of the IBase current If the result of the check means external fault then the internal trip request is reset If the directional check cannot be execut...

Page 182: ...60 to 90 degrees 2 0 degrees Operate time trip at 0 to 10 x IdMin Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Reset time trip at 10 to 0 x IdMin Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Second harmonic blocking 60 0 of fundamental hidden setting 1 0 of Ir Section 6 1MRK502052 UEN B Differential protection 176 Technical manual ...

Page 183: ... zone full scheme protection for back up detection of short circuit and earth faults The full scheme technique provides back up protection of power lines with high sensitivity and low requirement on remote end communication The four zones have fully independent measuring and settings which gives high flexibility for all types of lines Built in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in the fu...

Page 184: ...OUP SIGNAL Connection for voltage signals POL_VOLT GROUP SIGNAL Connection for polarizing voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block due to fuse failure BLKZMTD BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for blocking of time domaine function BLKHSIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks time domain function at high SIR BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all operate output signals BLKPE BOOLEAN 0 Blocks phase to earth operation ...

Page 185: ...e Off Offset Forward Reverse Forward Direction mode LoadEncMode Off On Off Load encroachment mode Off On ReachMode Overreach Underreach Overreach Reach mode Over Underreach ZnTimerSel Timers seperated Timers linked Internal start Start from PhSel External start Timers seperated Zone timer selection OpModePE Off On On Operation mode Off On of Phase Earth loops ZPE 0 005 3000 000 Ohm p 0 001 30 000 ...

Page 186: ...ault Description OffsetMhoDir Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Direction mode for offset mho OpModetPE Off On On Operation mode Off On of Zone timer Ph E OpModetPP Off On On Operation mode Off On of Zone timer Ph ph Table 73 ZMHPDIS Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 7 1 6 O...

Page 187: ... X Zs 0 R Zs Z1 Zs 2Z1 IEC11000223 2 en vsd C D IEC11000223 V2 EN Figure 65 Mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100 memorized positive sequence voltages This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho circle during faults than a plain cross polarized characteristic However if the source ...

Page 188: ... is set to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced The latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone zone 2 or zone 3 elements and reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either because of less likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally The o...

Page 189: ...s on the parameter ZnTimerSel setting The parameter ZnTimerSel can be set to Timers separated Phase to earth and phase to phase timers are triggered by the respective measuring loop start signals Timers linked Start of any of the phase to earth or phase to phase loops will trigger both the phase to earth or phase to phase timers Internal start Phase to earth and phase to phase timers are triggered...

Page 190: ...ctivated during some ms after fault has been detected by ZSMGAPC to avoid unwanted operations due to transients It shall be connected to the BLKZMTD output signal of ZSMGAPC function At SIR values 10 the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built in resonance circuit in the CVT which reduce the secondary voltage for a while The input BLKHSIR is connected to the output signal HSIR...

Page 191: ... voltage will prevent collapse of the Mho circle for close in faults Operation occurs if 90 β 270 ZPP I 2 L 1 L L1L2 comp U U ß IL1L2 X IL1L2 R ZPP I 2 L 1 L 2 L 1 L U pol U en07000109 vsd IEC07000109 V1 EN Figure 66 Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1 to L2 fault Offset Mho The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the setting param...

Page 192: ...L2 voltage ZRevPP is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault in reverse direction ZPP I 2 L 1 L L1L2 comp1 U U ß IL1L2jX IL1L2R ZPP I 2 L 1 L vPP Re Z 2 L 1 L I U U 2 Ucomp IF ZF UL1L2 en07000110 vsd IEC07000110 V1 EN Figure 67 Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase L1 to L2 fault Operation occurs if 90 β 270 Offset mho forward direction When fo...

Page 193: ...inary coded information to the input DIRCND See Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR for information about the mho directional element IL1L2jX UL1L2 f ArgDir IL1L2 ArgNegRes ZPP en07000111 vsd IEC07000111 V1 EN Figure 68 Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase L1 to L2 fault Offset mho reverse direction The operation area for offset mho in revers...

Page 194: ...h fault Mho The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a conventional way The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from the earth return path For an earth fault in phase L1 the compensation voltage Ucomp can be derived as shown in Figure 70 Section 7 1MRK502052 UEN B Impedance protection 188 Technical manual ...

Page 195: ...comp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1 to earth fault is β arg arg U I KN ZPE Upol L L I 1 1 0 3 GUID A9492CDF D3B7 4DC5 8E06 6638BEE2540B V2 EN Equation 40 where UL1 is the phase voltage in faulty phase L1 IL1 is the phase current in faulty phase L1 3I0 is the zero sequence current in faulty phase L1 KN Z0 Z1 3 Z1 the setting parameter for the zero sequence compensation consisting of the mag...

Page 196: ... forward respective reverse direction The vector ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPE 180 The condition for operation at phase to earth fault is that the angle β between the two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see figure 71 The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle The angle β for L1...

Page 197: ...eration Beside the basic criteria for offset mho according to equation 41 and 90 β 270 also the criteria that the angle φ between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant See figure 72 Operation occurs if 90 β 270 and ArgDir φ ArgNegRes where ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element ZDMRDIR Arg...

Page 198: ...tra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant The operation area in second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 ArgDir and in fourth quadrant ArgNegRes 180 see figure 73 The conditions for operation of offset mho in reverse direction for L1 to earth fault is 90 β 270 and 180 Argdir φ ArgNegRes 180 The...

Page 199: ...e phase to phase signals are designated by L1L2 L2L3 and L3L1 Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop Zone measuring condition which follows the operating equations described above Group functional input signal STCND as presented in figure 74 The ZMHPDIS function block is used in the IED for each zone The STCN...

Page 200: ...d to the STDIRCND output signal on ZDMRDIR function OffsetMhoDir Non directional DirMode Offset OR LDCND LoadEnchMode On Off AND STCND IEC11000216 1 en vsd DIRCND OffsetMhoDir Forward Reverse DirMode Forward Reverse T F BLKZ BLOCK Release AND AND AND AND AND T F True IEC11000216 V1 EN Figure 74 Simplified logic for release start signal When load encroachment mode is switched on LoadEnchMode On sta...

Page 201: ... STL3 STPP START OR STL1N STL2N STL3N STL1L2 STL2L3 STL3L1 IEC11000217 V1 EN Figure 75 Composition of starting signals Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 76 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 7 Impedance protection 195 Technical manual ...

Page 202: ... distance protection is symbolically presented in figure 77 1 timers seperated 2 timers linked 3 internal start 4 start from phSel 5 external start internalCommonStart phSelStart externalCommonStart t tON t tON BLOCK TRPE TRPP 1 1 Internal start a b a b a b a b STTIMER STPP STPE Internal start IEC12000463 3 en vsd FALSE 1 ZnTimerSel IEC12000463 V2 EN Figure 77 Zone timer logic Section 7 1MRK502052...

Page 203: ...mic overreach 5 at 85 degrees measured with CVT s and 0 5 SIR 30 Definite time delay Ph Ph and Ph E operation 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 60 ms whichever is greater Operate time 22 ms typically IEC 60255 121 Reset ratio 105 typically Reset time at 0 5 to 1 5 x Zreach Min 30 ms Max 45 ms 7 2 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR 7 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 i...

Page 204: ...ent signals to Mho function VOLT GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage signals to Mho function POL GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for polarization voltage signals to Mho function STFW BOOLEAN Start in forward direction STRV BOOLEAN Start in reverse direction STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per measuring loop Table 77 ZDARDIR Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SI...

Page 205: ...ection IMinOpPE 5 30 IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for Phase Earth loops IMinOpPP 5 30 IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase phase current for Phase Phase loops Table 80 ZDMRDIR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups Table 81 ZDARDIR Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Desc...

Page 206: ... phase L2 L3Dir INTEGER 1 Forward 2 Reverse 0 No direction Direction in phase L3 L1R REAL Ohm Resistance in phase L1 L1X REAL Ohm Reactance in phase L1 L2R REAL Ohm Resistance in phase L2 L2X REAL Ohm Reactance in phase L2 L3R REAL Ohm Resistance in phase L3 L3X REAL Ohm Reactance in phase L3 7 2 7 Operation principle 7 2 7 1 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR The evaluat...

Page 207: ...ged unless system studies show the necessity If one sets DirEvalType to Comparator which is recommended when using the mho characteristic then the directional lines are computed by means of a comparator type calculation meaning that the directional lines are based on mho circles of infinite radius The default setting value Impedance otherwise means that the directional lines are implemented based ...

Page 208: ...ll unsymmetrical faults including close in faults For close in three phase faults the U1L1M memory voltage based on the same positive sequence voltage ensures correct directional discrimination The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored After 100ms the following occurs If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the cond...

Page 209: ... made up as an OR function of all the reverse starting conditions that is STRVL1N STRVL2N STRVL3N STRVL1L2 STRVL2L3 and STRVL3L1 7 3 High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS 7 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number High speed distance protection zone zone 1 ZMFPDIS S00346 V1 EN 21 7 3 2 Functionality The High speed dist...

Page 210: ...f the distance zones in the load exporting end during phase to earth faults on heavily loaded power lines It also reduces underreach in the importing end The ZMFPDIS function block itself incorporates a phase selection element and a directional element contrary to previous designs in the 670 series where these elements were represented with separate function blocks The operation of the phase selec...

Page 211: ... STFWL2 STFWL3 STFWPE STRVL1 STRVL2 STRVL3 STRVPE STFW1PH STFW2PH STFW3PH STPE STPP IEC11000433 1 en vsd IEC11000433 V1 EN Figure 80 ZMFPDIS function block 7 3 4 Signals Table 85 ZMFPDIS Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current input U3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Resets all outputs and internal timers of entire function...

Page 212: ...ard direction TRL1Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 1 forward direction TRL2Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 1 forward direction TRL3Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 1 forward direction TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 2 forward direction TRL1Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 2 forward direction TRL2Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 2 forward direction TRL...

Page 213: ...direction STARTND BOOLEAN Fault detected in any phase or phases any direction STNDL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 any direction STNDL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 any direction STNDL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 any direction STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 forward direction STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 forward direction STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in p...

Page 214: ...0 01 5 00 Positive sequence resistive reach Ph E zone 1 X0Z1 0 01 9000 00 Ohm p 0 01 100 00 Zero sequence reactance reach zone 1 R0Z1 0 00 3000 00 Ohm p 0 01 15 00 Zero sequence resistive reach zone 1 RFPPZ1 0 01 9000 00 Ohm l 0 01 30 00 Fault resistance reach Ph Ph zone 1 RFPEZ1 0 01 9000 00 Ohm l 0 01 100 00 Fault resistance reach Ph E zone 1 tPPZ1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay to trip P...

Page 215: ... Fault resistance reach Ph E zone 3 tPPZ3 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 800 Time delay to trip Phase Phase zone 3 tPEZ3 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 800 Time delay to trip Phase Earth zone 3 IMinOpPPZ3 5 6000 IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph ph current for Phase Phase loops zone 3 IMinOpPEZ3 5 6000 IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for Phase Earth loops zone 3 OpModeZ4 Disable Zone Enable Ph E Enable PhPh Enable...

Page 216: ... zone 5 IMinOpPPZ5 5 6000 IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph ph current for Phase Phase loops zone 5 IMinOpPEZ5 5 6000 IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for Phase Earth loops zone 5 OpModeZRV Disable Zone Enable Ph E Enable PhPh Enable Ph E PhPh Enable Ph E PhPh On Off setting for Ph Ph and Ph E loops zone RV X1ZRV 0 01 3000 00 Ohm p 0 01 40 00 Positive sequence reactance reach zone RV R1ZRV 0 00 1000...

Page 217: ...Ph E PhPh Enable Ph E PhPh On Off setting for Ph Ph and Ph E trip output zone 3 TimerLinksZ3 LoopLink tPP tPE LoopLink ZoneLink No Links LoopLink tPP tPE How start of trip delay timers should be linked for zone 3 TimerModeZ4 Disable all Enable Ph E Enable PhPh Enable Ph E PhPh Enable Ph E PhPh On Off setting for Ph Ph and Ph E trip output zone 4 TimerLinksZ4 LoopLink tPP tPE LoopLink ZoneLink No L...

Page 218: ... direction Direction in loop L2L3 L3L1Dir INTEGER 1 Forward 2 Reverse 0 No direction Direction in loop L3L1 L1R REAL Ohm Resistance in phase L1 L1X REAL Ohm Reactance in phase L1 L2R REAL Ohm Resistance in phase L2 L2X REAL Ohm Reactance in phase L2 L3R REAL Ohm Resistance in phase L3 L3X REAL Ohm Reactance in phase L3 7 3 7 Operation principle Settings input and output names are sometimes mention...

Page 219: ... L1 L1 N L2 N L3 N L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1 Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 L1 N L2 N L3 N L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1 Zone RV IEC05000458 V2 EN Figure 81 The different measuring loops at phase to earth fault and phase to phase fault Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection function with six measuring elements Tansients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the transi...

Page 220: ...wing to the current change criteria distinguish faults with minimum influence from load and fault impedance In other words it is not restricted by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change phase This significantly improves performance for remote phase to earth faults on heavily loaded lines One exception however is three phase faults for which the load encroachment characteristi...

Page 221: ...eover a basic negative sequence directional evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during high load condition Finally a zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever there is more or less exclusive zero sequence in feed The directional sectors that represent forward direction one per measuring loop are defined by the following equations 15 1 1 1 120 1 1 1 arg k U k U I L ...

Page 222: ...ower swings There is need for external blocking of the ZMFPDIS function during power swings either from the Power Swing Blocking function ZMRPSB or an external device 7 3 7 7 Measuring principles All ZMFPDIS zones operate according to the non directional impedance characteristics presented in Figure 82 and Figure 83 The phase to earth characteristic is given in ohms per loop domain while the phase...

Page 223: ... R R1PE Rn Ohm loop IEC11000415 1 en vsd X0PE X1PE Xn 3 R0PE R1PE Rn 3 j N j N X Ohm loop IEC11000415 V1 EN Figure 82 ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase to earth measuring ohm loop domain 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 7 Impedance protection 217 Technical manual ...

Page 224: ...elation to the fault type can be presented as in Figure 84 The main intention with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach should be interpreted and set Note in particular that the setting RFPP always represents the total fault resistance of the loop regardless the fact that the fault resistance arc may be divided into parts like for three phase or phase to phase faults Th...

Page 225: ...f load encroachment is illustrated to the left in Figure 85 A load impedance within the characteristic would cause an unwanted trip The traditional way of avoiding this situation is to set the distance zone resistive reach with a security margin to the minimum load impedance The drawback with this approach is that the sensitivity of the protection to detect resistive faults is reduced The IED has ...

Page 226: ...achment characteristic 7 3 7 9 Simplified logic schemes PHSL1 PHSL2 PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phase selection element They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones and determine which loops should be released to operate FWL1 FWL2 FWL3L1 and RVL1 RVL2 RVL3L1 are the internal binary signals from the Directional element An FW signal is activated if the cri...

Page 227: ...Connection of directional signals to Zones ZML1Zx NDZx PHSL1 AND OR ZML2Zx PHSL2 AND ZML3Zx PHSL3 AND ZML1L2Zx PHSL1L2 AND ZML2L3Zx PHSL2L3 AND ZML3L1Zx PHSL3L1 AND OR DIRL1Zx AND DIRL2Zx AND AND OR AND AND AND DIRL3Zx DIRL1L2Zx DIRL2L3Zx DIRL3L1Zx L1Zx PEZx L2Zx L3Zx PPZx OR OR OR IEC12000140 1 en vsd IEC12000140 V1 EN Figure 87 Intermediate logic 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 7 Impedance protection 2...

Page 228: ...k LNKZRV LNKZ2 LNKZx OR LNKZ3 LNKZ4 LNKZ5 ZoneLinkStart STPHS Phase Selection 1st starting zone VTSZ BLKZx BLKTRZx OR OR OR OR OR AND AND OR AND AND AND TimerModeZx Enable Ph Ph Ph E AND AND IEC12000139 3 en vsdx IEC12000139 V3 EN Figure 88 Logic for linking of timers Section 7 1MRK502052 UEN B Impedance protection 222 Technical manual ...

Page 229: ...15 ms STARTZx STL2Zx STL3Zx AND AND AND TZx BLOCK VTSZ BLKZx BLKTRZx t 15 ms AND t 15 ms AND STNDZx OR OR L1Zx L2Zx L3Zx PPZx NDZx OR PEZx IEC12000138 1 en vsd IEC12000138 V1 EN Figure 89 Start and trip outputs 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 7 Impedance protection 223 Technical manual ...

Page 230: ...SZ OR t 15 ms AND OR OR OR OR t 15 ms AND t 15 ms AND STARTND OR OR t 15 ms AND STPHS t 15 ms AND STPP STPE IEC12000133 1 en vsd IEC12000133 V1 EN Figure 90 Additional start outputs 1 Section 7 1MRK502052 UEN B Impedance protection 224 Technical manual ...

Page 231: ...FW3PH IEC12000134 1 en vsd IEC12000134 V1 EN Figure 91 Additional start outputs 2 PHSL1 PHSL2 PHSL3 PHSL1L2 PHSL2L3 PHSL3L1 STRVL1 STRVL2 STRVL3 RVL1 RVL2 RVL1L2 RVL3 RVL2L3 RVL3L1 BLOCK VTSZ OR t 15 ms AND AND AND AND AND AND AND OR OR OR OR IN present t 15 ms AND t 15 ms AND STRVPE AND IEC12000141 1 en vsd IEC12000141 V1 EN Figure 92 Additional start outputs 3 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 7 Impedanc...

Page 232: ...ed with CVTs and 0 5 SIR 30 Definite time delay to trip Ph E and Ph Ph operation 0 000 60 000 s 2 0 or 35 ms whichever is greater Operate time 16 ms typically IEC 60255 121 Reset time at 0 1 to 2 x Zreach Min 20 ms Max 35 ms Reset ratio 105 typically 7 4 High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS 7 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37...

Page 233: ...ion scheme for protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations such as parallel lines multi terminal lines and so on A new built in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the distance zones in the load exporting end during phase to earth faults on heavily loaded power lines It also reduces underreach in the importing end The ZMFCPDIS function block inc...

Page 234: ...TNDZ1 STARTZ2 STL1Z2 STL2Z2 STL3Z2 STNDZ2 STARTZ3 STNDZ3 STARTZ4 STNDZ4 STARTZ5 STNDZ5 STARTZRV STL1ZRV STL2ZRV STL3ZRV STNDZRV STARTND STNDL1 STNDL2 STNDL3 STFWL1 STFWL2 STFWL3 STFWPE STRVL1 STRVL2 STRVL3 STRVPE STFW1PH STFW2PH STFW3PH STPE STPP ZL1 ZL1RANG ZL1ANGL ZL2 ZL2RANG ZL2ANGL ZL3 ZL3RANG ZL3ANGL IEC11000422 vsdx IEC11000422 V2 EN Figure 93 ZMFCPDIS function block Section 7 1MRK502052 UEN...

Page 235: ...ts all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 3 BLKTRZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 4 BLKTRZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of zone 5 BLKTRZRV BOOLEAN 0 Resets all trip outputs and internal timers of reverse zone Table 93 ZMFCPDIS Output signals Name Type Description TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 forward direction...

Page 236: ...phase or phases from zone 5 zone direction STNDZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 any direction STARTZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV reverse dir STL1ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone RV reverse direction STL2ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone RV reverse direction STL3ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone RV reverse direction STNDZRV BOOLEAN Start...

Page 237: ...hm p 0 01 400 00 Reactance determining the load impedance area ArgLd 5 70 Deg 1 30 Angle determining the load impedance area CVTtype Any Passive type None Magnetic Passive type CVT selection determining the filtering of the function OpModeZ1 Disable Zone Enable Ph E Enable PhPh Enable Ph E PhPh Enable Ph E PhPh On Off setting for Ph Ph and Ph E loops zone 1 X1FwPPZ1 0 01 3000 00 Ohm p 0 01 30 00 P...

Page 238: ...0 01 40 00 Pos seq react reach Ph Ph zone 2 reverse direction X1FwPEZ2 0 01 3000 00 Ohm p 0 01 40 00 Positive seq reactance reach Ph E zone 2 forward dir R1FwPEZ2 0 00 1000 00 Ohm p 0 01 5 00 Positive seq resistive reach Ph E zone 2 forward dir X0FwPEZ2 0 01 9000 00 Ohm p 0 01 120 00 Zero seq reactance reach Ph E zone 2 forward direction R0FwPEZ2 0 00 3000 00 Ohm p 0 01 15 00 Zero seq resistive re...

Page 239: ...0 00 Ohm l 0 01 100 00 Fault resistance reach Ph E zone 3 opposite to zone dir tPPZ3 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 800 Time delay to trip Phase Phase zone 3 tPEZ3 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 800 Time delay to trip Phase Earth zone 3 IMinOpPPZ3 5 6000 IB 1 10 Minimum operate ph ph current for Phase Phase loops zone 3 IMinOpPEZ3 5 6000 IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for Phase Earth loops zone 3 OpModeZ4 ...

Page 240: ...Forward Direction of zone 5 which will be the Fw direction of zone 5 X1FwPPZ5 0 01 3000 00 Ohm p 0 01 40 00 Positive seq reactance reach Ph Ph zone 5 zone direction R1FwPPZ5 0 00 1000 00 Ohm p 0 01 5 00 Positive seq resistive reach Ph Ph zone 5 zone direction RFFwPPZ5 0 01 9000 00 Ohm l 0 01 30 00 Fault resistance reach Ph Ph zone 5 zone direction X1RvPPZ5 0 01 3000 00 Ohm p 0 01 40 00 Pos seq rea...

Page 241: ...everse dir X0FwPEZRV 0 01 9000 00 Ohm p 0 01 120 00 Zero seq reactance reach Ph E zone RV reverse direction R0FwPEZRV 0 00 3000 00 Ohm p 0 01 15 00 Zero seq resistive reach Ph E zone RV reverse direction RFPEZRV 0 01 9000 00 Ohm l 0 01 100 00 Fault resistance reach Ph E zone RV rev forw dir X1RvPEZRV 0 01 3000 00 Ohm p 0 01 40 00 Pos seq react reach Ph E zone RV forward direction tPPZRV 0 000 60 0...

Page 242: ...PhPh Enable Ph E PhPh On Off setting for Ph Ph and Ph E trip output zone 4 TimerLinksZ4 LoopLink tPP tPE LoopLink ZoneLink No Links LoopLink tPP tPE How start of trip delay timers should be linked for zone 4 TimerModeZ5 Disable all Enable Ph E Enable PhPh Enable Ph E PhPh Enable Ph E PhPh On Off setting for Ph Ph and Ph E trip output zone 5 TimerLinksZ5 LoopLink tPP tPE LoopLink ZoneLink No Links ...

Page 243: ...tance in phase L3 L3X REAL Ohm Reactance in phase L3 7 4 7 Operation principle Settings input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text without its zone suffix i e BLKZx instead of BLKZ3 when the description is equally valid for all zones 7 4 7 1 Filtering Practically all voltage current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFCPDIS function are derived from fundamental fr...

Page 244: ...s like one independent distance protection function with six measuring elements It is well known that transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the transient overreach of a distance protection At the same time these transients can be very diverse in nature from one type to the other in fact more diverse than can be distinguished by the algorithm itself in the course of a few millisecon...

Page 245: ... the current change phase This significantly improves performance for remote phase to earth faults on heavily loaded lines One exception however is three phase faults for which the load encroachment characteristic always has to be applied in order to distinguish fault from load The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and carry on the fault indication after th...

Page 246: ...onal evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during high load condition Finally zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever there is more or less exclusive zero sequence in feed Fundamentally the directional sectors that represent forward direction one per measuring loop are defined by the following equations examples for L1and L1L2 only 15 1 1 1 120 1 1 1 arg k U k U I ...

Page 247: ...FUFSPVC blocking signal is received The delay will be introduced if no vector magnitude change greater than 5 of IBase has been detected in any of the phase currents 7 4 7 6 Power swings There is need for external blocking of the ZMFCPDIS function during power swings either from the Power Swing Blocking function ZMRPSB or an external device 7 4 7 7 Measuring principles All ZMFCPDIS zones operate a...

Page 248: ...PE XNRV 0 1 3 X PE X FWPE XNFW 0 1 3 X PG X FWPG XNFW 0 1 3 X PG X RVPG XNRV 0 1 3 X PE X FwPE XNFw 0 1 3 R PE R PE RNFw j N j N 1 1 X RvPE XNRv XNFw X FwPE R1PE RNRv IEC11000417 V1 EN Figure 95 ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for phase to earth measuring loops ohm loop domain Section 7 1MRK502052 UEN B Impedance protection 242 Technical manual ...

Page 249: ...which are the settings designated Fw Therefore a reverse zone will have its Fw settings RFFwPPZRV X1FwPEZ3 and so on applied in the third quadrant that is towards the busbar instead of the line The fault loop reach in relation to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 84 The main intention with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach should be interpreted Note ...

Page 250: ...om the Phase selection element They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones and determine which loops should be released to possibly issue a start or a trip FWL1 FWL2 FWL3L1 and RVL1 RVL2 RVL3L1 are the internal binary signals from the Directional element An FW signal is set true if the criteria for a forward fault or load is fulfilled for its particular loop The equivalent appl...

Page 251: ...SZ OR t 15 ms AND OR OR OR OR t 15 ms AND t 15 ms AND STARTND OR OR t 15 ms AND STPHS t 15 ms AND STPP STPE IEC12000133 1 en vsd IEC12000133 V1 EN Figure 98 Additional start outputs 1 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 7 Impedance protection 245 Technical manual ...

Page 252: ...STFW2PH STFW3PH IEC12000134 1 en vsd IEC12000134 V1 EN Figure 99 Additional start outputs 2 DirModeZ3 5 Non directional Forward Reverse DIR Ln LmLn Z3 5 TRUE 1 FW Ln LmLn RV Ln LmLn FW Ln LmLn DIR Ln LmLn Z1 FW Ln LmLn DIR Ln LmLn Z2 RV Ln LmLn DIR Ln LmLn ZRV IEC12000137 2 en vsd IEC12000137 V2 EN Figure 100 Connection of directional signals to zones Section 7 1MRK502052 UEN B Impedance protectio...

Page 253: ...5 ms STARTZx STL2Zx STL3Zx AND AND AND TZx BLOCK VTSZ BLKZx BLKTRZx t 15 ms AND t 15 ms AND STNDZx OR OR L1Zx L2Zx L3Zx PPZx NDZx OR PEZx IEC12000138 1 en vsd IEC12000138 V1 EN Figure 101 Start and trip outputs 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 7 Impedance protection 247 Technical manual ...

Page 254: ...k LNKZRV LNKZ2 LNKZx OR LNKZ3 LNKZ4 LNKZ5 ZoneLinkStart STPHS Phase Selection 1st starting zone VTSZ BLKZx BLKTRZx OR OR OR OR OR AND AND OR AND AND AND TimerModeZx Enable Ph Ph Ph E AND AND IEC12000139 3 en vsdx IEC12000139 V3 EN Figure 102 Logic for linking of timers Section 7 1MRK502052 UEN B Impedance protection 248 Technical manual ...

Page 255: ...L1L2 RVL3 RVL2L3 RVL3L1 BLOCK VTSZ OR t 15 ms AND AND AND AND AND AND AND OR OR OR OR IN present t 15 ms AND t 15 ms AND STRVPE AND IEC12000141 1 en vsd IEC12000141 V1 EN Figure 103 Additional start outputs 3 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 7 Impedance protection 249 Technical manual ...

Page 256: ... PHSL2L3 AND ZML3L1Zx PHSL3L1 AND OR DIRL1Zx AND DIRL2Zx AND AND OR AND AND AND DIRL3Zx DIRL1L2Zx DIRL2L3Zx DIRL3L1Zx L1Zx PEZx L2Zx L3Zx PPZx OR OR OR IEC12000140 1 en vsd IEC12000140 V1 EN Figure 104 Intermediate logic Section 7 1MRK502052 UEN B Impedance protection 250 Technical manual ...

Page 257: ...eg measured with CVT s and 0 5 SIR 30 Definite time delay to trip Ph E and Ph Ph operation 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Operate time 16 ms typically IEC 60255 121 Reset time at 0 1 to 2 x Zreach Min 20 ms Max 35 ms Reset ratio 105 typically 7 5 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM 7 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 ...

Page 258: ...the synchronism cannot be maintained Undamped oscillations occur in the power system where generator groups at different locations oscillate against each other If the connection between the generators is too weak the magnitude of the oscillations will increase until the angular stability is lost The operation of a generator having pole slip will give risk of damages to the generator shaft and turb...

Page 259: ...connection U3P GROUP SIGNAL Voltage group connection BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKGEN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in generating direction BLKMOTOR BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction EXTZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 with zone2 region Table 100 PSPPPAM Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1 TRIP2 B...

Page 260: ...ase AnglePhi 72 00 90 00 Deg 0 01 85 00 Angle of the slip impedance line StartAngle 0 0 180 0 Deg 0 1 110 0 Rotor angle for the start signal TripAngle 0 0 180 0 Deg 0 1 90 0 Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals N1Limit 1 20 1 1 Count limit for the trip1 signal N2Limit 1 20 1 3 Count limit for the trip2 signal Table 102 PSPPPAM Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Desc...

Page 261: ... the power system the rotor movement in the impedance and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signaled If the generator is slower than the power system the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring is signaled the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor The movements in the impedance plane can be seen in Figure 107 The transient behavior is described by ...

Page 262: ...t reactance of the step up transformer ZS impedance of the power system A The detection of rotor angle is enabled when the minimum current exceeds 0 10 IN IN is IBase parameter set under general setting the maximum voltage falls below 0 92 UBase the voltage Ucosφ the voltage in phase with the generator current has an angular velocity of 0 2 8 Hz and the corresponding direction is not blocked Secti...

Page 263: ...high external device detects the direction of the centre of slipping After the first slip the signals ZONE1 or ZONE2 and depending on the direction of slip either GEN or MOTOR are issued Every time pole slipping is detected the impedance of the point where the slip line is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements Further slips are only detected if they are in the ...

Page 264: ... detector resets without a slip being counted or no rotor relative movement was detected during the time ResetTime Ucos 0 92 UBase IEC07000005 vsd Imin 0 10 IBase 0 2 Slip Freq 8 Hz AND startAngle AND START Z cross line ZA ZC Z cross line ZC ZB AND AND ZONE1 ZONE2 Counter N1Limit a b a b tripAngle AND TRIP1 Counter N2Limit a b a b AND TRIP2 OR TRIP IEC07000005 V2 EN Figure 109 Simplified logic dia...

Page 265: ...e center of oscillation is found to be in zone 1 which normally includes the generator and its step up power transformer If the center of oscillation is found to be further out in the power system in zone 2 more than one pole slip is usually allowed before the generator transformer unit is disconnected A parameter setting is available to take into account the circuit breaker opening time If there ...

Page 266: ...rection BLKMOT BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction EXTZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 reach to zone2 settings Table 107 OOSPPAM Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip issued when either zone 1 or zone 2 give trip TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Zone 1 trip TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Zone 2 trip START BOOLEAN Set when measured impedance enters lens characteristic GENMODE BOOLEAN Generator rotate...

Page 267: ...r of pole slips in zone 1 required to get zone 1 trip NoOfSlipsZ2 1 60 1 3 Number of pole slips in zone 2 required to get zone 2 trip tReset 1 000 60 000 s 0 001 6 000 Time without any slip required to completely reset function Table 110 OOSPPAM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups ForwardR ...

Page 268: ...ion UCOSPHI REAL kV Estimated Ucos Phi voltage during pole slip in V 7 6 7 Operation principle General Under balanced and stable conditions a generator operates with a constant rotor angle power angle delivering active electrical power to the power system which is approximately equal to the input mechanical power on the generator axis The currents and voltages are constant and stable An out of ste...

Page 269: ...st its step Z R X continues its way from the right hand side to the left hand side and the 1st pole slip cannot be avoided If the generator is not immediately disconnected it will continue pole slipping see Figure 111 where two pole slips two pole slip cycles are shown Under out of step conditions the centre of oscillation is where the locus of the complex impedance Z R X crosses the impedance lin...

Page 270: ...gle in rad normal load fault 500 ms Z R X cros s ed the impedance line Z line connecting points SE RE fault occurrs Z R X under fault lies on the impedance line or near for 3 ph faults Under 3 phas e fault condition rotor angle of app 180 degrees is meas ured rotor power angle Z IEC10000110 2 en vsd 1 2 3 1 0 IEC10000110 V2 EN Figure 112 Rotor power angle and magnitude of the complex impedance Z R...

Page 271: ...eristic A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that the power system in which OOSPPAM is installed is modeled as a two machine equivalent system or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent power system Then the impedances from the position of OOSPPAM in the direction of the normal load flow that is from the measurement point to the remote system can be...

Page 272: ... G Generator 13 8 kV 13 8 kV Power line 220 kV Infinite power system Out Of Step protection OOSPPAM Transformer 13 8 220 kV System equivalent REG Zgen Rgen Xgen Ztr Rtr Xtr Zline Rline Xline Zeq Req Xeq ReverseZ ReverseR ReverseX ForwardZ ForwardR ForwardX ReverseR Rg ForwardR Rtr Rline Req ReverseX Xd ForwardX Xtr Xline Xeq All impedances must be referred to the generator voltage 13 8 kV SE RE IE...

Page 273: ... is reached under generator power swings the generator is most likely to lose step 7 6 7 2 Detecting an out of step condition An out of step condition is characterized by periodic changes of the rotor angle that leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing power so there are also periodic changes of rotational speed currents and voltages When displayed in the complex impedance plane these changes are...

Page 274: ...Angle 110 traverseTimeMin 40 ms The expression which relates the maximum slip frequency fsMax and the traverseTimeMin is as follows fsMax Hz traverseTimeMin ms StartAngle 1000 1 000 180 IECEQUATION2319 V1 EN Equation 48 The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin 50 ms is StartAngle 90 fsMax 20 0 500 10 000 Hz StartAngle 100 fsMax 20 0 444 8 888 Hz StartAngle 110 fsMax 20 0 388 7 777 Hz d...

Page 275: ...h TripAngle 90 degrees The offset Mho circle represents loci of the complex impedance Z R X for which the rotor power angle is 90 degrees If the circuit breaker must not open before the rotor angle has reached 90 degrees on its way towards 0 degrees then it is clear that the circle delimits the R X plane into a no trip and a trip region For TripAngle 90 degrees the trip command will be issued at p...

Page 276: ...fset Mho circle represents loci of the impedance Z R X for which the rotor angle is 90 degrees 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Current in kA trip command to CB rotor angle in rad Time in milliseconds pos seq current in kA trip command to CB rotor angle in radian fault occurs normal load current min current very high currents due to out of step condition after 1st pole slip 2nd ...

Page 277: ...ex positive sequence impedance Z R X UPSRE UPSIM UPSMAG R IPSRE IPSIM Z R X Z R X within limit of reach X NO Return YES Z R X within lens characteristic NO YES Z R X entered lens from Function alert RIGHT LEFT Z R X exited lens on the left hand side NO YES YES pole slip Was traverse time more than 50 ms Motor losing step Generator losing step NO X R Calculation of positive sequence active power P ...

Page 278: ...der excited operation of a synchronous machine A reduction of the excitation current weakens the coupling between the rotor and the stator The machine may lose the synchronism and start to operate like an induction machine Then the reactive power consumption will increase Even if the machine does not loose synchronism it may not be acceptable to operate in this state for a long time Reduction of e...

Page 279: ...lock trip of zone Z1 BLKTRZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Block trip of zone Z2 Table 115 LEXPDIS Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal TRZ1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from impedance zone Z1 TRZ2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from impedance zone Z2 START BOOLEAN Common start signal STZ1 BOOLEAN Start signal from impedance zone Z1 STZ2 BOOLEAN Start signal from impedance zone Z2 XOHM REAL Reactance in P...

Page 280: ...Z2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 1 00 Trip time delay for Z2 Table 117 LEXPDIS Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description DirSuperv Off On Off Operation Off On for additional directional criterion XoffsetDirLine 1000 00 3000 00 0 01 0 00 Offset of directional line along X axis in of Zbase DirAngle 180 0 180 0 Deg 0 1 13 0 Angle between directional line and R axis in degrees Tabl...

Page 281: ...be chosen as the positive sequence loop or any one of the three phase to phase loops depending on the available current and voltage signals It is recommended to use positive sequence quantities for function operation Measured mode Measured apparent impedance Zposseq posseq posseq U I EQUATION1771 V1 EN Equation 49 ZL1L2 1 2 1 2 L L L L U U I I EQUATION1772 V1 EN Equation 50 ZL2L3 2 3 2 3 L L L L U...

Page 282: ...pedance reaches the zone Z1 this zone will operate normally with a short delay The zone is related to the dynamic stability of the generator When the apparent impedance reaches the zone Z2 this zone will operate normally with a longer delay The zone is related to the static stability of the generator LEXPDIS protection also has a directional blinder supervision See figure 120 In LEXPDIS function t...

Page 283: ...the characteristic this part of the protection will operate If the directional restrain is set Off the impedance zone operation will start the appropriate timer and LEXPDIS will trip after the set delay tZ1 or tZ2 If the directional restrain is set On the directional release function must also operate to enable operation A new impedance is constructed from the measured apparent impedance Z and the...

Page 284: ...nction is schematically described in figure 123 en06000458 2 vsd Apparent impedance calculation Positive sequence current phasor Z Z in Z1 char Z in Z2 char Dir Restrain 1 Dir Restrain ON startZ1 startZ2 t t TripZ1 TripZ2 tZ1 tZ2 Positive sequence voltage phasor IEC06000458 V3 EN Figure 123 Simplified logic diagram of LEXPDIS protection Section 7 1MRK502052 UEN B Impedance protection 278 Technical...

Page 285: ...iption IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Sensitive rotor earth fault protection injection based ROTIPHIZ Rre 64R 7 8 2 Functionality The sensitive rotor earth fault protection ROTIPHIZ is used to detect earth faults in the rotor windings of generators ROTIPHIZ is applicable for all types of synchronous generators To implement the above concept a separa...

Page 286: ...ity to change from one set reference impedance to another Two different reference impedances are available 7 8 4 Description of output signals The outputs of the sensitive rotor earth fault protection function block are as shown in table 123 Table 123 Description of various outputs Output signal Description TRIP Common trip command signal TRIPDC is the trip command signal at DC side earth fault TR...

Page 287: ... Over voltage Frequ ency difference No current No voltage The ERRSTAT description will be shown in clear text in ICT The priority of the signals is set that the group priority 1 overrides the group priority 2 and 3 and priority 2 overrides priority 3 Note that the ERRSTAT signal can enable several error cases at the same time Following errors is detected and derived in the Error block B0 Injected ...

Page 288: ...QU RFAULT ZREF ZREFRE ZREFIM URMSSTAT IEC10000297 2 en vsd IEC10000297 V1 EN Figure 124 ROTIPHIZ function block 7 8 6 Signals Table 125 ROTIPHIZ Input signals Name Type Default Description USU GROUP SIGNAL Injected voltage signal USI GROUP SIGNAL Injected current signal voltage over shunt BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function ZREFSEL INTEGER 1 Reference impedance selection Table 126 ROTIPHIZ Output si...

Page 289: ...in Ohm URMSSTAT BOOLEAN RMS voltage status TRUE when ULimRMS 7 8 7 Settings Table 127 ROTIPHIZ Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation On Off RTrip 100 100000 Ohm 1 1000 Trip limit of fault resistance in Ohm RAlarm 100 1000000 Ohm 1 10000 Alarm limit of fault resistance in Ohm tAlarm 0 00 600 00 s 1 00 30 00 Alarm time delay FactACLim 0 0...

Page 290: ...0 000 Ohm 0 001 1000000 000 Reference resistance R2 in ohm RefX2 1000000 000 1000000 000 Ohm 0 001 2000 000 Reference reactance X2 in ohm Table 130 ROTIPHIZ Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FilterLength 1 s 2 s 1 s Length of filter buffer 7 8 8 Monitored data Table 131 ROTIPHIZ Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description RAVE REAL Ohm Measured ...

Page 291: ...al is amplified in REX060 before it is passed on to IED for evaluation 6 Connection for measurement of injected voltage This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is passed on to IED for evaluation 7 Two VT inputs into IED which are used to measure injected current and voltage 8 Protection for excessive over voltages posed by generator REX060 can withstand without damage maximum voltage of 120V ...

Page 292: ...IED The injection unit REX060 shall be located close to the IED preferably in the same cubicle For the Sensitive rotor earth fault protection there are some settings necessary for REX060 System frequency 50 60 Hz Injected frequency for rotor circuit injection is settable in 1 Hz steps 75 250 Hz Gain factor in four steps REX060 will also continuously check the measured signal for detection of satur...

Page 293: ... non faulted case and the measured impedance called the rotor reference impedance and can be calculated as 1 ref rot Z j C w EQUATION2510 V1 EN alternative 1 rot ref j C Z w EQUATION2511 V1 EN Where 2 inj f w p EQUATION2512 V1 EN The injected frequency finj of the square wave is a set value deviating from the fundamental frequency 50 or 60 Hz The injected frequency can be set within the range 75 2...

Page 294: ...g 128 Inj Inj bare U Z I EQUATION2500 V1 EN An equivalent circuit for the measured impedance is shown in figure 128 Uinj Iinj Zshunt Rf Zseries IEC11000003 2 en vsd ZBare ZMeasured IEC11000003 V1 EN Figure 128 Equivalent of the impedance measurement In non faulted operation Rf is very large A healthy impedance is calculated as 1 2 Measured bare Z k Z k EQUATION2501 V1 EN For definition of k1 and k...

Page 295: ...9740C4FD5482 V1 EN The factors k1 and k2 Ω are derived during the calibration measurements under commissioning As supportforthecalibration theInjectionCommissioningtoolmust be used This tool is an integrated part of the PCM600 tool In connection to this calibration the reference impedance is also derived In case of a rotor earth fault with fault impedance Zf the measured admittance is 1 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 296: ...rent via the REX060 unit as two voltages signals Voltage inputs in the IED 2 The phasor of injected voltage UInj and phasor of injected current IInj is calculated by using special filter from raw samples Observe that phasors are calculated for the injected frequency 3 The complex bare impedance is calculated from Uinj Iinj 4 5 The complex measured impedance is derived as ZMeasured Zbare k1 k2 Ω 6 ...

Page 297: ...ternal trip time characteristic output signal TRIP is set after the calculated time For trip time delay see fig 131 When 1s filter length is used and the fault resistance is equal to the set value RTrip the trip time is about 10 s If the fault resistance is estimated to be 0 Ω the trip delay is 2 s For values in between the delay follows the linear interpolation describing the fault resistance tim...

Page 298: ... and current injection points The third high level step is not applicable if mixed signals are used that is when the REX060 is used for both rotor and stator earth fault protection and only two instead of four analog inputs on the IED are used 7 8 10 Technical data Table 132 ROTIPHIZ technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Fault resistance sensitivity Can be reached at steady state operati...

Page 299: ... signal is used to detect stator earth faults To implement the above concept a separate injection box is required The injection box generates a square wave voltage signal which for example can be fed into the secondary winding of the generator neutral point voltage transformer or grounding transformer This signal propagates through this transformer into the stator circuit The magnitude of the inje...

Page 300: ...he selection of any of the pre defined reference impedances The reference impedance can differ for example with the generator breaker open or closed Therefore there is a possibility to change from one set reference impedance to another Five different reference impedances are available 7 9 4 Description of output signals The outputs of the 100 stator earth fault protection function block are as sho...

Page 301: ...nder voltage Over current Over voltage Frequ ency difference No current No voltage The ERRSTAT description will be shown in clear text in ICT The priority of the signals is set that the group priority 1 overrides the group priority 2 and 3 and priority 2 overrides priority 3 Note that the ERRSTAT signal can enable several error cases at the same time Following errors is detected and derived in the...

Page 302: ...FRE ZREFIM URMSSTAT IEC10000298 2 en vsd IEC10000298 V1 EN Figure 132 STTIPHIZ function block 7 9 6 Signals Table 136 STTIPHIZ Input signals Name Type Default Description USU GROUP SIGNAL Injected voltage signal USI GROUP SIGNAL Injected current signal voltage over shunt BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function ZREFSEL INTEGER 1 Reference impedance selection Table 137 STTIPHIZ Output signals Name Type De...

Page 303: ... ULimRMS 1 1000 V 1 100 RMS voltage level Table 139 STTIPHIZ Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FreqInjected 50 000 250 000 Hz 0 001 87 000 Injected frequency Table 140 STTIPHIZ Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description k1Real 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 10000 000 Multiplication factor k1 for calibration real part k1Imag...

Page 304: ...nce X5 in ohm Table 141 STTIPHIZ Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FilterLength 1 s 2 s 1 s Length of filter buffer 7 9 8 Monitored data Table 142 STTIPHIZ Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description RAVE REAL Ohm Measured resistance to earth in Ohm at inj freq XAVE REAL Ohm Measured reactance to earth in Ohm at inj freq FREQU REAL Hz Measured f...

Page 305: ...er DT located at the stator neutral point note that REX062 is typically required for such arrangement open delta winding of a three phase grounding transformer GT located at generator terminals note that REX062 is typically required for such arrangement In the REX060 unit the injection voltage and current signals are amplified to a level adapted to the analogue voltage inputs of IED In IED the mea...

Page 306: ...gnal into the stator circuit 5 Connection for measurement of injected current This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is given to REG670 for evaluation 6 Cable for measurement of injected voltage at the injection point This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is given to REG670 for evaluation 7 Two VT inputs into REG670 which are used to measure injected current and voltage 8 Cable for 95...

Page 307: ...ated close to the IED For the stator earth fault protection there are some settings necessary for REX060 System frequency 50 60 Hz Injected frequency for stator neutral point is settable in 1 Hz steps 50 250 Hz VT DT maximum fundamental frequency voltage during earth fault in the stator winding REX060 will also continuously check the measured signal for detection of saturation which could cause er...

Page 308: ...re than one generator via a common step up transformer Normally the generator system has some kind of high resistance earthing giving earth fault current within the range 5 20 A thus preventing serious damages in case of stator earth faults Direct earthing will give too high earth fault current level Isolated generator system will give risk of transient overvoltages Below some alternatives for gen...

Page 309: ...e stator neutral point The VT must have a rating of at least 100VA and a rated secondary winding voltage of up to 120V It must adhere to IEC 61869 3 2011 section 5 5 301 Rated Output Values and the standard values specified according to burden range II The maximum voltage on the secondary side of the VT for an earth fault at generator terminals can be calculated as _ EF_Max 3 2 1 G Ph Ph U U U U E...

Page 310: ...ed voltage ratio of the distribution transformer UG_Ph Ph is the protected generator rated phase to phase voltage Note that in case of an earth fault in the stator the secondary current through the RN resistor will be often in order of couple of hundred amperes This maximum secondary current can be calculated as follows _ _ EF Max EF Sec N I U R EQUATION2518 V1 EN C High resistance earthing via a ...

Page 311: ... up to 550V Note that maximum voltage across secondary resistor RN for an earth fault at generator terminals can be calculated as follows EF_Max _ 2 3 1 G Ph Ph U U U U EQUATION2520 V1 EN where U2 U1 is the turn i e rated voltage ratio of one phase of the power transformer e g 500 3 8 3 V kV EQUATION2522 V1 EN UG_Ph Ph is the protected generator rated phase to phase voltage Note that in case of an...

Page 312: ...onnection terminals for the injection equipment Similar equivalent circuit can be drawn for all other types of generator stator earthing shown in latter figures ZBare ZMeasured Uinj Iinj RN Cstat Rfault Uinj Iinj RN Cstat Stator Reference Impedance ZRef Rf Zseries ZmT a b a b UN IEC11000008 4 en vsd Û IEC11000008 V1 EN Figure 136 High resistance generator earthing with a neutral point resistor The...

Page 313: ...s to be divided as shown in figure 138 to limit the voltage to the injection equipment in case of earth fault at the generator terminal This voltage is often in the range 400 500 V As the open delta connection gives three times the zero sequence phase voltage this gives too high voltage at the injection point if the resistance is not divided as shown in the figure 138 By dividing the resistor in t...

Page 314: ...010 V1 EN Figure 138 High resistance generator earthing via a delta grounded wye transformer It is also possible to make the injection via VT open delta connection as shown in figure 139 Section 7 1MRK502052 UEN B Impedance protection 308 Technical manual ...

Page 315: ... delta VT connection It must be observed that the resistor Rd is normally applied for ferro resonance damping The resistance Rd is will have very little contribution to the earth fault current as it has high resistance This injection principle can be used for applications 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 7 Impedance protection 309 Technical manual ...

Page 316: ... at steady state operating condition of the machine Note that it is possible to connect two REG670 in parallel to the REX060 injection unit in order to obtain redundant measurement in two separate IEDs However at commissioning both REG670 IEDs must be connected during calibration procedure 7 9 9 4 General measurement of earth fault impedance From the REX060 the injected voltage and current are del...

Page 317: ...d conditions is referred to as the reference impedance in further text In IED the measured impedance is compared to the reference impedance In case of an earth fault the fault impedance is estimated and compared to the set values RAlarm and RTrip If the measured impedance is larger than the setting openCircuitLimit the output OPCIRC is set TRUE If OPCIRC is set it means there is a strong likelihoo...

Page 318: ... stator windings and earth 1 ωCstat the transformer magnetization impedance ZmT and the earth fault resistance Rf The series resistance in the injection circuit is eliminated by k2 Rf is very large in the non faulted case and the measured impedance is equal to the stator reference impedance 1 1 1 stat ref N mT j C Z R Z w EQUATION2502 V1 EN Where 2 inj f w p EQUATION2503 V1 EN The injected frequen...

Page 319: ... up to 5 Switching of reference impedance can be made automatically During commissioning ICT also makes cross calculations between acquired references giving basically the calculated fault resistance between each existing reference combination This would be the fault resistance measured by the function when the reference change occurs from one reference to another if the real generator impedance s...

Page 320: ...f the fault resistance is slightly below the set value RTrip the trip time will be about 10 s with default filter length of 1 s If the fault resistance is estimated to 0 Ω the trip delay will be 2 s with default filter length of 1 s For values in between the delay will follow linear interpolation describing the fault resistance time relation as shown in figure 142 Note that actual tripping time is...

Page 321: ...ault resistance estimation Such situations are identified in the function and the function is automatically stabilized to prevent unwanted operation of the protection In connection with this calibration the reference impedance is also derived It is possible to have up to five different reference impedances The need to change reference impedance is due to different operating conditions for the gene...

Page 322: ...T will give indication if several reference impedance values are needed From the measured impedance the stator earth fault resistance can be estimated since the reference impedance is known An alarm level Ω is set at a higher value and the ALARM signal is activated after a set alarm delay time A trip level Ω is also set at a lower value When the trip level is reached a TRIP signal is activated as ...

Page 323: ...e inputs in the REG670 2 The phasor of injected voltage UInj and phasor of injected current IInj is calculated by using special filter from raw samples Observe that phasors are calculated for the injected frequency 3 The complex bare impedance is calculated from Uinj Iinj 4 5 The complex measured impedance is derived as ZMeasured Zbare k1 k2 6 The fault resistance RFault is calculated from the com...

Page 324: ...y Can be reached at steady state operating condition of the machine 50 kΩ Typically 10 kΩ Injection frequency 50 000 250 000 Hz 0 1 Hz Injection voltage 240 V Trip limit of fault resistance 100 10000 Ω 5 of 1 kΩ at Rf 1 kΩ 10 of set value at Rf 1 kΩ Alarm limit of fault resistance 100 100000 Ω 5 of 1 kΩ at Rf 1 kΩ 10 of 10 kΩ at 1 kΩ Rf 10 kΩ 50 of set value at Rf 10 kΩ Operate time start at Rf 0Ω...

Page 325: ...ission system The three zones have fully independent measuring loops and settings The functionality also comprises an under voltage seal in feature to ensure issuing of a trip even if the current transformer goes into saturation and in addition the positive sequence based load encroachment feature for the second and the third impedance zone Built in compensation for the step up transformer vector ...

Page 326: ...gnal Zone 1 STZ2 BOOLEAN Start signal Zone 2 STZ3 BOOLEAN Start signal Zone 3 STUV BOOLEAN Start of under voltage seal in 7 10 5 Settings Table 146 ZGVPDIS Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On ImpedanceAng 5 90 Deg 1 80 Impedance angle in degrees common for all zones IMinOp 5 80 IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current OpModeZ1 Off...

Page 327: ...0 s 0 001 1 500 Time delay to operate for Zone 3 OpModeU Off Z2Start Z3Start Off Enable under voltage seal in Off Z2Start Z3Start U 5 90 UB 1 70 Start value of under voltage seal in tU 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 5 000 Time delay to operate for under voltage seal in Table 147 ZGVPDIS Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description RLd 5 120 Zb 1 50 Resistive reach in for load encr...

Page 328: ... IBase IECEQUATION1400024 V1 EN Equation 53 Where ZBase is the base value of impedance UBase is the line to line voltage rating at the generator terminal IBase is the line current rating at the generator terminal The minimum operating current is provided using the setting IMinOp All the outputs will be blocked by activation of the BLOCK or BLKZ input Offset mho characteristic ZGVPDIS consists of t...

Page 329: ...et Mho Zone2 Offset Mho Zone1 IEC11000294 2 en vsd IEC11000294 V2 EN Figure 146 Offset mho characteristics of three zones The complete functionality is shown in figure 147 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 7 Impedance protection 323 Technical manual ...

Page 330: ...VPDIS 7 10 7 1 Operation principle of zone 1 In general the zone 1 must cover the generator winding the cables or busbars and step up transformer Under impedance functionality is provided as selective protection for the phase to phase faults in zone 1 Hence the functionality of zone 1 includes only phase to phase measuring loops Zone 1 functionality can be set to PP Loops or Off using the setting ...

Page 331: ...ating impedance has entered inside zone 1 offset mho characteristic All three phase to phase loops are implemented separately Forward and reverse reach values are provided in percentage of impedance base value at generator Operate time delay is provided Comparator characteristics The comparator consists of offset mho characteristics Three individual comparators are provided in the three phase to p...

Page 332: ... the zone 1 operation region 1 1 Z Fwd Z Fwd ImpedanceAng Ð IECEQUATION14000025 V2 EN Equation 54 1 1 Z Rev Z rev ImpedanceAng Ð IECEQUATION14000026 V2 EN Equation 55 Voltage and current phasors selected for phase to phase loops are Sl No Phase to phase loop Voltage phasor Current phasor 1 L1 L2 1 2 UL L 1 2 IL L 2 L2 L3 2 3 UL L 2 3 IL L 3 L3 L1 3 1 UL L 3 1 IL L Operate time The operate time del...

Page 333: ...ator transformer and phase to earth phase to phase and three phase faults in the HV side of transformer and the bus A separate maximum current feature is provided in phase to earth loop selection which gives correct reach measurement for phase to phase fault on HV side Zero sequence compensation for the phase voltages is given in phase to earth measuring loops in order to prevent operation for the...

Page 334: ...rmer The reach settings for zone 2 can be provided using the Z2Fwd Z2Rev and ImpedanceAng settings The Z2Fwd is forward reach setting and Z2Rev is reverse reach setting The offset mho characteristic for phase to earth loop is shown in Figure 152 The offset mho characteristics for phase to phase loop is shown in Figure 153 ß 1 2 IL Z Fwd 1 1 0 1 2 Ucomp UL E U IL Z Fwd 2 1 0 1 2 Ucomp UL E U IL Z R...

Page 335: ...nce defined in the Figure 152 and 153 is described in equation 56 2 2 Z Fwd Z Fwd ImpedanceAng Ð 2 2 Z R Z Rev ImpedanceAng ev Ð GUID 007D6357 B7CF 4C21 B772 2245F06C83A2 V2 EN Equation 56 Voltage and current phasors selected for different measuring loops Phase Phase Sl No Measuring Loop Voltage Phasor Current Phasor 1 L1 L2 1 2 UL L 1 2 IL L 2 L2 L3 2 3 UL L 2 3 IL L 3 L3 L1 3 1 UL L 3 1 IL L Enh...

Page 336: ... 3 will provide protection from phase to earth phase phase and three phase faults on the HV side of the system The zone 3 functionality is same as zone 2 hence the explanation of zone 2 applies except the zone 3 has separate reach Z3Fwd Z3Rev operate timer tZ3 and load encroachment enable LoadEnchModZ3 settings 7 10 7 4 Load encroachment The load encroachment characteristics can be set for zone2 a...

Page 337: ...tart to choose zone 3 for triggering the seal in logic Under voltage seal in is activated from the criterion based on line to line voltage magnitude The voltage criteria checks by comparing all three line to line voltage levels with the level given by the setting parameter U If any loop detects lower voltage the under voltage seal in logic gets triggered provided the respective selected zone start...

Page 338: ... of zones 3 Forward reach 3 0 200 0 of Zr where Zr UBase 3 IBase 5 0 of set impedance Conditions Voltage range 0 1 1 1 x Ur Current range 0 5 30 x Ir Reverse reach 3 0 200 0 of Zr where Zr UBase 3 IBase 5 0 of set impedance Conditions Voltage range 0 1 1 1 x Ur Current range 0 5 30 x Ir Impedance angle 5 90 degrees Reset ratio 105 typically Start time at 1 2 to 0 8 x set impedance Min 15 ms Max 35...

Page 339: ...ee phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short circuit protection function 8 1 3 Function block IEC04000391 2 en vsd PHPIOC I3P BLOCK ENMULT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 IEC04000391 V2 EN Figure 156 PHPIOC function block 8 1 4 Signals Table 151 PHPIOC Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase current BLOCK ...

Page 340: ... 1 0 Multiplier for operate current level Table 155 PHPIOC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 8 1 6 Monitored data Table 156 PHPIOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description IL1 REAL A Current in phase L1 IL2 REAL A Current in phase L2 IL3 REAL A Current in phase L3 8 1 7 Oper...

Page 341: ...f the set operation current StValMult via a binary input ENMULT In some applications the operation value needs to be changed for example due to transformer inrush currents PHPIOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK 8 1 8 Technical data Table 157 PHPIOC technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current 5 2500 of lBase 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio 95 at 50 2500...

Page 342: ... time delay independent for step 1 to 4 separately All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user defined time characteristic The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory The function can be set to be directional or non directional independently for each of the steps Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the funct...

Page 343: ... ST3L1 ST3L2 ST3L3 ST4L1 ST4L2 ST4L3 ST2NDHRM DIRL1 DIRL2 DIRL3 IEC06000187 V3 EN Figure 157 OC4PTOC function block 8 2 4 Signals Table 158 OC4PTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current input U3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1 BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0...

Page 344: ...om phase L3 TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1 TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2 TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3 TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1 TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2 TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3 TR3L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L1 TR3L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L2 TR3L3 BOOLEAN Trip s...

Page 345: ...p4 phase L2 ST4L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L3 ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected DIRL1 INTEGER Direction for phase1 DIRL2 INTEGER Direction for phase2 DIRL3 INTEGER Direction for phase3 8 2 5 Settings Table 160 OC4PTOC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On AngleRCA 40 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle RCA...

Page 346: ...tep1 in of IBase t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 I1Mult 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 1 DirMode2 Off Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 2 off nodir forward reverse Characterist2 ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very inv ANSI Norm inv ANSI Mod inv ANSI Def Time L T E inv L T V inv L T inv IEC...

Page 347: ...inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 3 I3 5 2500 IB 1 250 Operating phase current level for step 3 in of IBase t3 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 800 Independent definite time delay of step 3 k3 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 3 IMin3 1 10000 IB 1 33 Mini...

Page 348: ...e level for step 4 Table 161 OC4PTOC Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description IMinOpPhSel 1 100 IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection in of IBase 2ndHarmStab 5 100 IB 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in of fundamental curr ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1 tReset1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0...

Page 349: ...rv2 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 HarmBlock2 Off On Off Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 3 tReset3 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 020 Constant reset time for step 3 tPCrv3 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3...

Page 350: ...Crv4 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 4 HarmBlock4 Off On Off Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain Table 162 OC4PTOC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description MeasType DFT RMS DFT Selection between DFT and RMS measurement GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 8 2 6 Monitored data Table 1...

Page 351: ...on The four step over current function The mode selection If VT inputs are not available or not connected setting parameter DirModex shall be left to default value Non directional en05000740 2 en vsd Direction Element 4 step over current element One element for each step Harmonic Restraint Mode Selection dirPh1Flt dirPh2Flt dirPh3Flt harmRestrBlock enableDir enableStep1 4 DirectionalMode1 4 faultS...

Page 352: ...3 or I4 If a phase current is larger than the set operation current outputs START STx STL1 STL2 and STL3 are without delay activated Output signals STL1 STL2 and STL3 are common for all steps This means that the lowest set step will initiate the activation The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps It shall be noted that the selection of measured value DFT or RMS do not influenc...

Page 353: ...three phase faults the U1L1M memory voltage based on the same positive sequence voltage ensures correct directional discrimination The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored After 100 ms the following occurs If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current between 10 and 30 of the set terminal rated current IBase the conditi...

Page 354: ...als will start the timers of the step The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time characteristic A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section Inverse characteristics All four steps in OC4...

Page 355: ... to changed network switching state The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK The start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR 8 2 8 Second harmonic blocking element A harmonic restrain of the Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC can be chosen If the ratio of the 2...

Page 356: ...gle RCA 40 0 65 0 degrees 2 0 degrees Relay operating angle ROA 40 0 89 0 degrees 2 0 degrees 2nd harmonic blocking 5 100 of fundamental 2 0 of Ir Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Minimum operate time 0 000 60 000 s 2 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater Inverse characteristics see table 959 table 960 and table 961 16 curve types See table 959 tab...

Page 357: ...ss than the typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance EFPIOC is configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs and can be configured to measure the current from a separate current input 8 3 3 Function block IEC06000269 2 en vsd EFPIOC I3P BLOCK BLKAR MULTEN TRIP IEC06000269 V2 EN Figure 162 EFPIOC function block 8 3 4 Signals Table 165 EFPIOC In...

Page 358: ...8 3 6 Monitored data Table 170 EFPIOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description IN REAL A Residual current 8 3 7 Operation principle The sampled analog residual currents are pre processed in a discrete Fourier filter DFT block From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current as well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived This current value is fe...

Page 359: ...at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio 95 at 50 2500 of lBase Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min 15 ms Max 25 ms Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min 15 ms Max 25 ms Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min 5 ms Max 15 ms Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min 25 ms Max 35 ms Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset Dynamic overreach 5 at t 100 ms 8...

Page 360: ...le in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme Current reversal and weak end infeed functionality are available as well Residual current can be calculated by summing the three phase currents ...

Page 361: ...3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated the current multiplier is in use for step3 ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated the current multiplier is in use for step4 CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position CLOSECB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command OPENCB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command Table 173 EF4PTOC Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal TRIN1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1 TRIN2 BOOLEAN Tri...

Page 362: ...1 40 00 Imaginary part of source imp used for current polarisation IN Dir 1 100 IB 1 10 Residual current level in of IBase for Direction release 2ndHarmStab 5 100 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in of fundamental curr BlkParTransf Off On Off Enable blocking at energizing of parallel transformers UseStartValue IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN4 Current level blk at parallel transf step1 2 3 or 4 SOTF Off ...

Page 363: ...or step 1 IN1 1 2500 IB 1 100 Residual current operate level for step 1 in of IBase t1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time char is selected k1 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected time characteristic IMin1 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 100 00 Minimum operate residual current for step 1 in of IBase t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time...

Page 364: ...nt for step 2 in of IBase t2Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 2 IN2Mult 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value for step 2 HarmBlock2 Off On On Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain DirMode3 Off Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 3 Off Non dir Forward Reverse Characterist...

Page 365: ...NSI Very inv ANSI Norm inv ANSI Mod inv ANSI Def Time L T E inv L T V inv L T inv IEC Norm inv IEC Very inv IEC inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Time delay characteristic for step 4 IN4 1 2500 IB 1 17 Residual current operate level for step 4 in of IBase t4 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 1 200 Time delay of step 4 when definite time cha...

Page 366: ... for step 2 tPCrv2 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve for step 2 tACrv2 0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve for step 2 tBCrv2 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve for step 2 tCCrv2 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve for step 2 tPRCrv2 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500 Param P...

Page 367: ...rv4 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 4 tTRCrv4 0 005 100 000 0 001 13 500 Param TR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 4 tCRCrv4 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param CR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 4 Table 176 EF4PTOC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one o...

Page 368: ...ing block connected to EF4PTOC function input I3P This dedicated IED CT input can be for example connected to parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases Holm Green connection one single core balance current instrument transformer cable CT one single current instrument transformer located between power system star point and earth that is current transformer located i...

Page 369: ... 3I0 as polarizing quantity IPol This current can be 1 directly measured when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL This dedicated IED CT input is then typically connected to one single current transformer located between power system star point and earth current transformer located i...

Page 370: ...nent depending upon the user selection Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used together with the phasor of the operating current to determine the direction of the earth fault Forward Reverse 8 4 7 3 External polarizing for earth fault function The individual steps within the protection can be set as non directional When this setting is selected it is then possible via ...

Page 371: ...ur residual overcurrent steps Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop residual current as measuring quantity Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built in facilities Directional mode can be set to Off Non directional Forward Reverse By this parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected It shall be noted that the directional decision Forward Rever...

Page 372: ...AND T F HarmRestrainx Off INx BLKSTx BLOCK OR 2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int INxMult Characteristx Inverse Characteristx DefTime DirModex Off DirModex Non directional DirModex Forward DirModex Reverse AND AND FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int OR OR STEPx_DIR_Int IEC10000008 vsd X T F a b a b b a a b IMinx AND BLKTR AND AND txmin tx AND t t EMULTX IEC10000008 V5 EN Figure 164 Simplified logic diagram for residual overcur...

Page 373: ...ntity The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element as shown in figure 165 in order to determine the direction of the earth fault STRV 0 6 IN DIR STFW RCA 85 deg 40 of IN DIR IN DIR RCA 65 U 3U pol 0 I 3I op 0 RCA 85 deg RCA 85 deg Characteristic for STRV Operating area Operating area Characteristic for STFW Characteristic for reverse release of measuring steps...

Page 374: ...magnitude Iop x cos φ AngleRCA is bigger than setting parameter I Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in forward direction 2 STRV 1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos φ AngleRCA is bigger than 60 of setting parameter I Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse direction These signals shall be used for communication based earth fault teleprotection ...

Page 375: ...ent with integrated directional comparison step 8 4 7 9 Second harmonic blocking element A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined by parameter ...

Page 376: ...ant The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing is a little delayed compared to the first transformer Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially After a short period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched as lo...

Page 377: ...e logic or both When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault for example during an autoreclosing sequence The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations The time during which SOTF and Under Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 f...

Page 378: ...one by setting parameter ActUnderTime In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime This delay is normally set to a relatively short time default 300 ms Practically the Under Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole discordance protection but it is only active immediately after breaker switching The Under Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impeda...

Page 379: ... or value Accuracy Operate current 1 2500 of lBase 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio 95 at 1 2500 of lBase Operate current for directional comparison 1 100 of lBase For RCA 60 degrees 2 5 of Ir at I Ir 2 5 of I Ir Independent time delay for step 1 2 3 and 4 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater at 0 to 2 x Iset Inverse characteristics see table 959 table 960 and table 961 1...

Page 380: ...ection NS4PTOC I2 4 4 alt IEC10000053 V1 EN 46I2 8 5 2 Functionality Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic The directional function is voltage polarized NS4PTOC can be set directional or non...

Page 381: ...GROUP SIGNAL Group connection for operate current I3PDIR GROUP SIGNAL Group connection for directional current U3P GROUP SIGNAL Group connection for polarizing voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 Start and trip BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 Start and trip BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 Start and trip BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of st...

Page 382: ... Reverse directional start signal 8 5 5 Settings Table 181 NS4PTOC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On EnDir Disable Enable Enable Enabling the Directional calculation AngleRCA 180 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle RCA UPolMin 1 100 UB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization in of UBase I2 Dir 1 100 IB 1 10 Residual cu...

Page 383: ...tep 1 t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 1 I1Mult 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1 DirMode2 Off Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 2 off nodir forward reverse Characterist2 ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very inv ANSI Norm inv ANSI Mod inv ANSI Def Time L T E inv L T V inv L...

Page 384: ...C Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Time delay characteristic for step 3 I2 3 1 2500 IB 1 33 Negative sequence current op level for step 3 in of IBase t3 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 800 Time delay of step 3 when definite time char is selected k3 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected time characteristic IMin3 1 00 100...

Page 385: ... value for step 4 Table 182 NS4PTOC Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1 Instantaneous IEC ANSI tReset1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 020 Reset time delay for step 1 tPCrv1 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve for step 1 tACrv1 0 005 200 000 0 001 ...

Page 386: ...05 3 000 0 001 1 000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve for step 3 tACrv3 0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve for step 3 tBCrv3 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve for step 3 tCCrv3 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve for step 3 tPRCrv3 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500 Param PR for customized inver...

Page 387: ...nd current 8 5 7 Operation principle Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool 1 I3P input used for Operating Quantity 2 U3P input used for Polarizing Quantity 3 I3PDIR input used for Directional finding These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre processing function blocks in ...

Page 388: ...f the function A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the fault Forward Reverse Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the voltage polarizing method NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage U2 as polarizing quantity U3P This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED The pre processing block cal...

Page 389: ...nce overcurrent steps with integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative sequence protection schemes permissive or blocking Each part is described separately in the following sections 8 5 7 5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 negative sequence current as measuring quantity Every of the four overcurrent stage has th...

Page 390: ...stage is shown in the following figure X a b a b ENMULTx OR IOP STx TRx AND AND T F Ix BLKSTx BLOCK IxMult Characteristx DefTime DirModex Off DirModex Non directional DirModex Forward DirModex Reverse AND AND FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int OR BLKTR OR STAGEx_DIR_Int IEC09000683 vsd AND AND Characteristx Inverse Inverse txmin tx IEC09000683 V3 EN Figure 171 Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence o...

Page 391: ...ult directional element Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40 of I Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and reverse areas in the operating characteristic Directional comparison ste...

Page 392: ...g Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step is shown in figure 166 X a b a b I Dir FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int BLOCK STAGE1_DIR_Int 0 6 X 0 4 a b a b AND STAGE3_DIR_Int STAGE4_DIR_Int STAGE2_DIR_Int OR STRV UPolMin IPolMin AngleRCA D i r e c ti o n a l C h a r a c t e ri s ti c FWD RVS AND AND AND STFW FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int AND IEC070000...

Page 393: ...imum polarizing voltage 1 100 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Minimum polarizing current 2 100 of IBase 1 0 of Ir Real part of negative sequence source impedance used for current polarization 0 50 1000 00 W phase Imaginary part of negative sequence source impedance used for current polarization 0 50 3000 00 W phase Operate time start function at 0 to 2 x Iset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Reset time start function at 2 ...

Page 394: ...th the residual current always has 90º phase shift compared to the residual voltage 3U0 The characteristic angle is chosen to 90º in such a network In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed with a parallel resistor the active residual current component in phase with the residual voltage should be used for the earth fault detection In such networks the characteristic angle is chose...

Page 395: ...n is needed to all three phase inputs Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN If a connection is made to GRPxN this signal is used else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1 GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 the internally calculated sum of these inputs 3I0 and 3U0 will be used 8 6 3 Function block IEC07000032 2 en vsd SDEPSDE I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRDIR BLKNDN BLKUN TRIP TRDIRIN TRNDIN TRUN STAR...

Page 396: ... directional residual over current function TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current TRUN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over voltage START BOOLEAN General start of the function STDIRIN BOOLEAN Start of the directional residual over current function STNDIN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over current STUN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over voltag...

Page 397: ...sidual over current prot in of IBase tDef 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent in sec SRef 0 03 200 00 SB 0 01 10 00 Reference value of res power for inverse time count in of SBase kSN 0 00 2 00 0 01 0 10 Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode OpINNonDir Off On Off Operation of non directional residual overcurrent protection INNonDir ...

Page 398: ...efinite timers in sec tPCrv 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Setting P for customer programmable curve tACrv 0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Setting A for customer programmable curve tBCrv 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Setting B for customer programmable curve tCCrv 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Setting C for customer programmable curve ResetTypeCrv Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset IEC Reset Reset mode when current drops off tPRCrv 0 ...

Page 399: ... blocks The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub functions included Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 cos φ φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage φ ang 3I0 ang Uref The reference voltage Uref is the polarizing quantity which is used for directionality and is defined asUref 3U0 e jRCADir that is 3U0 inv...

Page 400: ... the residual voltage 3U0 must be larger than the set levels INCosPhi INRel and UNRel Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 181 Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR When the function picks up binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP a...

Page 401: ...0 3I j 0 3 j I cos 0 3 ref U U IEC06000650 V2 EN Figure 178 Characteristic with ROADir restriction The function indicates forward reverse direction to the fault Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 cos φ 180 the set value It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 179 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 8 Curre...

Page 402: ...r to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 181 For trip the residual power 3I0 3U0 cos φ the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set levels SN INRel and UNRel Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR When the function picks up binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain ac...

Page 403: ...or trip Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRel and INDir and residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the UNRel In addition the angle φ shall be in the set area defined byROADir and RCADir Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 181 Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR When the function picks up binary output signals START and STDIRIN are a...

Page 404: ...for the sensitive earth fault protection will saturate This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay TimeChar parameter The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255 3 For trip the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level INNonDir Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN When the function picks up bi...

Page 405: ...m of the sensitive earth fault current protection 8 6 8 Technical data Table 193 SDEPSDE technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate level for 3I0 cosj directional residual overcurrent 0 25 200 00 of lBase 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Operate level for 3I0 3U0 cosj directional residual power 0 25 200 00 of SBase 1 0 of Sr at S Sr 1 0 of S at S Sr Operate level for 3I0 and j resid...

Page 406: ...ctional residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Min 115 ms Max 165 ms Reset time for directional residual overcurrent at 2 to 0 x Iset Min 25 ms Max 65 ms Independent time delay for non directional residual overvoltage at 0 8 to 1 2 x Uset 0 000 60 000 sec 0 2 or 80 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay for non directional residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset 0 000 60 000 sec 0 2 or 80 ms ...

Page 407: ...t content of the transformer temperature continuously This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the transformer with two time constants which is based on current measurement Two warning levels are available This enables actions in the power system to be done before dangerous temperatures are reached If the temperature continues to increase to the trip value the protection initiates a tri...

Page 408: ...nit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On IRef 10 0 1000 0 IB 1 0 100 0 Reference current in of IBase IRefMult 0 01 10 00 0 01 1 00 Multiplication Factor for reference current IBase1 30 0 250 0 IB 1 0 100 0 Base current IBase1 without Cooling input in of IBase IBase2 30 0 250 0 IB 1 0 100 0 Base Current IBase2 with Cooling input ON in of IBase Tau1 1 0 500 0 Min 1 0 60 0 T...

Page 409: ...content trip value ResLo 10 0 95 0 Itr 1 0 60 0 Lockout reset level in of heat content trip value ThetaInit 0 0 95 0 1 0 50 0 Initial Heat content in of heat content trip value Warning 1 0 500 0 Min 0 1 30 0 Time setting below which warning would be set in min tPulse 0 01 0 30 s 0 01 0 10 Length of the pulse for trip signal in sec Table 197 TRPTTR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit St...

Page 410: ...f the three phase currents a relative final temperature heat content is calculated according to the expression 2 final ref I I æ ö Q ç ç è ø EQUATION1171 V1 EN Equation 70 where I is the largest phase current Iref is a given reference current If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level corresponding to the set operate trip current then the start output sig...

Page 411: ...o a calculation of the time to operation with the present current This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature ln final operate operate final n t t æ ö Q Q ç ç Q Q è ø EQUATION1176 V1 EN Equation 75 The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as an integer output TTRIP After a trip there can be...

Page 412: ...Calculation of final temperature I3P Calculation of heat content Final Temp TripTemp HEATCONT Actual Temp Alarm1 Alarm2 Temp Actual Temp TripTemp ALARM1 TRIP Actual Temp Recl Temp START Calculation of time to trip Calculation of time to reset of lockout TTRIP TRESCAL Management of setting parameters Tau IBase Current base used COOLING Tau used ALARM2 WARNING IEC05000833 2 en vsd S R LOCKOUT ENMULT...

Page 413: ...tent trip 8 8 Breaker failure protection 3 phase activation and output CCRBRF 8 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Breaker failure protection 3 phase activation and output CCRBRF 3I BF SYMBOL U V1 EN 50BF 8 8 2 Functionality Breaker failure protection CCRBRF ensures a fast backup tripping of surrounding breakers i...

Page 414: ...TL1 STL2 STL3 CBCLDL1 CBCLDL2 CBCLDL3 CBFLT TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRETL1 TRRETL2 TRRETL3 CBALARM IEC06000188 V2 EN Figure 184 CCRBRF function block 8 8 4 Signals Table 200 CCRBRF Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for current inputs BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start of breaker failure protection function STL1 BOOLEAN ...

Page 415: ...1 out of 3 1 out of 4 1 out of 3 Back up trip modes 2 out of 4 or 1 out of 3 or 1 out of 4 RetripMode Retrip Off CB Pos Check No CBPos Check Retrip Off Oper mode of re trip logic OFF CB Pos Check No CB Pos Check IP 5 200 IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in of IBase IN 2 200 IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in of IBase t1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay of re trip t2 0 000 60 000 s 0...

Page 416: ...rent check With the current check the re trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current level The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal This signal will start the back up trip timer If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by the function by detection of either low current through RMS evaluation ...

Page 417: ...ible to have instantaneous back up trip function if a signal is high if the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults for example at low gas pressure S R SR Q OR AND AND 30 ms t 150 ms START STL1 OR OR BackupTrip L1 BFP Started L1 Time out L1 Reset L1 BLOCK Retrip Time Out L1 IEC09000976 1 en vsd IEC09000976 V1 EN Figure 185 Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic AND AND AND AN...

Page 418: ... of 4 AND OR 1 out of 3 Current High L2 Current High L3 From other phases AND Current High L1 OR Contact Closed L1 OR Backup Trip L1 tPulse Backup Trip L2 OR From other phases Backup Trip L3 TRBU OR S R SR Q AND t t3 tPulse TRBU2 OR 2 out of 4 BUTripMode 1 BFP Started L1 AND BFP Started L2 BFP Started L3 IEC09000979 V3 EN Figure 188 Simplified logic scheme of the back up trip logic function Intern...

Page 419: ... 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 15 ms whichever is greater Time delay for back up trip at 0 to 2 x Iset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 15 ms whichever is greater Time delay for back up trip at multi phase start at 0 to 2 x Iset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 20 ms whichever is greater Additional time delay for a second back up trip at 0 to 2 x Iset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 20 ms whichever is greater Time delay for alarm for faul...

Page 420: ...ND POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL TRIP START IEC13000305 1 en vsd IEC13000305 V1 EN Figure 189 CCPDSC function block 8 9 4 Signals Table 207 CCPDSC Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKDBYAR BOOLEAN 0 Block of function at CB single phase auto re closing cycle CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close order to CB O...

Page 421: ...rent compared to the highest CurrRelLevel 0 100 IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the function in of IBase Table 210 CCPDSC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 8 9 6 Monitored data Table 211 CCPDSC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description IMin REAL A Lowest phase curren...

Page 422: ...within the function If the inputs are indicating pole discordance the trip timer is started This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement The sampled analog phase currents are pre processed in a discrete Fourier filter DFT block From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS valu...

Page 423: ...he local HMI The input signal BLOCK is high The input signal BLKDBYAR is high The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance protection It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal f...

Page 424: ...etected and the internal signal INPS is turned high This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions The pole discordance protection is i...

Page 425: ...lots of electric power it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system Often the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state The task of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself Figure 193 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with underpower and ...

Page 426: ...7 2 en vsd GUPPDUP I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT IEC07000027 V2 EN Figure 194 GUPPDUP function block 8 10 4 Signals Table 213 GUPPDUP Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Current group connection U3P GROUP SIGNAL Voltage group connection BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1 BLOCK2 BOOLEA...

Page 427: ...lay1 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 1 00 Trip delay for stage 1 DropDelay1 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 06 Drop off delay for stage 1 OpMode2 Off UnderPower UnderPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off On Power2 0 0 500 0 SB 0 1 1 0 Power setting for stage 2 in of SBase Angle2 180 0 180 0 Deg 0 1 0 0 Characteristic angle for max power senistivity stage 2 TripDelay2 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 1 00 Trip delay for stage 2 DropD...

Page 428: ...current and voltage angles at 30 of Ir IAngComp100 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Corr of error betw current and voltage angles at 100 of Ir Table 217 GUPPDUP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups Mode L1 L2 L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 Pos Seq Selection of measured current and vol...

Page 429: ...lated according to chosen formula as shown in table 219 Table 219 Complex power calculation Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation L1 L2 L3 1 1 2 2 3 3 L L L L L L S U I U I U I EQUATION1697 V1 EN Equation 78 Arone 1 2 1 2 3 3 L L L L L L S U I U I EQUATION1698 V1 EN Equation 79 PosSeq 3 PosSeq PosSeq S U I EQUATION1699 V1 EN Equation 80 L1L2 1 2 1 2 L L L L S U I I EQUATION1700...

Page 430: ...a common signal TRIP will be activated To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function The absolute hysteresis of the stage1 2 is Hysteresis1 2 abs Power1 2 drop power1 2 For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low normally down to 0 02 p u of rated generator power The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value The drop power value ...

Page 431: ...ted value is immediately given out without any filtering that is without any additional delay When k is set to value bigger than 0 the filtering is enabled A typical value for k 0 92 in case of slow operating functions 8 10 7 2 Calibration of analog inputs Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0 5 measuring accuracy This is achieved by amplitude a...

Page 432: ... base power PPERCENT The reactive power is provided as Mvar value Q or in percent of base power QPERCENT 8 10 8 Technical data Table 220 GUPPDUP technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Power level for Step 1 and Step 2 0 0 500 0 of SBase 1 0 of Sr at S Sr 1 0 of S at S Sr where 1 732 r r r S U I Characteristic angle for Step 1 and Step 2 180 0 180 0 degrees 2 0 degrees Independent time del...

Page 433: ...large and if it consumes lots of electric power it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system Often the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself Figure 197 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection...

Page 434: ...07000028 2 en vsd GOPPDOP I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT IEC07000028 V2 EN Figure 198 GOPPDOP function block 8 11 4 Signals Table 221 GOPPDOP Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Current group connection U3P GROUP SIGNAL Voltage group connection BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1 BLOCK2...

Page 435: ...peration mode for stage 1 Off On Power1 0 0 500 0 SB 0 1 120 0 Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1 direction in of SBase Angle1 180 0 180 0 Deg 0 1 0 0 Characteristic angle for max power senistivity stage 1 TripDelay1 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 1 00 Trip delay for stage 1 DropDelay1 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 06 Drop off delay for stage 1 OpMode2 Off OverPower OverPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off On Power...

Page 436: ...tion compensates voltage error at 5 of Ur UAmpComp30 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Amplitude correction compensates voltage error at 30 of Ur UAmpComp100 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Amplitude correction compensates voltage error at 100 of Ur IAngComp5 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Corr of error betw current and voltage angles at 5 of Ir IAngComp30 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Corr of error betw current...

Page 437: ...two stages with individual settings IEC06000567 2 en vsd Chosen current phasors Chosen voltage phasors Complex power calculation P Derivation of S composant in Char angle S angle S angle Power1 t TRIP1 START1 Q P POWRE Q POWIM S angle Power2 t TRIP2 START2 IEC06000567 V2 EN Figure 199 Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function The function will use voltage and current phasors calcul...

Page 438: ...tion Angle1 2 is calculated If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated If this angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1 2 A start signal START1 2 is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value After a set time delay TripDelay1 2 a trip TRIP1 2 signal is...

Page 439: ...sive formula Old Calculated S k S 1 k S EQUATION1959 V1 EN Equation 97 Where S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties Default value for parameter k ...

Page 440: ...ation will be used for related input signals Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report The active power is provided as MW value P or in percent of base power PPERCENT The reactive power is provided as Mvar value Q or in percent of base power QPERCENT Section 8 1MRK502052 UEN B Current protection 434 Technical manual ...

Page 441: ...Sr and k 0 000 0 01 6000 00 s 0 2 or 40 ms whichever is greater To achieve this accuracy for reverse power protection it is also recommended to apply settings k 0 990 and Mode PosSeq These settings will help to minimize the overall measurement error ensuring the best accuracy for this application 8 12 Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC 8 12 1 Identification Function ...

Page 442: ... is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated generator current t is operating time in seconds K is a constant which depends of the generators size and design NS2PTOC has a wide range of K settings and the sensitivity and capability of detecting and tripping for negative sequence currents down to the continuous capability of a generator In order to match the heating characterist...

Page 443: ...PTOC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On tAlarm 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 3 00 Time delay for Alarm operated by START signal in sec OpStep1 Off On On Enable execution of step 1 I2 1 3 500 IB 1 10 Negative sequence current level for step 1 in of IBase CurveType1 Definite Inverse Definite Selection of definite or inverse time character...

Page 444: ...or step 2 in sec ResetMultip2 0 01 20 00 0 01 1 00 Reset multiplier for K2 defines reset time of inverse curve Table 232 NS2PTOC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 8 12 6 Monitored data Table 233 NS2PTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description NSCURR REAL A Negative sequence...

Page 445: ...2 respectively If NS2PTOC has already started but not tripped and measured negative sequence current drops below the start value the start outputs remains active for the time defined by the resetting parameters A BLOCK input signal resets NS2PTOC momentarily When the parameter CurveType1 is set to Inverse an inverse curve is selected according to selected value for parameter K1 The minimum trip ti...

Page 446: ...8 Where INS is the measured negative sequence current IStart is the desired start level in pu of rated generator current ResetMultip is multiplier of the generator capability constant K equal to setting K1 and thus defines reset time of inverse time characteristic 8 12 7 1 Start sensitivity The trip start levels Current I2 1 and I2 2 of NS2PTOC are freely settable over a range of 3 to 500 of rated...

Page 447: ...short time unbalanced conditions 8 12 7 3 Logic diagram IEC080004661 4 en vsdx Operation ON Inverse TR1 OR BLKST1 a b a b Negative sequence current I2 1 CurveType1 Definite CurveType1 Inverse t1Min AND ST1 AND BLOCK AND AND t1Max t1 IEC08000466 1 EN V4 EN Figure 203 Simplified logic diagram for step 1 of Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC Step 2 for Negative sequenc...

Page 448: ...iplier 0 01 20 00 5 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 1 2 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Maximum trip delay at 0 5 to 2 x Iset step 1 2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay at 0 5 to 2 x Iset step 1 2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay for Alarm at 0 5 t...

Page 449: ... when the terminal voltage drops below the specified voltage level for the preset time 8 13 1 2 Function block AEGPVOC I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR TRIP START ARMED IEC13000198 1 en vsd IEC13000198 V1 EN Figure 205 AEGPVOC Function block 8 13 1 3 Signals Table 235 AEGPVOC Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Three Phase Current input U3P GROUP SIGNAL Three Phase Voltage input BLOCK ...

Page 450: ...OC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description IMAX REAL A Maximum value of current UMAX REAL kV Maximum value of phase to phase voltage 8 13 1 6 Operation principle Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator AEGPVOC function is connected to three phase current input either from the generator terminal side or from generator neutral point side and three phase voltage from...

Page 451: ...tArm ON Delay DisarmU a a b b t tDisarm ON Delay OR AND IEC09000784 2 en vsd t IEC09000784 V2 EN Figure 206 AEGPVOC logic diagram 8 13 1 7 Technical data Table 240 AEGPVOC technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value overcurrent 5 900 of IBase 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio overcurrent 95 at 20 900 of IBase Transient overreach overcurrent function 10 at τ 100 ms Cr...

Page 452: ...on Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC I U 51V 8 14 2 Functionality Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC function can be used as generator backup protection against short circuits The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used eit...

Page 453: ...lock of function both stages BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block of voltage restraint overcurrent stage ANSI 51V BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function Table 242 VRPVOC Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal from voltage restrained overcurrent stage TRUV BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function START BOOLEAN General start signal STOC BOOLEAN...

Page 454: ...On Off Operation of under voltage stage ANSI 27 Off On StartVolt 2 0 100 0 UB 0 1 50 0 Voltage for start of under voltage stage in of UBase tDef_UV 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 1 00 Definite time time delay when used for Under Voltage EnBlkLowV Off On Off Enable internal low voltage level blocking for Under Voltage BlkLowVolt 0 0 5 0 UB 0 1 3 0 Internal low voltage level for blocking of UV in of UBase Tabl...

Page 455: ... entered as rated phase to phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV 8 14 7 3 Overcurrent protection The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity with the set start level The overcurrent step starts if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is higher than the set level Voltage restraint control feature The overcurrent protection operation is...

Page 456: ...on as function of measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation Voltage controlled overcurrent when setting parameter VDepMode Step the start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 209 UBase Start level of the current StartCurr VDepFact StartCurr UHighLimit IEC10000124 2 en vsd IEC10000124 V2 EN Figure 209 Example for start level of the current variation as function...

Page 457: ...D a b b a MinPh phVoltage BLKUV IEC10000213 1 en vsd DEF time selected STUV TRUV IEC10000213 V1 EN Figure 211 Simplified internal logic diagram for undervoltage function 8 14 7 5 Undervoltage protection The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the lowest measured phase phase voltage quantity with the set start level The undervoltage step starts if the magnitude of the measured voltag...

Page 458: ...0 x Iset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Operate time start overcurrent at 0 to 10 x Iset Min 5 ms Max 20 ms Reset time start overcurrent at 10 to 0 x Iset Min 20 ms Max 35 ms Independent time delay to operate at 0 to 2 x Iset 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Inverse time characteristics see tables 959 and 960 13 curve types See tables 959 and 960 Minimum operate time for inverse time characte...

Page 459: ...stator winding against excessive temperature as a result of overcurrents The functions operating characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard IEEE C50 13 If internal generator components exceed its design temperature limit damage can be the result Damage to generator insulation can range from minor loss of life to complete failure depending on the severity and duration of th...

Page 460: ...signal from the function LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Trip lockout output latched BLKRECL BOOLEAN Block machine closing command 8 15 5 Settings Table 250 GSPTTR Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On I 105 0 900 0 0 1 110 0 Current pickup value for overload protection ReclsLevTheta 1 0 100 0 0 1 70 0 Level for theta in percent below which the ...

Page 461: ... 6 0 Weighting factor for the negative sequence current Table 252 GSPTTR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description MeasurCurrent RMS PosSeqNegSeq RMS Measured current quantity RMS or weighted sum of positive and negative sequence GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 8 15 6 Monitored data Table 253 GSPTTR Monitored data Name Type Val...

Page 462: ...generator or on the neutral side of the stator winding see Figure214 G Field breaker Two alternative measurement points for the stator overload function Step up transformer Excitation transformer IEC12000012 1 en vsd HV side Neutral side IL1 IL2 IL3 IEC12000012 V1 EN Figure 214 Measurement of stator current The selection of current measurement is done by using the parameter MeasurCurrent Section 8...

Page 463: ...tive sequence current in primary amperes PosSeqFactor is a setting factor to multiply the positive sequence current and its default value is 1 0 NegSeqFactor is a setting factor to multiply the negative sequence current and its default value is 6 0 The measured current used by the function is available as a service value Overload characteristics Stator winding temperature increases with the curren...

Page 464: ...as prescribed by the standard see Table254 I is measured current by the function IBase is base current stator winding rated current In addition to this equation based operating characteristic the stator overload function has some additional cut off features The actual overall operating characteristic of the stator overload function is shown in Figure215 Section 8 1MRK502052 UEN B Current protectio...

Page 465: ...t s I A 1 2 IBase I TD1 tr t ANSI12000009 1 en vsd ANSI12000009 V1 EN Figure 215 Operating characteristic for overload function As shown in Figure 215 it is possible to define the maximum tMax and minimum tMin operate time for the function regardless of the level of the measured current In 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 8 Current protection 459 Technical manual ...

Page 466: ...er is incremented following the inverse characteristic given in Figure215 When Theta has reached value 100 the output signal TRIP is set The minimum trip signal duration is defined by the parameter tPulse Note also that the BLKRECL signal will remain one as long as Theta ReclsLevTheta Thus the parameter ReclsLevTheta represents the Theta value below which is safe again to re connect the tripped ge...

Page 467: ...ysteresis THETA 100 START TRIP ReclsLevTheta tReset t t t IEC12000014 1 en vsd IEC12000014 V1 EN Figure 216 Operating principles of the stator overload function 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 8 Current protection 461 Technical manual ...

Page 468: ...T resets lockout and forces Theta value to zero Available binary outputs TRIP operation of the overload feature START current bigger than I level LOCKOUT sealed in TRIP output signal from the function Note that lockout feature is only enabled by setting AutoLockout On BLKRECL output signal active as long as Theta ReclsLevTheta which can be used to block closing of the generator CB Simplified logic...

Page 469: ...urrents The functions operating characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard IEEE C50 13 If internal generator components exceed its design temperature limit damage can be the result Damage to generator insulation can range from minor loss of life to complete failure depending on the severity and duration of the temperature excursion Excess temperature can also cause mechani...

Page 470: ...KOUT RESET TRIP TRIPUC START STARTUC LOCKOUT BLKRECL ALRIPPLE IMEAS IEC12000028 V1 EN Figure 218 GRPTTR function block 8 16 4 Signals Table 256 GRPTTR Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Current Group Connection BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLOCKUC BOOLEAN 0 Block under current protection feature SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for forcing the output LOCKOUT RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN...

Page 471: ...OCKOUT when TRIP is set tPulse 0 5 10 0 s 0 1 1 0 Minimum pulse length of the trip signal tMin 1 0 120 0 s 0 1 10 0 Minimum time used in operate characteristic tMax 100 0 2000 0 s 0 1 300 0 Maximum time used in operate characteristic tCutOff 10 0 2000 0 s 0 1 120 0 Cut off time used in operate characteristic tReset 10 0 2000 0 s 0 1 120 0 Time required for Theta to reset from 100 to 0 OpAlarmRippl...

Page 472: ...sformer HV winding rated Ph Ph voltage in kV PhAngleShift 180 180 Deg 30 30 Phase angle shift across excitation transformer degrees 8 16 6 Monitored data Table 260 GRPTTR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description IMEAS REAL A Measured current used for calculation of operate time IDC REAL A Average DC current value used for alarm and trip logic THETA REAL Overload in percent of set tri...

Page 473: ...Figure 219 Representation of the rotor overload protection Each of these five sub blocks will be described in the following sections of this document Current measurement Three phase currents are measured either on the high voltage side HV or on the low voltage side LV of the excitation transformer see Figure220 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 8 Current protection 467 Technical manual ...

Page 474: ...or overload protection The DC current is calculated from the connected three phase input currents see Figure220 This DC current calculation is valid for any type of three phase rectifier bridge i e either diode or thyristor based In order to properly calculate the rotor winding DC current the physical location of the used CT is defined by the parameter CT_Location When CT_Location LV_winding defau...

Page 475: ...former ratings are specified by the following three setting parameters UrLV LV winding rated ph ph voltage in Volts UrHV HV winding rated ph ph voltage in kV PhAngleShift HV side to LV side phase angle shift in degrees it has value of 30º for Dy1 excitation transformer and 30º for Dy11 excitation transformer Once the measured currents are transferred from the HV side to the LV side of the excitati...

Page 476: ...see Table254 I is measured current by the function IBase is base current rotor winding rated current when DC current is used as measured current In addition to this equation based operating characteristic the rotor overload function has some additional cut off features The actual overall operating characteristic of the rotor overload function is shown in Figure221 tMin tCutOff tMax i IBase t s I A...

Page 477: ...lock signal is present the output signal START is activated and the Theta parameter is incremented following the inverse characteristic given in Figure222 When theta has reached value 100 the output signal TRIP is set The minimum trip signal duration is defined by the parameter tPulse Note also that the BLKRECL signal will remain one as long as Theta ReclsLevTheta Thus the parameter ReclsLevTheta ...

Page 478: ...hysteresis THETA 100 START TRIP ReclsLevTheta tReset t t t IEC12000015 1 en vsd IEC12000015 V1 EN Figure 222 Operating principles of the rotor overload function Section 8 1MRK502052 UEN B Current protection 472 Technical manual ...

Page 479: ...his feature is given in Figure223 IEC12000021 1 en vsd BLOCKUC BLOCK AND I MeasurCurrent Operation_I IBase tTrip_I t TRIPUC x NOT NOT IEC12000021 V1 EN Figure 223 Undercurrent protection feature Tripping logic This tripping logic provides some additional features regarding blocking and tripping options available within the function The list below describes functionality of every binary input and o...

Page 480: ...ridge and the excitation transformer In case a fault happens in the rectifier circuit for example a short circuit or broken diode thyristor the rotor system is endangered due to asymmetry in the three phase currents This asymmetry will cause a ripple in the rotor DC current This alarm method estimates the ripple of the rotor DC current and if it exceed the preset level parameter AlmRippleLev it wi...

Page 481: ...5 or 200 ms whichever is greater Minimum operate time for thermal characteristic 1 0 120 0 s 1 5 or 200 ms whichever is greater Maximum operate time for thermal characteristic 100 0 2000 0 s 1 5 or 200 ms whichever is greater Undercurrent start level 5 0 500 0 of IBase 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Start time undercurrent at 2 to 0 x Iset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Independent time delay for undercu...

Page 482: ...476 ...

Page 483: ...y Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long time delayed back up to primary protection UV2PTUV has two voltage steps each with inverse or definite time delay UV2PTUV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close...

Page 484: ...ck of step 1 BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal step 2 BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 Table 264 UV2PTUV Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1 TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1 TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2 TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3 TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2 TR2L1 BOOLE...

Page 485: ... Number of phases required for op 1 of 3 2 of 3 3 of 3 from step 1 U1 1 0 100 0 UB 0 1 70 0 Voltage setting start val DT IDMT in of UBase step 1 t1 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 5 00 Definitive time delay of step 1 t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 5 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 k1 0 05 1 10 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 IntBlkSel1 Off Block of trip Block...

Page 486: ...e step 1 ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1 tIReset1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 025 Time delay in IDMT reset s step 1 ACrv1 0 005 200 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 BCrv1 0 50 100 00 0 01 1 00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 CCrv1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 Para...

Page 487: ...ase L2 UL3 REAL kV Voltage in phase L3 9 1 7 Operation principle Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV is used to detect low power system voltage UV2PTUV has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays If one two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value a corresponding START signal is generated UV2PTUV can be set to START TRIP based on 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 o...

Page 488: ...ement principle Depending on the set ConnType value UV2PTUV measures phase to earth or phase to phase voltages and compare against set values U1 and U2 The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs Either 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal To av...

Page 489: ...finity There will be an undesired discontinuity Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon In the voltage interval Un down to Un 1 0 CrvSatn 100 the used voltage will be Un 1 0 CrvSatn 100 If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that 0 100 CrvSatn B C EQUATION1435 V1 EN Equation 109 The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse ...

Page 490: ...Reset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the inverse time the corresponding start output is reset Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area Note that for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and ...

Page 491: ...er Linearly decreased Instantaneous Measured Voltage tIReset1 IEC05000010 4 en vsd IEC05000010 V4 EN Figure 227 Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 9 Voltage protection 485 Technical manual ...

Page 492: ...gnal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types Definite timer delay When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 229 Detailed information about individual stage reset operation behavior is shown in figure 230 and figure 231 respectively Note that by setting tResetn 0 0s instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured Section 9...

Page 493: ...ND IEC09000785 V3 EN Figure 229 Detailed logic diagram for step 1 DT operation U1 ST1 TR1 tReset1 t1 IEC10000039 3 en vsd IEC10000039 V3 EN Figure 230 Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 9 Voltage protection 487 Technical manual ...

Page 494: ...age level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1 either the trip output of step 1 or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1 are blocked The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter This internal blocking can also be set to Off resulting in no voltage based blocking Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2 In case of disconnection of th...

Page 495: ... to phase voltages Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals are used The voltages are individually compared to the set value and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition The design of Two step undervoltage protection...

Page 496: ... 2 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase 2 Phase 1 Time integrator tIReset2 ResetTypeCrv2 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Time integrator tIReset1 ResetTypeCrv1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 UL1 UL2 UL3 TRIP TRIP OR OR OR OR OR OR START IntBlkStVal1 t1Reset IntBlkStVal2 t2Reset IEC05000834 2 en vsd Comparator IEC05000834 V2 EN Figure 233 Schematic ...

Page 497: ...greater Minimum operate time inverse characteristics 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 40ms whichever is greater Operate time start at 2 to 0 x Uset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Reset time start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Operate time start at 1 2 to 0 x Uset Min 5 ms Max 25 ms Reset time start at 0 to 1 2 x Uset Min 15 ms Max 35 ms Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1 2 to 0 x Uset Impulse margin time ...

Page 498: ...T ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 IEC06000277 V2 EN Figure 234 OV2PTOV function block 9 2 4 Signals Table 270 OV2PTOV Input signals Name Type Default Description U3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for three phase voltage input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal step 1 BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal step 2 BLK...

Page 499: ...settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On OperationStep1 Off On On Enable execution of step 1 Characterist1 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog inv curve Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1 OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op 1 of 3 2 of...

Page 500: ... of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1 tIReset1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 025 Time delay in IDMT reset s step 1 ACrv1 0 005 200 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 BCrv1 0 50 100 00 0 01 1 00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 CCrv1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 DCrv1 0 000 60 000 0 001 0 000 Parameter ...

Page 501: ...le Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system voltage OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays If one two or three phase voltages increase above the set value a corresponding START signal is issued OV2PTOV can be set to START TRIP based on 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages being above the set point If the voltage remains above the ...

Page 502: ...ly and compared with the set values U1 for Step 1 and U2 for Step 2 The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs Either 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal To avoid oscillations of the output START signal a hysteresis is included 9 2 7 2 Time d...

Page 503: ...sion is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity There will be an undesired discontinuity Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon In the voltage interval Un up to Un 1 0 CrvSatn 100 the used voltage will be Un 1 0 CrvSatn 100 If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that 0 100 CrvSatn B C EQUATION1435 V1 EN Equation 116 The h...

Page 504: ...et2 for the inverse time the corresponding START output is reset after that the defined reset time has elapsed Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area The hysteresis value for each step is settable HystAbsn where n means either 1 or 2 respectively to...

Page 505: ...bs1 START START tIReset1 Measured tIReset1 Linearly decreased IEC09000055 2 en vsd IEC09000055 V2 EN Figure 236 Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 9 Voltage protection 499 Technical manual ...

Page 506: ...inverse time delay at different reset types Definite time delay When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 238 Detailed information about individual stage reset operation behavior is shown in figure 230 and figure 231 respectively Note that by setting tResetn 0 0s where n means either 1 or 2 respectively instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage ...

Page 507: ...0000100 V2 EN Figure 238 Detailed logic diagram for step 1 definite time delay DT operation tReset1 U1 START TRIP t1 IEC10000037 2 en vsd IEC10000037 V2 EN Figure 239 Example for step 1 Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 9 Voltage protection 501 Technical manual ...

Page 508: ...puts related to step 2 9 2 7 4 Design The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase to earth voltages or the three phase to phase voltages Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals are used The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration A special logic i...

Page 509: ...set Trip Output Logic Step 2 Phase 3 Phase 2 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase 2 Phase 1 Time integrator tIreset2 ResetTypeCrv2 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Time integrator tIreset1 ResetTypeCrv1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 UL1 UL2 UL3 TRIP TRIP OR OR OR OR OR OR IEC05000013 2 en vsd IEC05000013 WMF V2 EN Figure 241 Schematic design of Two...

Page 510: ... whichever is greater Definite time delay high step step 2 at 0 to 1 2 x Uset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 45 ms whichever is greater Minimum operate time Inverse characteristics 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 45 ms whichever is greater Operate time start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Reset time start at 2 to 0 x Uset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Operate time start at 0 to 1 2 x Uset Min 20 ms Max 35 ms Reset time ...

Page 511: ...m a single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps each with inverse or definite time delay Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults 9 3 3 Function block IEC06000278 2 en vsd ROV2PTOV U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TRIP TR1 TR2 START ST1 ST2 IEC06000278 V2 EN Figure 242 ROV2PTOV function block 9 ...

Page 512: ...urve C Prog inv curve Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1 U1 1 0 200 0 UB 0 1 30 0 Voltage setting start val DT IDMT step 1 in of UBase t1 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 5 00 Definitive time delay of step 1 t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 5 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 k1 0 05 1 10 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 HystAbs1 0 0 50 0 U...

Page 513: ...able curve for step 1 DCrv1 0 000 60 000 0 001 0 000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 PCrv1 0 000 3 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 CrvSat1 0 100 1 0 Tuning param for prog over voltage IDMT curve step 1 tReset2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 025 Time delay in DT reset s step 2 ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased Instantan...

Page 514: ... the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to ROV2PTOV ROV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays If the single phase residual voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay the corresponding TRIP signal is issued The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definit...

Page 515: ... æ ö ç è ø IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN Equation 119 The customer programmable curve can be created as p n n k A t D U U B C U æ ö ç è ø EQUATION1439 V2 EN Equation 120 When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity There will be an undesired discontinuity Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon In the voltage interval Un up t...

Page 516: ...et2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time the corresponding START output is reset after that the defined reset time has elapsed Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area Also notice that for the overvoltage function IDMT ...

Page 517: ...e Time HystAbs1 START START tIReset1 Measured tIReset1 Linearly decreased IEC09000055 2 en vsd IEC09000055 V2 EN Figure 243 Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1 and inverse time delay 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 9 Voltage protection 511 Technical manual ...

Page 518: ... the START signal for step 1 and inverse time delay Definite timer delay When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 245 Detailed information about individual stage reset operation behavior is shown in figure 230 and figure 231 respectively Note that by setting tResetn 0 0s instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured Section 9 1MRK502052 ...

Page 519: ... IEC10000100 V2 EN Figure 245 Detailed logic diagram for step 1 Definite time delay DT operation U1 ST1 TR1 tReset1 t1 IEC10000039 3 en vsd IEC10000039 V3 EN Figure 246 Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 9 Voltage protection 513 Technical manual ...

Page 520: ...ip outputs related to step 1 BLKTR2 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 BLKST2 blocks all START and trip inputs related to step 2 9 3 7 4 Design The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal The single input voltage is compared to the set value and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration The des...

Page 521: ... Table 283 ROV2PTOV technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage step 1 and step 2 1 0 200 0 of UBase 0 5 of Ur at U Ur 0 5 of U at U Ur Absolute hysteresis 0 0 50 0 of UBase 0 5 of Ur at U Ur 0 5 of U at U Ur Inverse time characteristics for low and high step see table 972 See table 972 Definite time delay low step step 1 at 0 to 1 2 x Uset 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 45 ms whichever...

Page 522: ... C37 2 device number Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH U f SYMBOL Q V1 EN 24 9 4 2 Functionality When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its design limits stray flux will flow into non laminated components that are not designed to carry flux This will cause eddy currents to flow These eddy currents can cause excessive heating and s...

Page 523: ...q in of UBase frated V Hz 100 0 200 0 UB f 0 1 140 0 High level of V Hz above which tMin is used in of UBase frated XLeak 0 000 200 000 Ohm 0 001 0 000 Winding leakage reactance in primary ohms TrPulse 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Length of the pulse for trip signal in sec tMin 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 7 000 Minimum trip delay for V Hz inverse curve in sec tMax 0 00 9000 00 s 0 01 1800 00 Maximum trip d...

Page 524: ...election of measured current GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 9 4 6 Monitored data Table 289 OEXPVPH Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description TMTOTRIP REAL s Calculated time to trip for overexcitation in sec VPERHZ REAL V Hz Voltage to frequency ratio in per unit THERMSTA REAL Overexcitation thermal status in of trip level 9 4 7 Operation princi...

Page 525: ...r non laminated parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current circulations Overexcitation will result in overheating of the non laminated metal parts a large increase in magnetizing currents an increase in core and winding temperature an increase in transformer vibration and noise Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per hertz V Hz ratio Pro...

Page 526: ...long as the relative excitation is M V Hz V Hz expressed in of Ur fr The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation For no load condition these two voltages are the same but for a loaded power transformer the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage U which is...

Page 527: ...ach winding 9 4 7 1 Measured voltage If one phase to phase voltage is available from the side where overexcitation protection is applied then Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH shall be set to measure this voltage MeasuredU The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that must be used This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI It is extremely important that MeasuredU and Me...

Page 528: ...e law is according to equation 127 op 2 2 0 18 0 18 t M 1 V Hz k k overexcitation æ ö ç è ø IECEQUATION2298 V2 EN Equation 127 where M the relative excitation V Hz is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load and rated frequency in pu and k is time multiplier for inverse time functions see figure 251 Parameter k time multiplier setting selects one delay curve from the family of curves The re...

Page 529: ...ists the protected transformer will be tripped at j n Inverse delays as per figure 251 can be modified limited by two special definite delay settings namely tMax and tMin see figure 250 0 Mmax V Hz Mmax tMin V Hz Emax E only if f fr const tMax inverse delay law overexcitation under excitation delay in s 99001067 vsd Overexcitation M V Hz Excitation M M V Hz IEC99001067 V1 EN Figure 250 Restriction...

Page 530: ... k 7 k 8 k 9 k 10 k 20 k 60 k 1 OVEREXCITATION IN Time s IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES en01000373 vsd M Emaxcont 100 IEC01000373 V1 EN Figure 251 Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH setting V Hz V Hz can be thought of as a no load voltage at rated frequency where the inverse law should be replaced by...

Page 531: ...Parameter Setting tool is an OEXPVPH setting with a default time constant tCooling of 20 minutes This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous normal values no more overexcitation the normal temperature is assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes If an overexcitation condition would return before that the time to trip will be shorter than it w...

Page 532: ...ponds to 100 THERMSTA should reach 100 at the same time as TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched off THERMSTA shall go over 100 If the delay as per IEEE law or Tailor made Law is limited bytMax and or tMin then the Thermal status will generally not reach 100 at the same time when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds For example if at low degrees of o...

Page 533: ...their respective limit values 9 4 8 Technical data Table 290 OEXPVPH technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value start 100 180 of UBase frated 0 5 of U Operate value alarm 50 120 of start level 0 5 of Ur at U Ur 0 5 of U at U Ur Operate value high level 100 200 of UBase frated 0 5 of U Curve type IEEE or customer defined 2 0 18 1 k IEEE t M EQUATION1319 V1 EN Equation 133 where M...

Page 534: ...sd VDCPTOV U3P1 U3P2 BLOCK TRIP START ALARM U1LOW U2LOW UL1DIFF UL2DIFF UL3DIFF IEC06000528 V2 EN Figure 254 VDCPTOV function block 9 5 4 Signals Table 291 VDCPTOV Input signals Name Type Default Description U3P1 GROUP SIGNAL Bus voltage U3P2 GROUP SIGNAL Capacitor voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function Table 292 VDCPTOV Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Voltage differential pro...

Page 535: ...of UBase tAlarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 2 000 Time delay for voltage differential alarm in seconds U1Low 1 0 100 0 UB 0 1 70 0 Input 1 undervoltage level in of UBase U2Low 1 0 100 0 UB 0 1 70 0 Input 2 undervoltage level in of UBase tBlock 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Reset time for undervoltage block Table 294 VDCPTOV Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description RFL1 0 000 3...

Page 536: ...ay tAlarm respectively tTrip The two three phase voltage supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low The outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated The U1 voltage is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for loss of all three phases Loss of all U1 or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement This ...

Page 537: ...al data Function Range or value Accuracy Voltage difference for alarm and trip 2 0 100 0 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Under voltage level 1 0 100 0 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Independent time delay for voltage differential alarm at 0 8 to 1 2 x UDAlarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 40 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay for voltage differential trip at 0 8 to 1 2 x UDTrip 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 40 ms whichever is...

Page 538: ... current flow through the neutral point resistor To detect an earth fault on the windings of a generating unit one may use a neutral point overvoltage protection a neutral point overcurrent protection a zero sequence overvoltage protection or a residual differential protection These protections are simple and have served well during many years However at best these simple schemes protect only 95 o...

Page 539: ... voltage from which the fundamental and 3rd harmonic voltages are filtered out Samples of the terminal voltage from which the 3rd harmonic voltage is filtered out IEC10000202 1 en vsd IEC10000202 V1 EN Figure 256 Protection principles for STEFPHIZ function 9 6 3 Function block IEC11000211 1 en vsd STEFPHIZ NEUTVOLT TERMVOLT CBCLOSED BLOCK BLOCK3RD BLOCKUN TRIP TRIP3H TRIPUN START START3H STARTUN U...

Page 540: ... one of two 3rd harmonic voltage based prot TRIPUN BOOLEAN Trip by fund freq neutral over voltage protection START BOOLEAN Main common start signal START3H BOOLEAN Start by one of two 3rd harmonic voltage based prot STARTUN BOOLEAN Start signal by fund freq neutral over voltage prot UT3 REAL Mag of 3rd harm voltage at generator terminal side Volts UN3 REAL Mag of 3rd harm voltage at generator neut...

Page 541: ...on delay of 3rd harm based protection 100 SEF in s tUNFund 0 020 60 000 s 0 001 0 500 Operation delay of fundamental UN protection 95 SEF in s Table 301 STEFPHIZ Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description TVoltType NoVoltage ResidualVoltage AllThreePhases PhaseL1 PhaseL2 PhaseL3 ResidualVoltage Used connection type for gen terminal voltage transformer GlobalBaseSel 1 ...

Page 542: ...elf To assure reliable function of the protection it is necessary that the 3rd harmonic voltage generation is at least 0 8 V RMS on VT secondary side The 3rd harmonic voltage generated by the generator has the same phase angle in the three phases It has the characteristic of a zero sequence component If the generator is connected to the power system via a block transformer that cannot transform ze...

Page 543: ...rmonic voltage in the generator neutral point U3N will be close to zero in case of a stator earth fault close to the neutral This fact alone can be used as an indication of stator earth fault To enable better sensitivity and stability also measurement of the generator s 3rd harmonic voltage U3T is also used In addition to the decrease of U3N the generator voltage U3T will increase under the stator...

Page 544: ...nal side In this case the protection will operate as a simple neutral point 3rd harmonic undervoltage protection which must be blocked externally during generator start up and shut down ResidualVoltage The function is fed from an open delta connection of the phase to earth connected voltage transformers at the generator terminal side U3T 1 3 U_Open_Delta AllThreePhases The function is fed from the...

Page 545: ...quency residual voltage Stator Earth Fault detection 95 Start CB Status Block IEC06000449 V2 EN Figure 259 Simplified logic diagram for stator earth fault protection STEFPHIZ function can be described in a simplified logical diagram as shown in figure 260 Note that the 3rd harmonic numerical filters are not part of the stator earth fault protection function These third harmonic voltages are calcul...

Page 546: ...he capacitive coupling to earth differs between the operating conditions when the generator is running with the generator breaker open before synchronization and with the circuit breaker closed This can be shown as in figure 261 DU3 U3 U3N U3T L1 U3T L2 U3T L3 en07000002 2 vsd Ctr 3 Ctr 3 Ctr 3 IEC07000002 V2 EN Figure 261 Generator block with generator circuit breaker With the circuit breaker ope...

Page 547: ...f the 3rd harmonic voltage measured in the terminal point of the generator ANGLE the angle between the phasors UN3 and UT3 given in radians DU3 the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic differential voltage BU3 the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic bias voltage UN the fundamental frequency voltage measured in the neutral point of the generator 9 6 8 Technical data Table 303 STEFPHIZ technical data Function Ra...

Page 548: ...542 ...

Page 549: ...l action schemes gas turbine startup and so on Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and restore SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase phase or three phase neutral voltages to be connected For information about how to connect analog inputs refer to Application manual IED application Anal...

Page 550: ... On StartFrequency 35 00 75 00 Hz 0 01 48 80 Frequency set value tDelay 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Operate time delay tReset 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay for reset tRestore 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Restore time delay RestoreFreq 45 00 65 00 Hz 0 01 50 10 Restore frequency value TimerMode Definite timer Volt based timer Definite timer Setting for choosing timer mode UNom 50 0 150 0 UB 1 ...

Page 551: ...ocessing function that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued 10 1 7 1 Measurement principle The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously and compared with the set value StartFrequency The frequency function is dependent on the voltage magnitude If the v...

Page 552: ...y returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq 10 1 7 3 Voltage dependent time delay Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system except some deviations during power oscillations another criterion is needed to decide where to take actions based on low frequency In many applications the voltage level is very suitable and in most cases is load sh...

Page 553: ...BLOCK blocks all outputs BLKTRIP blocks the TRIP output BLKREST blocks the RESTORE output If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing function both the START and the TRIP outputs are blocked 10 1 7 5 Design The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFre...

Page 554: ... OR Time integrator TimerOperation Mode Selector tDelay tReset tRestore RESTORE Start Trip Output Logic IEC05000726 2 en vsdx TRIP BLKDMAGN IEC05000726 V2 EN Figure 264 Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF 10 2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 10 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Overfrequency protection SAPTOF f S...

Page 555: ...ce voltage measurement and requires two phase phase or three phase neutral voltages to be connected For information about how to connect analog inputs refer to Application manual IED application Analog inputs Setting guidelines 10 2 3 Function block IEC06000280_2_en vsd SAPTOF U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP TRIP START BLKDMAGN FREQ IEC06000280 V2 EN Figure 265 SAPTOF function block 10 2 4 Signals Table 309 SAP...

Page 556: ...orresponding to the chosen time delay the corresponding TRIP signal is issued To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing function that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function the function is blocked and no START or TRIP sign...

Page 557: ... the hysteresis area The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus minimum operate time of the start function 80 90 ms 10 2 7 3 Blocking It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF partially or completely by binary input signals or by parameter settings where BLOCK blocks all outputs BLKTRIP blocks the TRIP output If the measured voltage level decreases below the s...

Page 558: ...curacy Operate value start function at symmetrical three phase voltage 35 00 90 00 Hz 2 0 mHz Operate time start at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz fn 50Hz Min 80 ms Max 95 ms fn 60 Hz Min 65 ms Max 80 ms Reset time start at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Operate time definite time function at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 100 ms whichever is greater Reset time def...

Page 559: ...ed for operate SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase phase or three phase neutral voltages to be connected For information about how to connect analog inputs refer to Application manual IED application Analog inputs Setting guidelines 10 3 3 Function block IEC06000281 2 en vsd SAPFRC U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP...

Page 560: ...t Description STARTDUR REAL Start duration in percents of the total operation time 10 3 7 Operation principle Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC is used to detect fast power system frequency changes at an early stage SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay If the rate of change of frequency remains below the set value for negative rate of change for a time period equal to the chosen time...

Page 561: ...e rate of change of frequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay tTrip If the START condition with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time tReset the START output is reset after that the defined reset time has elapsed Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area the START cond...

Page 562: ...ued after the time delay tRestore if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential and controls if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions The design of SAPFRC is schematically described in figure 268 IEC05000835 2 en vsdx RESTORE Voltage START START TRIP Start Trip Output Logic BLOCK Frequency Comparator If StartFreqGrad 0 AND...

Page 563: ...requency limit when the system frequency falls in that settable frequency band limit and positive sequence voltage within settable voltage band limit The START signal triggers the individual event timer which is the continuous time spent within the given frequency band and the accumulation timer which is the cumulative time spent within the given frequency band Once the timers reach their limit an...

Page 564: ...me to the function HOLDACC BOOLEAN 0 Holds the time accumulation when input is activated RESETACC BOOLEAN 0 Resetting the accumulated time of the function block Table 321 FTAQFVR Output signals Name Type Description ERROR BOOLEAN Error output for incorrect settings TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal of the function TRIPACC BOOLEAN Trip signal when accumulation time is exceeded the set limit TRIPCONT BOOLEAN...

Page 565: ...t value FreqLowLimit 30 00 85 00 Hz 0 01 47 00 Frequency Low limit value CBCheck Disable Enable Enable Enabling the generator start or stop detection logic CurrStartLevel 5 0 100 0 IB 0 1 10 0 Threshold current value of generator in percentage of base current EnaVoltCheck Disable Enable Enable Enabling the voltage band limit check UHighLimit 0 0 200 0 UB 1 0 200 0 Voltage high limit for voltage ba...

Page 566: ... setting the FREQOK and START signals are activated The START signal is controlled by the measured current and voltage input magnitude and the status of the circuit breaker position FTAQFVR function will block START signal activation and Accumulation of time under two following conditions even if the system frequency falls within set band limits When the generator is not synchronized as indicated ...

Page 567: ...me counter registers the time passing whenever the START output is activated It holds the registered time value even when the START signal is deactivated and continues from the registered value when the START signal is reactivated The registration of accumulation time is frozen at its present value when the input HOLDACC or BLOCK is activated The accumulation time can be set to the initTimeAcc par...

Page 568: ...al diagram To achieve a proper operation the set frequency high limit should be more than the set frequency low limit To avoid malfunction a check is performed that FreqHighLimit is greater than FreqLowLimit If not the ERROR signal is activated FTAQFVR can be instantiated with one or more frequency ranges according to the turbine manufacturer s specification When the frequency falls in to the comm...

Page 569: ... for voltage band limit check 0 0 200 0 of UBase 0 5 of Ur at U Ur 0 5 of U at U Ur Operate value current start level 5 0 100 0 of IBase 1 0 of Ir or 0 01 A at I Ir Independent time delay for the continuous time limit at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz 0 0 6000 0 s 0 2 or 200 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay for the accumulation time limit at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz 10 0 90000 0 s ...

Page 570: ...564 ...

Page 571: ...ature can be either blocked made non directional or ordered to use voltage memory in accordance with a parameter setting Additionally two overvoltage and two undervoltage steps either with definite time or inverse time characteristic are available within each function The general function suits applications with underimpedance and voltage controlled overcurrent solutions The general function can a...

Page 572: ...KOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 START STOC1 STOC2 STUC1 STUC2 STOV1 STOV2 STUV1 STUV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 UDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE UIANGLE IEC05000372 V2 EN Figure 271 CVGAPC function block 11 1 4 Signals Table 326 CVGAPC Input ...

Page 573: ...N General trip signal TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1 TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2 TRUC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1 TRUC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2 TROV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1 TROV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2 TRUV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervolt...

Page 574: ...e3 phase3 phase1 MaxPh Ph MinPh Ph UnbalancePh Ph MaxPh Select current signal which will be measured inside function VoltageInput phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3 ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1 phase2 phase2 phase3 phase3 phase1 MaxPh Ph MinPh Ph UnbalancePh Ph MaxPh Select voltage signal which will be measured inside function OperHarmRestr Off On Off Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain...

Page 575: ...ype for OC1 tDef_OC1 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 0 50 Independent definite time delay of OC1 k_OC1 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC1 IMin1 1 10000 IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in of IBase tMin_OC1 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 0 05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1 VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control Off Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 fun...

Page 576: ...iplier for the dependent time delay for OC2 IMin2 1 10000 IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in of IBase tMin_OC2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 0 05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC2 VCntrlMode_OC2 Voltage control Off Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function VDepMode_OC2 Step Slope Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 step slope VDepFact_OC2 0 02 5 00 0 01 1 00 Multiplying facto...

Page 577: ...20 Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in of IBase StartCurr_UC2 2 0 150 0 IB 1 0 70 0 Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in of IBase tDef_UC2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 0 50 Independent definite time delay of UC2 HarmRestr_UC2 Off On Off Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation_OV1 Off On Off Operation OV1 Off On StartVolt_OV1 2 0 200 0 UB 0 1 150 0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in...

Page 578: ...mum operate time for IDMT curves for UV1 k_UV1 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 30 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV1 EnBlkLowV_UV1 Off On On Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1 BlkLowVolt_UV1 0 0 5 0 UB 0 1 0 5 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in of UBase Operation_UV2 Off On Off Operation UV2 Off On StartVolt_UV2 2 0 150 0 UB 0 1 50 0 Operate undervoltage level for ...

Page 579: ..._OC2 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC2 ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2 tResetDef_OC2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 0 00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC2 P_OC2 0 001 10 000 0 001 0 020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC2 A_OC2 0 000 999 000 0 001 0 140 Parameter A ...

Page 580: ... for customer programmable curve for OV2 B_OV2 0 500 99 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2 C_OV2 0 000 1 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2 D_OV2 0 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV2 P_OV2 0 001 10 000 0 001 0 020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV2 ResCrvType_UV1 Instantaneous...

Page 581: ...for customer programmable curve for UV2 P_UV2 0 001 10 000 0 001 0 020 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV2 Table 330 CVGAPC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 11 1 6 Monitored data Table 331 CVGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description DIROC1 INTEGER 1 Forw...

Page 582: ...balancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time 10 Phase1 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector ...

Page 583: ...de and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time 10 Phase1 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor UL1 UL2 11 Phase2 Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference betw...

Page 584: ...f the protected object in primary amperes when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9 as shown in table 332 2 rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3 1 732 Iphase when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15 as shown in table 332 Base voltage shall be entered as 1 rated phase to earth voltage of the protected object in primary k...

Page 585: ...otected object For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor see table 333 and measured current phasor see table 332 will be used for directional decision Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision CVGAPC function will NOT do this automa...

Page 586: ...meter setting tool checks that the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick up level the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region defined by the relay operate angle ROADir parameter setting see figure 272 U 3U0 Ipickup Operate region I 3Io mta line RCADir ROADir en05000252 vsd IEC05000252 V1 EN Figure 272 I U directional operating principle for CVGAPC func...

Page 587: ...tion of the current It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will re set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit Voltage restraint control feature The overcurrent protection step operation can be ma...

Page 588: ...OC1 VDepFact_OC1 StartCurr_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1 en05000323 vsd IEC05000323 V1 EN Figure 275 Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude variations of the measured voltage It shall be noted that this feature will as well affect the p...

Page 589: ...time delay or inverse IDMT time delay in accordance with the end user setting If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting 11 1 7 4 Built in undercurrent protection steps Two undercurrent protection steps are...

Page 590: ... steps Two undervoltage protection steps are available They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity see table 333 with the set pickup level The undervoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level The start signal will start defin...

Page 591: ... Undervoltage U Maximum generator Phase to Phase voltage 70 10 0 s Overvoltage U Maximum generator Phase to Phase voltage 85 1 0 s Overcurrent I Maximum generator Phase current 50 0 05 s In normal operation the overvoltage trip signal is activated and the undervotage trip signal is deactivated This means that the overcurrent function is blocked When the generator is taken out of service the genera...

Page 592: ...ogic diagram The simplified internal logics for CVGAPC function are shown in the following figures ADM A D conversion scaling with CT ratio A D conversion scaling with CT ratio Phasor calculation of individual currents Phasor calculation of individual voltages CVGAPC function IED Phasors samples Phasors samples Current and voltage selection settings Selection of which current and voltage shall be ...

Page 593: ...by the pre processing modules 3 Sequence currents voltages from one three phase current and one three phase voltage input calculated by the pre processing modules The multipurpose protection function 1 Selects one current from the three phase input system see table 332 for internally measured current 2 Selects one voltage from the three phase input system see table 333 for internally measured volt...

Page 594: ...ROC1 OC1 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control restraint OC2 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control restraint DIROC2 DIROC1 2nd Harmonic restraint 2nd Harmonic restraint VOLTAGE IEC05000170 V1 EN Figure 279 CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built in protection elements Section 11 1MRK502052 UEN B Multipurpose protection 588 Te...

Page 595: ...available from multipurpose function as well AND Selected voltage X StartCurr_OC1 a b a b Voltage control or restraint feature OC1 On BLKOC1 Directionality check Current Restraint Feature Imeasured k Irestraint DIR_OK Inverse DEF DEF time selected Inverse time selected OR Enable second harmonic IEC05000831 2 en vsdx STOC1 TROC1 AND BLKTROC1 Selected restrain current AND Second harmonic check a b a...

Page 596: ...step that is UC1 step UC2 has the same internal logic a b a b Selected voltage StartVolt_OV1 Operation_OV1 On BLKOV1 Inverse time selected en05000751 vsd Inverse DEF DEF time selected STOV1 TROV1 AND BLKTROV1 AND OR IEC05000751 V1 EN Figure 282 Simplified internal logic diagram for built in first overvoltage step OV1 step OV2 has the same internal logic Section 11 1MRK502052 UEN B Multipurpose pro...

Page 597: ...ring voltage input phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3 ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1 phase2 phase2 phase3 phase3 phase1 MaxPh Ph MinPh Ph UnbalancePh Ph Start overcurrent step 1 2 2 5000 of IBase 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Start undercurrent step 1 2 2 150 of IBase 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Independent time delay overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset step 1 2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 o...

Page 598: ...se 0 5 of Ur at U Ur 0 5 of U at U Ur Start undervoltage step 1 2 2 0 150 0 of UBase 0 5 of Ur at U Ur 0 5 of U at U Ur Independent time delay overvoltage at 0 8 to 1 2 x Uset step 1 2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay undervoltage at 1 2 to 0 8 x Uset step 1 2 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Overvoltage Start time at 0 8 to 1 2 x Uset Min 15 ...

Page 599: ...o overcurrent 95 Reset ratio undercurrent 105 Reset ratio overvoltage 95 Reset ratio undervoltage 105 Overcurrent Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically Undercurrent Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically Overvoltage Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 8 to 1 2 x Uset Impulse margin time ...

Page 600: ...594 ...

Page 601: ...s the standard pre processing function block SMAI However the main difference is that it can be used to extract any frequency component from the input signal Thus it can for example be used to build sub synchronous resonance protection for synchronous generator 12 1 3 Function block SMAIHPAC BLOCK G3P AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 IEC13000180 1 en vsd IEC13000180 V1 EN 12 1 4 Signals Table 338 SMAIHPAC Inp...

Page 602: ...analogue input signals into this filter i e three phases and the residual quantity the input samples from the TRM module which are coming at rate of 20 samples per fundamental system cycle are first stored When enough samples are available in the internal memory the phasor values at set frequency defined by the setting parameter SetFrequency are calculated The following values are internally avail...

Page 603: ...e setting parameters ConnectionType is provided It defines what quantities i e individual phases or phase to phase quantities are physically connected to the IED analogue inputs by wiring Then the IED knows which one of them are the measured quantities and the other one is then internally calculated This setting is only important for the VT inputs because the CTs are typically star connected all t...

Page 604: ...th Used No of samples for calculation fixed independent from rated frequency Corresponding length of the input waveform in miliseconds for 50Hz power system Corresponding length of the input waveform in miliseconds for 60Hz power system 0 1 s 128 27 128 ms 107 ms 0 2 s 256 28 256 ms 213 ms 0 5 s 512 29 512 ms 427 ms 1 0 s 1024 210 1024 ms 853 ms 2 0 s 2048 211 2048 ms 1707 ms 4 0 s 4096 212 4096 m...

Page 605: ...ch application Note that in case when no clear magnitude peak exist in the set pass frequency band the filter will return zero values for the phasor magnitude and angle while the signal frequency will have value minus one Finally the set value for parameter FilterLength also defines the response time of the filter after a step change of the measured signal The filter will correctly estimate the ne...

Page 606: ...th 12 1 7 Filter calculation example In the following Figure an example from an installation of this filter on a large 50 Hz turbo generator with a rating in excess of 1000 MVA is presented In this installation filter is used to measure the stator sub synchronous resonance currents For this particular installation the following settings were used for the filter SetFrequency 31 0 Hz FilterLength 1 ...

Page 607: ...ision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor magnitude and frequency of the extracted stator sub synchronous current component The following can be observed in the Figure The stator total RMS current value is around 33 kA primary The measured magnitude of the sub synchronous current is around 173 A primary that is 0 5 of the fundamental 50 Hz component The frequency of this sub synchrono...

Page 608: ...602 ...

Page 609: ...rcuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will stress the secondary circuit Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit an...

Page 610: ...ial level in of IBase Table 346 CCSSPVC Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Ip Block 20 500 IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase current in of IBase Table 347 CCSSPVC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 13 1 6 Operation principle Current circuit s...

Page 611: ...ore than 150 ms an ALARM will be issued In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND gate resets This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element s operate for example during a fault å IL1 IL2 IL3 Iref å å I IMinOp å x 0 8 AND BLOCK 1 5 x Ir 10 ms OPERATION 100 ms 1 s 150 ms 20 ms I Ip Block en05000463 tif FAIL ALARM IL1 IL...

Page 612: ...tion Range or value Accuracy Operate current 10 200 of IBase 10 0 of Ir at I Ir 10 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio Operate current 90 Block current 20 500 of IBase 5 0 of Ir at I Ir 5 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio Block current 90 at 50 500 of IBase 13 2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC 13 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device numb...

Page 613: ...tection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance earthed networks It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in order to take into account the particular earthing of the network A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision funct...

Page 614: ...al start of function 3PH BOOLEAN Three phase start of function DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases STDI BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in current STDIL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current phase L1 STDIL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current phase L2 STDIL3 BOOLEAN Start signal of sud...

Page 615: ...function Off On DU 1 100 UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase voltage in of UBase DI 1 100 IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase current in of IBase UPh 1 100 UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in of UBase IPh 1 100 IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in of IBase SealIn Off On On Seal in functionality Off On USealln 1 100 UB 1 70 Operate level of seal in phase voltage in of UBase IDL...

Page 616: ...nt 3I2 the negative sequence voltage 3U2 The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0 and 3I0 3U2 and 3I2 The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0 and the measured zero sequence current is below the set value 3I0 The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measure...

Page 617: ... is not present The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off The IED is in TEST status TEST ACTIVE is high and the function has been blocked from the HMI BlockFUSE Yes The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software c...

Page 618: ...function of the distance protection If DISCPOS 0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the DISCPOS 1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions undervoltage protection energizing check and so on except for the impedance protection The func...

Page 619: ...FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as the voltages of three phases are lower then the setting Uph In addition to fuse failure detection two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also generated by the delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm The internal signals DelatU and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage or respectively current is detected The detection o...

Page 620: ... a b AND AND OR OR AND a b a b UL3 IL3 a b a b AND AND OR OR AND AND FuseFailDetDUDI DUDI Detection DeltaIL1 DeltaUL1 DeltaIL2 DeltaUL2 DeltaIL3 DeltaUL3 IEC12000166 3 en vsd IL1 DI detection based on sample analysis DU detection based on sample analysis UL2 IL2 IL3 IL3 IL2 IL1 IL2 IL3 OR IEC12000166 V3 EN Figure 290 Simplified logic diagram for the DU DI detection part Section 13 1MRK502052 UEN B...

Page 621: ...onding output signals 13 2 7 3 Dead line detection A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 292 A dead phase condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting values UDLD and IDLD If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated If all three phases are co...

Page 622: ...ent operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms The different operation modes are Off The negative and zero sequence function is switched off UNsINs Negative sequence is selected UZsIZs Zero sequence is selected UZsIZs OR UNsINs Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in parallel OR condition for operation UZsIZs AND UNsINs Both negative and zero sequence are...

Page 623: ...ditions that were present before the shut down All phase voltages must be restored above USealIn before fuse failure is de activated and resets the signals BLKU BLKZ and 3PH The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the setting USealIn for more than 60 seconds the zero or negative sequence voltage has been above the set value 3U0 and 3U2 for more than 5 secon...

Page 624: ...ilDetNegSeq OR AND AND CurrZeroSeq CurrNegSeq a b a b OR AND AND AND FuseFailDetDUDI AND OpDUDI On DeadLineDet1Ph OR OR OR OR AND VoltZeroSeq VoltNegSeq t 5 s AllCurrLow t 150 ms intBlock Fuse failure detection Main logic BLKTRIP AND t 100 ms OR t 20 ms OR IEC10000033 2 en vsd OR FusefailStarted IEC10000033 V2 EN Figure 293 Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function Main logic ...

Page 625: ... 1 to 0 x Ur Min 10 ms Max 25 ms Reset time start 1 ph at 0 to 1 x Ur Min 15 ms Max 30 ms 13 3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC 13 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60 13 3 2 Functionality Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of measured...

Page 626: ...ignals Name Type Default Description U3P1 GROUP SIGNAL Main fuse voltage U3P2 GROUP SIGNAL Pilot fuse voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function Table 356 VDSPVC Output signals Name Type Description MAINFUF BOOLEAN Block of main fuse failure PILOTFUF BOOLEAN Alarm of pilot fuse failure U1L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L1 U1L2FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L...

Page 627: ...9 VDSPVC Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ConTypeMain Ph N Ph Ph Ph N Selection of connection type for main fuse group ConTypePilot Ph N Ph Ph Ph N Selection of connection type for pilot fuse group 13 3 6 Monitored data Table 360 VDSPVC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description UL1DIF_A REAL kV Differential voltage phase L1 for alarm function...

Page 628: ...r vPilotL2 vMainL2 or vPilotL3 vMainL3 and the voltage difference exceeds the operation level Ud PilotAlarm an alarm signal will be initiated to indicate the pilot fuse failure and also the faulty phase where the voltage reduction occurred When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds the blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditi...

Page 629: ... to 0 x Ur Min 5 ms Max 15 ms Reset time block of main fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Operate value alarm for pilot fuse failure 10 0 80 0 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Reset ratio 110 Operate time alarm for pilot fuse failure at 1 to 0 x Ur Min 5 ms Max 15 ms Reset time alarm for pilot fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min 15 ms Max 30 ms 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 13 Secondary system supervision 6...

Page 630: ...624 ...

Page 631: ...ng can be done safely SESRSYN function includes a built in voltage selection scheme for double bus and 1 breaker or ring busbar arrangements Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have different settings For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlle...

Page 632: ...LINE MODEAEN MODEMEN IEC10000046 1 en vsd IEC10000046 V1 EN Figure 296 SESRSYN function block 14 1 4 Signals Table 362 SESRSYN Input signals Name Type Default Description U3PBB1 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1 busbar 1 U3PBB2 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1 busbar 2 U3PLN1 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1 line...

Page 633: ...transformer OK ULN1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure ULN2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK ULN2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of...

Page 634: ...FFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing UDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p u of set voltage base value FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency PHDIFFME...

Page 635: ... UBaseBus UHighLineSC 50 0 120 0 UBL 1 0 80 0 Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in of UBaseLine UDiffSC 0 02 0 50 pu 0 01 0 15 Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck in p u of set voltage base value FreqDiffA 0 003 1 000 Hz 0 001 0 010 Frequency difference limit between bus and line Auto FreqDiffM 0 003 1 000 Hz 0 001 0 010 Frequency difference limit between bus and line Manual PhaseDiff...

Page 636: ...L1 Phase L2 Phase L3 Phase L1L2 Phase L2L3 Phase L3L1 Positive sequence Phase L1 Select phase for busbar1 GblBaseSelBus 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups Bus GblBaseSelLine 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups Line SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3 Phase L1L2 Phase L2L3 Phase L3L1 Positive sequence Phase L1 Select phase for busbar2 SelPhaseLine1 P...

Page 637: ...and low threshold detectors The output is given only when the actual measured quantities match the set conditions The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker from the measured slip frequency The output is given only when all measured conditions are simultaneously within ...

Page 638: ...ltage values with the set values for UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiffA FreqDiffM PhaseDiffA PhaseDiffM and UDiffSC If additional phase angle adjustment is done with the PhaseShift setting the adjustment factor is deducted from the line vol...

Page 639: ...suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller than 5 degrees OperationSC On TSTSC TSTAUTSY AUTOSYOK PHDIFFME INADVCLS UDIFFME PHDIFFA FRDIFFA UOKSC UDIFFSC OR t 0 60 s AND AND AND AND AND AND t 50 ms UHighLineSC UHighBusSC UDiffSC phaseAngleDifferenceValue frequencyDifferenceValue voltageDifferenceValue 1 1 1 AND tSCA PhaseDiffA FreqDiffA Note Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck ...

Page 640: ...he maximum and minimum frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time There is a phase angle release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function resets The function will also reset if the synch...

Page 641: ...is is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg for line energizing The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than 5Hz The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic functions respectively...

Page 642: ...tive block of the Energizing check function TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output fBus and fLine 5 Hz ManEnerg OR AND OR t tManEnerg AND AND UMaxEnerg MANENOK TSTENOK selectedFuseOK OR BLOCK BLKENERG TSTENERG IEC14000031 1 en vsd OR manEnergOpenBays ManEnergDBDL AND UHighBusEnerg ULowLineEnerg AND ULowBusEnerg UHighLineEn...

Page 643: ...ENERG DLLB DBLL IEC14000030 1 en vsd BOTH IEC14000030 V1 EN Figure 300 Automatic energizing ManEnerg CBConfig AND AND AND AND AND AND B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN LN1QOPEN LN2QOPEN B2QCLD OR OR OR OR BLKENERG BLOCK AND AND AND 1 bus CB 1 bus alt CB Tie CB OR AND manEnergOpenBays IEC14000032 1 en vsd IEC14000032 V1 EN Figure 301 Open bays 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 637 Technical manual ...

Page 644: ...election type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig If No voltage sel is set the voltages used will be U Line1 and U Bus1 This setting is also used in the case when external voltage selection is provided Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must also be connected The voltage selection function selected voltages and fuse conditions are used for the Synchronizing Synchrocheck and Ene...

Page 645: ... shown in figure 302 AND AND AND bus1Voltage OR OR OR ULN1FF ULN1OK UB1FF UB1OK UB2FF UB2OK B2QCLD B2QOPEN B1QCLD B1QOPEN BLOCK bus2Voltage AND 1 B2SEL B1SEL AND AND AND USELFAIL en05000779 2 vsd OR invalidSelection busVoltage selectedFuseOK IEC05000779 V2 EN Figure 302 Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars Voltage selection for a 1 1 2 ci...

Page 646: ...nnected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage Four different output combinations are possible bus to bus bus to line line to bus and line to line The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker is closed The lin...

Page 647: ...CLD LN2QOPEN AND AND LN2SEL OR AND B2SEL AND AND AND en05000780 2 vsd OR OR line2Voltage bus2Voltage line1Voltage invalidSelection lineVoltage selectedFuseOK IEC05000780 V2 EN Figure 303 Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1 2 breaker arrangement 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 641 Technical manual ...

Page 648: ...tage AND AND AND B2QCLD B2QOPEN LN2QCLD LN2QOPEN bus2Voltage LN2SEL AND AND 1 B2SEL line2Voltage OR en05000781 2 vsd OR OR busVoltage invalidSelection lineVoltage selectedFuseOK IEC05000781 V2 EN Figure 304 Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1 2 breaker arrangement Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B Control 642 Technical manual ...

Page 649: ...Frequency difference minimum limit for synchronizing 0 003 0 250 Hz 2 5 mHz Frequency difference maximum limit for synchronizing 0 050 0 500 Hz 2 5 mHz Maximum allowed frequency rate of change 0 000 0 500 Hz s 10 0 mHz s Breaker closing pulse duration 0 050 60 000 s 0 2 or 15 ms whichever is greater tMaxSynch which resets synchronizing function if no close has been made before set time 0 000 6000 ...

Page 650: ...ng hard wired binary inputs outputs The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the system at any given time 14 2 2 Operation principle The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station ...

Page 651: ...l module External release to add special conditions for release Line voltage to block operation of line earthing switch Output signals to release the HV apparatus The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in figure 305 Interlocking modules in other bays Interlocking module SCILO SCSWI Apparatus control modules SXCBR SCILO SCSWI SXSWI Apparatus control ...

Page 652: ... with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are located not with reference to switches on the other side of the line So a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules If there is no line voltage supervision within the bay then the appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage and the operator must consider this when operating Earthing switches can only be opera...

Page 653: ...tomer specific requirements by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600 The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the transfer of information from other bays Required signals with designations ending in TR are intended for transfer t...

Page 654: ...eration at open or interm or bad pos is enabled 14 2 3 5 Logic diagram The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled That means also if the switch has a defined end position for example open then the appropriate enable signal in this case EN_OPEN is false The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same ti...

Page 655: ...cription IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES 3 14 2 4 2 Functionality The interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES function is used for one busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 309 QC en04000504 vsd IEC04000504 V1 EN Figure 309 Switchyard layout BB_ES 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14...

Page 656: ...L BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part Table 372 BB_ES Output signals Name Type Description QCREL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is allowed QCITL BOOLEAN Switching of Q...

Page 657: ...cking for bus section breaker A1A2_BS function is used for one bus section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 311 The function can be used for different busbars which includes a bus section circuit breaker QA1 WA1 A1 QB2 QC4 QB1 QC3 WA2 A2 en04000516 vsd QC2 QC1 A1A2_BS IEC04000516 V1 EN Figure 311 Switchyard layout A1A2_BS 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 651 Technical...

Page 658: ...R_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 EXDU_ES QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPS1S2TR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR IEC05000348 V2 EN Figure 312 A1A2_BS function block Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B Control 652 Technical manual ...

Page 659: ...L VPS2QC2 VPS1QC1 VPQC4 VPQC3 VPQB2 VPQB1 VPQA1 A1A2_BS 1 VPQB1 QB1_OP QA1O_EX1 VPQB2 QB2_OP QA1O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 QA1O_EX3 1 QA1CLITL QA1CLREL VPQB1 VPQB2 1 1 QB1ITL QB1REL VPQA1 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS1QC1 QA1_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP S1QC1_OP VPQC3 VPS1QC1 QC3_CL S1QC1_CL EXDU_ES EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 IEC04000542 V1 EN 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 653 Technical manual ...

Page 660: ...is in open position QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on...

Page 661: ...ng of QA1 is forbidden QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus s...

Page 662: ... A1A2_DC function can be used for different busbars which includes a bus section disconnector WA1 A1 WA2 A2 QB QC1 QC2 A1A2_DC en04000492 vsd IEC04000492 V1 EN Figure 313 Switchyard layout A1A2_DC 14 2 6 3 Function block IEC05000349 2 en vsd A1A2_DC QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBCL_EX1 QBCL_EX2 QBOP_EX1 QBOP_EX2 QBOP_EX3 QBOPREL Q...

Page 663: ...U_ES EXDU_BB QBOP_EX2 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 S1QC1_CL S2QC2_CL EXDU_ES QBOP_EX3 A1A2_DC IEC04000544 V1 EN IEC04000545 V1 EN 14 2 6 5 Signals Table 375 A1A2_DC Input signals Name Type Default Description QB_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB is in open position QB_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB is in closed position S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position Ta...

Page 664: ...for section disconnector QB QBOP_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector QB QBOP_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector QB QBOP_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector QB Table 376 A1A2_DC Output signals Name Type Description QBOPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is allowed QBOPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is forbidden QBCLREL BOOLEAN Clos...

Page 665: ...ngement according to figure 315 The function can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 WA1 A WA2 B WA7 C QB7 QB20 QC2 en04000514 vsd IEC04000514 V1 EN Figure 315 Switchyard layout ABC_BC 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 659 Technical manual ...

Page 666: ...EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB20_EX1 QB20_EX2 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QB20REL QB20ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB220OTR QB220CTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPQB1TR VQB220TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR IEC05000350 V2 EN...

Page 667: ... VPQB20 1 QA1OPITL QA1OPREL QA1CLREL 1 QA1CLITL en04000533 vsd 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QB7_CL VPQC71 VPQC21 VPQC11 VPQC2 VPQC1 VPQB2 VPQB7 VPQB20 VPQB1 VPQA1 ABC_BC 1 IEC04000533 V1 EN VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQB2 VPQC2 QA1_OP VPQC11 QB2_OP QC2_OP VPQB2 QB1_EX1 QC1_OP EXDU_ES QC11_OP VP_BC_12 EXDU_BC VPQC1 QB1_EX2 VPQC11 BC_12_CL QB2_CL QC1_CL QB1_EX3 EXDU_ES QC11_CL 1 QB1ITL en04000534 vsd 1 QB1REL IEC04000534 ...

Page 668: ...EL IEC04000535 V1 EN VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQB20 VPQC2 QA1_OP VPQC71 QB20_OP QC2_OP VPQC2 QB7_EX1 QC1_OP EXDU_ES QC71_OP VPQC71 EXDU_ES VPQA1 QB7_EX2 VPQB7 QC71_CL QC2_CL VPQC1 QB20_EX1 EXDU_ES QC21_OP QC2_OP QC1_OP QB7_OP QA1_OP VPQC21 VPQC2 VPQC2 VPQC21 EXDU_ES QC21_CL QC2_CL QB20_EX2 QB20REL 1 QB20ITL en04000536 vsd 1 1 QB7REL 1 QB7ITL IEC04000536 V1 EN Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B Control 662 Technical ...

Page 669: ... Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position QB20_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in open...

Page 670: ...om any other bus coupler bay QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1 QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1 QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1 QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1 QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1 QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1 QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 Exter...

Page 671: ...re in open position QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Conn exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 BC17OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7 BC17CLTR BOOLEAN Conn exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7 BC27OPTR BOOLEAN No connection...

Page 672: ...NE_A BH_LINE_B functions are used for lines connected to a 1 1 2 breaker diameter according to figure 317 WA1 A WA2 B QB1 QC1 QA1 QC2 QC9 QB6 QB9 QB2 QC1 QA1 QC2 QC3 QB6 QC3 QB62 QB61 QA1 QC1 QC2 QC9 QB9 BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B BH_CONN en04000513 vsd IEC04000513 V1 EN Figure 317 Switchyard layout 1 1 2 breaker Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are the...

Page 673: ...QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR IEC05000352 2 en vsd IEC05000352 V2 EN Figure 318 BH_LINE_A function block 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 667 Technical...

Page 674: ...EL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR IEC05000353 V2 EN Figure 319 BH_LINE_B function block BH_CONN QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB62REL QB62ITL QC1REL QC1IT...

Page 675: ...N VPQB61 1 QA1CLITL 1 QB62ITL QB62REL VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 2QC3_OP QC2_CL 2QC3_CL QB62_EX2 QB62_EX1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QA1CLREL 1 QB61ITL QB61REL VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP1QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 1QC3_OP QC1_CL 1QC3_CL QB61_EX2 QB61_EX1 VPQC1 VP1QC3 1 VPQB62 1 1 QC1ITL QC1REL 1 QC2ITL QC2REL VPQB61 VPQB62 QB61_OP QB62_OP IEC04000560 V1 EN 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 669 Tech...

Page 676: ...C9_CL VPCQC1 VPCQA1 VPQC3 VPQC2 VPQC1 VPQB9 VPQC9 VPQB6 VPQB1 VPQA1 BH_LINE_A 1 1 CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB61_OP VPCQC2 VPCQB61 1 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2 1 1 QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VPQC11 VPVOLT QC11_OP CQB61_CL VOLT_ON 1 QA1CLITL QA1CLREL VPQB1 VPQB6 VPQB9 IEC04000554 V1 EN Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B Control 670 Technical manual ...

Page 677: ...1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 VPQB1 VPQB6 QB1_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB61 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB61_OP IEC04000555 V1 EN QB9_EX4 CQB61_OP CQA1_OP en04000556 vsd 1 1 QC9ITL QC9REL CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 1 IEC04000556 V1 EN 1M...

Page 678: ...C9_CL VPCQC1 VPCQA1 VPQC3 VPQC2 VPQC1 VPQB9 VPQC9 VPQB6 VPQB2 VPQA1 BH_LINE_B 1 1 CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB62_OP VPCQC2 VPCQB62 1 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2 1 1 QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VPQC21 VPVOLT QC21_OP CQB62_CL VOLT_ON 1 QA1CLITL QA1CLREL VPQB2 VPQB6 VPQB9 IEC04000557 V1 EN Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B Control 672 Technical manual ...

Page 679: ...1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2 VPQB2 VPQB6 QB2_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB62 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB62_OP IEC04000558 V1 EN QB9_EX4 CQB62_OP CQA1_OP en04000559 vsd 1 1 QC9ITL QC9REL CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 1 IEC04000559 V1 EN 1M...

Page 680: ...EAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position CQB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on b...

Page 681: ...QC1 is forbidden QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open ...

Page 682: ...dule BH_CONN is in closed position QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT fuse failure VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT fuse failure EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing switch...

Page 683: ...EAN QB2 is in open position QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid open or closed Table 383 BH_CONN Input signals Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open p...

Page 684: ...OOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden 14 2 9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB 14 2 9 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A 3 Interlocking for double ...

Page 685: ... of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined DB_BUS_A handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and the disconnectors and earthing switches of this section DB_BUS_B handles the circuit breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and earthing switches of this section 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 679 Technical manual ...

Page 686: ... VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QA1CLREL 1 QB61ITL QB61REL VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC2_CL QC3_CL QB61_EX2 QB61_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 1 VPQB1 IEC04000547 V1 EN QB61_OP en04000548 vsd VPQB61 VPQB1 1 QC1REL QC1ITL QB1_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL 1 QC2REL QC2ITL VPQB1 QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR IEC04000548 V1 EN Secti...

Page 687: ... VPQC21 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC21_OP VPQC4 VPQC21 QC4_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QA2CLREL 1 QB62ITL QB62REL VPQA2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC3 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC3_OP QC5_CL QC3_CL QB62_EX2 QB62_EX1 VPQC5 VPQC3 1 VPQB2 IEC04000552 V1 EN QB62_OP en04000553 vsd VPQB62 VPQB2 1 QC4REL QC4ITL QB2_OP QB2_OP QB2_CL 1 QC5REL QC5ITL VPQB2 QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR IEC04000553 V1 EN 1MRK502052 UEN B ...

Page 688: ...9 VPVOLT 1 VPQA1 VPQA2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA1_OP QA2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1 IEC04000549 V1 EN en04000550 vsd 1 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB62 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC9_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX2 VPQA2 VPQB61 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA2_OP QB61_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX3 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB61 VPQB62 QC3_OP QC9_OP QB61_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX4 VP...

Page 689: ...4 2 en vsd DB_BUS_A QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR IEC05000354 V2 EN Figure 322 DB_BUS_A function block 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 683 Technical manual ...

Page 690: ...3REL QC3ITL QC9REL QC9ITL IEC05000356 V2 EN Figure 323 DB_LINE function block IEC05000355 2 en vsd DB_BUS_B QA2_OP QA2_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QA2CLREL QA2CLITL QB62REL QB62ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC4REL QC4ITL QC5REL QC5ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR IEC05000355 V2 EN Figure 324 DB_BUS_B function b...

Page 691: ...ror from bay containing earthing switch QC11 QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61 QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61 QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1 QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1 Table 386 DB_BUS_A Output signals Name Type Description QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 ...

Page 692: ...bay containing earthing switch QC21 QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62 QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62 QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2 QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2 Table 388 DB_BUS_B Output signals Name Type Description QA2CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is allowed QA2CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is forbid...

Page 693: ... 0 QB9 is in closed position QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT fuse failure VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT fuse failure QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus ...

Page 694: ...ne bay ABC_LINE function is used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 325 The function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar arrangement with without transfer busbar QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB9 QC9 WA1 A WA2 B WA7 C QB7 en04000478 vsd IEC04000478 V1 EN Figure 325 Switchyard layout ABC_LINE S...

Page 695: ...ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_ES EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QB7_EX3 QB7_EX4 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB9REL QB9ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR IEC05000357 V2 EN Figure ...

Page 696: ...9ITL QB9REL en04000527 vsd 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QB2_CL VPQC21 VPQC11 VPQC9 VPQC2 VPQC1 VPQB7 VPQB2 VPQB1 VPQB9 VPQA1 ABC_LINE 1 1 QC71_OP QC71_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQC71 VPVOLT 1 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QC2_CL QC9_CL QB9_EX2 1 QA1CLITL QA1CLREL IEC04000527 V1 EN Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B Control 690 Technical manual ...

Page 697: ... VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQB2 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1EX3 en04000528 vsd 1 IEC04000528 V1 EN 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 691 Technical manual ...

Page 698: ...C2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQB1 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3 en04000529 vsd IEC04000529 V1 EN Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B Control 692 Technical manual ...

Page 699: ..._D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_OP BC_27_OP EXDU_BC QB7_EX1 VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 QA1_CL QB1_CL QC9_OP QB9_CL QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_CL EXDU_BC QB7_EX2 QB7REL QB7ITL IEC04000530 V1 EN 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 693 Technical manual ...

Page 700: ...OP BC_27_CL QB7_EX3 EXDU_BC VPQC9 EXDU_BPB VPQC71 QB2_OP QB1_OP VPQB9 VPQB2 VPQB1 QB7_EX4 EXDU_ES QC71_CL QC9_CL QB9_OP VPQB7 QB9_OP QB7_OP VPVOLT VPQB9 VOLT_OFF 1 1 1 QC1ITL QC1REL QC2REL QC2ITL QC9REL 1 QC9ITL en04000531 vsd IEC04000531 V1 EN Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B Control 694 Technical manual ...

Page 701: ...losed position QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position QC9_CL B...

Page 702: ...2 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app between WA1 and WA2 are valid VP_BC_17 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app between WA1 and WA7 are valid VP_BC_27 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app between WA2 and WA7 are valid EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7 EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No...

Page 703: ...OOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position VPQB1T...

Page 704: ...connector between circuit breaker and transformer Otherwise the interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE function can be used This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QC2 WA1 A WA2 B QA2 QC3 T QC4 QB4 QB3 QA2 and QC4 are not used in this interlocking AB_TRAFO en04000515 vsd IEC04000515 V1 EN Figure 327 Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B Control 698...

Page 705: ...L QC21_OP QC21_CL BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_BC QA1_EX1 QA1_EX2 QA1_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB12TR IEC05000358 V2 EN Figure 328 AB_TRAFO function block 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 699 Technical manual ...

Page 706: ...n04000538 vsd 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QC1_CL VPQC21 VPQC11 VPQC3 VPQB4 VPQB3 VPQC2 VPQC1 VPQB2 VPQB1 VPQA1 AB_TRAFO VPQC3 1 IEC04000538 V1 EN VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQB2 VPQC2 VPQC11 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP EXDU_ES QB2_OP QC11_OP QC3_OP QC2_OP QB1_EX1 VP_BC_12 BC_12_CL QC3_OP QB2_CL EXDU_BC VPQC3 VPQB2 VPQC3 VPQC2 VPQC1 QB1_EX2 1 QB1ITL en04000539 vsd 1 QB1REL VPQC11 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX3 IEC...

Page 707: ...CLTR VPQB1TR 1 QB1_OP QB2_OP 1 QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB2 VPQB12TR QB2_CL VPQB2 QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR IEC04000541 V1 EN 14 2 11 5 Signals Table 393 AB_TRAFO Input signals Name Type Default Description QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open ...

Page 708: ...n error from any bus coupler bay QA1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1 QA1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1 QA1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1 QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1 QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1 QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1 QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition ...

Page 709: ...tus of QB1 and QB2 are valid open or closed 14 2 12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL 14 2 12 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Position evaluation POS_EVAL 14 2 12 2 Functionality Position evaluation POS_EVAL function converts the input position data signal POSITION consisting of value time and signal status to binary ...

Page 710: ...als Table 395 POS_EVAL Input signals Name Type Default Description POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality Table 396 POS_EVAL Output signals Name Type Description OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position 14 3 Apparatus control APC 14 3 1 Functionality The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit breakers disconnectors and earthin...

Page 711: ...ed 14 3 2 Operation principle A bay can handle for example a power line a transformer a reactor or a capacitor bank The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation Automation system the object oriented...

Page 712: ...1 also a number of vendor specific causes are used The values are available in the command response to commands from IEC61850 8 1 clients An output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller SCSWI Circuit breaker SXCBR and Circuit switch SXSWI indicates the latest value of the cause during the latest command Table 397 Values for cause signal Cause number Name Description Supported 0 None ...

Page 713: ...o a trip PTRC with ACT general TRUE X 18 Object not selected Control action is rejected because control object was not selected X 19 Object already selected Select action is not executed because the addressed object is already selected X 20 No access authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority X 21 Ended with overshoot Control action executed but the end position has oversh...

Page 714: ...lid position 5 5 5 Position reached 6 6 6 Parameter change in execution 7 7 7 Step limit 8 8 8 Blocked by Mode 9 9 9 Blocked by process 10 10 10 Blocked by interlocking 11 11 11 Blocked by synchrocheck 12 12 12 Command already in execution 13 13 13 Blocked by health 14 14 14 1 of n control 15 15 1 Abortion by cancel 16 16 16 Time limit over 17 17 17 Abortion by trip 18 18 18 Object not selected 19...

Page 715: ... can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay 14 3 4 2 Function block LR_OFF PSTO LR_LOC UPD_BLKD LR_REM CMD_BLKD LR_VALID LOC BL_UPD STA BL_CMD QCBAY REM IEC10000048 2 en vsd IEC10000048 V2 EN Figure 330 QCBAY function block 14 3 4 3 Signals Table 399 QCBAY Input signals Name Type Default Description LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local Remote switch is in Off position LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 E...

Page 716: ...2 standard applied to one bay In IEC61850 edition 1 the functionality is not described by the LLN0 node or any other node therefore the Bay control function is represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1 Local panel switch The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection The switch connected to this function can have three positions remote local off The positions...

Page 717: ...ion is in Remote state the PSTO value is set to 2 Station or Remote that is it is permitted to operate from both station and remote level without any priority Table 402 PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions Local panel switch positions PSTO value AllPSTOValid setting parameter RemoteInc Station setting parameter LocSta CtlVal command Possible locations that shall be able to operat...

Page 718: ...On The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600 14 3 5 Local Remote switch LOCREM The signals from the local HMI or from an external local remote switch are connected via the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY function block The parameter ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or...

Page 719: ...ut channel 4 PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5 PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6 PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7 PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8 PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9 PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10 PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11 PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 12 Table 406 LOCREMCTRL Output signals Name Type Description HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask out...

Page 720: ...ControlMode Internal LR switch External LR switch Internal LR switch Control mode for internal external LR switch 14 3 5 4 Operation principle The function block Local remote LOCREM handles the signals coming from the local remote switch The connections are seen in Figure 333 where the inputs on function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used When the local HMI i...

Page 721: ...ontains control functions for several bays the local remote position can be different for the included bays When the local HMI is used the position of the local remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented on the local HMI The function block Local remote control LOCREMCTRL controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local remote position to ...

Page 722: ...I Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal f...

Page 723: ...OOLEAN The positions for poles L1 L3 are not equal after a set time CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position XOUT BOOLEAN Execution information to XCBR XSWI AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands as e g for load shedding for opening respectively closing to the SCSWI ...

Page 724: ...Intermediate InterlockChk Sel Op phase Op phase Sel Op phase Selection if interlock check should be done in select phase 14 3 6 5 Operation principle The Switch controller SCSWI is provided with verification checks for the select execute sequence that is checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are fulfilled The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking re...

Page 725: ...e position differ between the one phase switches following principles will be applied All switches in open position switch control position open All switches in close position switch control position close One switch open two switches close or inversely switch control position intermediate Any switch in intermediate position switch control position intermediate Any switch in bad state switch contr...

Page 726: ...r place is not evaluated thus also accepted when the operator place selector is set to Faulty or Off Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions The Switch controller SCSWI works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the synchronizing function SESRSYN It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI The result from the synchro...

Page 727: ...tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command signal that is the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the object to operate select tSelect timer execute command t1 t1 tSelect then long operation time in cause is set en05000092 vsd IEC05000092 V1 EN Figure 336 tSelect The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum...

Page 728: ...1 tExecutionFB timer cmd termination L1 cmd termination L2 cmd termination L3 cmd termination position open close The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample APCtExecutionFB IEC0 5000094 2 en Original vsd IEC05000094 V2 EN Figure 338 tExecutionFB The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true If S...

Page 729: ...e of Circuit breaker SXCBR is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations that is pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position 14 3 7 2 Function block IEC05000338 3 en vsd SXCBR BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE CBOPCAP TR...

Page 730: ... the operation counter EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI Table 412 SXCBR Output signals Name Type Description XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for CB EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction OP_BLKD BOOLEAN In...

Page 731: ...ecution command In case of erroneous conditions the function indicates an appropriate cause value see Table 397 SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place The value is reset from local HMI a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals SPC8...

Page 732: ...s are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible The above blocking outputs are stored in a non volatile memory Substitution The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality of the switch The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous for some reason SXCBR will then use the m...

Page 733: ...XE_CL tStartMove timer OPENPOS CLOSEPOS tIntermediate timer t1 t2 tStartMove tIntermediate if t1 tStartMove then switch not start moving attribute in cause is set if t2 tIntermediate then persisting intermediate state attribute in cause is set Close pulse duration AdaptivePulse TRUE en05000097 vsd IEC05000097 V1 EN Figure 342 The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate The timers tOpenPulse and tClose...

Page 734: ...elling the activating function that the command is completed There is one exception from the first item above If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed position and a close command is executed In these cases with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true the execute output pulse is always ac...

Page 735: ...e control operations that is pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position 14 3 8 2 Function block BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN SXSWI BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE SWOPCAP RS_CNT EEH_WARN EEH_ALM XIN XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_V...

Page 736: ...Warning from external equipment EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI Table 415 SXSWI Output signals Name Type Description XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for DIS EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for...

Page 737: ...t time supervision conditions Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed SXSWI performs the execution command In case of erroneous conditions the function indicates an appropriate cause value see Table 397 SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place The value is reset from a binary input or rem...

Page 738: ...ands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible The above blocking outputs are stored in a non volatile memory Substitution The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of the switch The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because the real process value is erroneous of some reason SXSWI will then use the manu...

Page 739: ...CL tStartMove timer OPENPOS CLOSEPOS tIntermediate timer t1 t2 tStartMove tIntermediate if t1 tStartMove then switch not start moving attribute in cause is set if t2 tIntermediate then persisting intermediate state attribute in cause is set Close pulse duration AdaptivePulse TRUE en05000097 vsd IEC05000097 V1 EN Figure 347 The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePul...

Page 740: ...se before telling the activating function that the command is completed There is one exception from the first item above If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed In these cases with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true the execute output pulse is...

Page 741: ...ransfer interlocking information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay switchyard part or complete substation 14 3 9 2 Function block IEC05000340 2 en vsd QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DATA RES_GRT1 RES_GRT2 RES_GRT3 RES_GRT4 RES_GRT5 RES_GRT6 RES_GRT7 RES_GRT8 RES_BAYS ACK_TO_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT IEC...

Page 742: ...reservation RES_DATA INTEGER 0 Reservation data coming from function block ResIn Table 418 QCRSV Output signals Name Type Description RES_GRT1 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app 1 is allowed to operate RES_GRT2 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app 2 is allowed to operate RES_GRT3 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app 3 is allowed to operate RES_GRT4 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the ap...

Page 743: ...unction starts to operate in two ways It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay It is only possible to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input signal RES_RQx x 1 8 coming from switch controller SCWI The signals for request from another bay are the outpu...

Page 744: ...to input RES_DATA in QCRSV If the bay is not reserved the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay If the bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent Blocking and overriding of reservation If QCRSV function is blocked input BLK_RES is set to true the reservation is blocked That is no reservation can be made ...

Page 745: ...D EXCH_OUT 1 1 1 RESERVED ACK_TO_B RES_BAYS IEC05000088_2_en vsd IEC05000088 V2 EN Figure 351 Connection of two QCRSV function blocks 14 3 10 Reservation input RESIN 14 3 10 1 Functionality The Reservation input RESIN function receives the reservation information from other bays The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays up to 60 instances are available 14 3 10 2 Function b...

Page 746: ...q from this bay ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow the reserv req from this bay VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv and acknow signals from other bays are valid RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks Table 422 RESIN2 Input signals Name Type...

Page 747: ...ngs basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FutureUse Bay in use Bay future use Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future use Table 425 RESIN2 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FutureUse Bay in use Bay future use Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future use 14 3 10 5 Operation principle The reservation input RESIN functi...

Page 748: ...gure 355 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the current bay There is one RESIN function block per other bay used in the reservation mechanism The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions are connected to the module bay reserve QCRSV that handles the reservation function in the own bay Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B Control 742 Technical manual ...

Page 749: ... changer control and supervision 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC 84 Tap changer control and supervision 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC 84 14 4 2 Functionality Tap changer control and supervision 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC as well as Tap changer control and supervision 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are is used for control of power transformers with a on load tap changer The functions provide automatic regulation of the ...

Page 750: ... gives the tap commands to the tap changer and supervises that commands are carried through correctly It has built in extensive possibilities for tap changer position measurement as well as supervisory and monitoring features This is used in the voltage control and can also give information about tap position to the transformer differential protection 14 4 3 1 Operation principle Reading of tap ch...

Page 751: ... even parity check of the input binary signal Whether the parity check shall be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity The input BIERR on TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC can be used as supervisory input for indication of any external error Binary Input Module in the system for reading of tap changer position Likewise the input OUTERR can be used as a supervisory of the Binary Input Module The ...

Page 752: ...D and Gray conversion IEC06000522 V1 EN The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from decimal numbers to Gray code is given below Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B Control 746 Technical manual ...

Page 753: ...gnal Any of the six inputs on the mA card MIM can be used for the purpose of tap changer position reading connected to the Tap changer control and supervision 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 14 Control 747 Technical manual ...

Page 754: ... changer positions N is defined by the setting parameters LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap which define the tap position for lowest voltage and highest voltage respectively 14 4 4 Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC The two function blocks Automatic voltage control for tap changer single control TR1ATCC and parallel control TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and supervision 6 binary...

Page 755: ...OUT B27 B3 B14 B2 B26 B6 B11 B13 B22 B5 B1 B10 PARITY B21 B24 B20 B9 B17 B16 B8 B25 BIERR B15 B4 B18 B19 B7 B12 B29 B30 B31 B28 B32 B23 MA T7PG T6PG T5PG T4PG T3PG T8PG Rmk In case of parallel control this signal shall also be connected to HORIZx input of the parallel transformer TR8ATCC function block TCLYLTC TR8ATCC IEC06000507_2_en vsd IEC06000507 V2 EN Figure 356 Connection between TR8ATCC and...

Page 756: ...k commands in one direction because the tap changer has reached an end position or Alarm Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error UVBl Alarm Block tap changer operation because the busbar voltage is below Ublock UVPartBl Alarm Block lower commands because the busbar voltage is between Umin and Ublock Table 430 Analog signal ATCCOUT YLTCIN Signal Description currAver Value of curren...

Page 757: ...is output shall be connected to the input ATCCIN and it contains 10 binary signals and 4 integer signals Table 433 Binary signals YLTCOUT ATCCIN Signal Description tapInOperation Tap changer in operation changing tap position direction Direction raise or lower for the most recent tap changer operation tapInHighVoltPos Tap changer in high end position tapInLowVoltPos Tap changer in low end position...

Page 758: ...or highest voltage tapPositionMinVolt Tap position for lowest voltage 14 4 5 Function block IEC07000038_2_en vsd TCMYLTC YLTCIN TCINPROG INERR RESETERR OUTERR RS_CLCNT RS_OPCNT PARITY BIERR B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 MA URAISE ULOWER HIPOSAL LOPOSAL POSERRAL CMDERRAL TCERRAL POSOUT CONVERR NEWPOS HIDIFPOS INVALPOS TCPOS YLTCOUT IEC07000038 V2 EN Figure 357 TCMYLTC function block Section 14 1MRK502052 UEN B...

Page 759: ...ut signals Name Type Default Description YLTCIN GROUP SIGNAL Input group connection for YLTC TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision off the digital output board RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation cou...

Page 760: ...ne or illegal tap position change POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside min and max position CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported 1 sec pulse HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change CNT_VAL INTEGER Number of operations on tap changer TCPOS INTEGER Intege...

Page 761: ...nger for the tap position B16 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 16 from tap changer for the tap position B17 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 17 from tap changer for the tap position B18 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 18 from tap changer for the tap position B19 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 19 from tap changer for the tap position B20 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 20 from tap changer for the tap position B21 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 21 from tap changer for the tap position B22 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 22...

Page 762: ...sition has changed more than one position INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change CNT_VAL INTEGER Number of operations on tap changer TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN Table 439 VCTRRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function Table 440 VCTRRCV Output signals Name...

Page 763: ... 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups Table 443 TCLYLTC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On tTCTimeout 1 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time out tPulseDur 0 5 10 0 s 0 1 1 5 Raise lower command output pulse duration Table 444 TCLYLTC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description L...

Page 764: ...TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position 14 4 9 Operation principle The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks Both are logical nodes in IEC 61850 8 1 Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control TR8ATCC for parallel control Tap changer control and supervision TCMYLTC 6 binary inputs TCLYLTC 32 binary inputs TR1ATCCand TR8ATCC ar...

Page 765: ... Voltage control set voltage 85 0 120 0 of UBase 0 25 of Ur Outer voltage deadband 0 2 9 0 of UBase Inner voltage deadband 0 1 9 0 of UBase Upper limit of busbar voltage 80 180 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Lower limit of busbar voltage 70 120 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Undervoltage block level 50 120 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Time delay long for automatic control commands 3 1000 s 0 2 or 600 ms whichever is greater Time d...

Page 766: ...ter position change before the value is accepted 1 60 s 0 2 or 200 ms whichever is greater Tap changer constant time out 1 120 s 0 2 or 200 ms whichever is greater Raise lower command output pulse duration 0 5 10 0 s 0 2 or 200 ms whichever is greater 14 5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC 14 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification I...

Page 767: ... P04 P05 P06 P07 P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 SWPOSN IEC14000005 1 en vsd IEC14000005 V1 EN Figure 359 SLGAPC function block 14 5 4 Signals Table 448 SLGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary UP command DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary D...

Page 768: ...BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15 P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16 P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17 P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18 P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19 P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20 P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21 P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22 P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23 P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24 P25 ...

Page 769: ... to the present activated output in descending order for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be activated Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed In case of steady signals the output will be active till the time it receives next operation of UP DOWN inputs Also depending on the settings one can...

Page 770: ...th their actual position names as defined by the user max 13 characters if it is used for control the switches will be listed with their actual positions but only the first three letters of the name will be used In both cases the switch full name will be shown but the user has to redefine it when building the Graphical Display Editor under the Caption If used for the control the following sequence...

Page 771: ...l Measurements Events Disturbance records Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language O Select switch Press the I or O key A dialog box appears E The pos will not be modified outputs will not be activated until you press the E button for O K IEC06000421 V2 EN Figure 360 Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI From the single line diagram on local HMI 14 6 Selector mini switc...

Page 772: ...PC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input Table 453 VSGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked POSITION INTEGER Position indication integer POS1 BOOLEAN Positio...

Page 773: ...he output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated with a controllable object otherwise the symbol...

Page 774: ...nctionality Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function block is used to send double indications to other systems equipment or functions in the substation through IEC 61850 8 1 or other communication protocols It is especially used in the interlocking station wide logics 14 7 3 Function block IEC13000081 V1 EN Figure 362 DPGAPC function block 14 7 4 Signals Table 455...

Page 775: ...on 14 8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC 14 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC 14 8 2 Functionality The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a collection of 8 single point commands that can be used for direct commands for e...

Page 776: ...nd output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8 14 8 5 Settings Table 459 SPC8GAPC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On PulseMode1 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 1 tPulse1 0 01 6...

Page 777: ... 8 tPulse8 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Pulse time output 8 14 8 6 Operation principle The PSTO input selects the operator place LOCAL REMOTE or ALL One of the eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected The settings Latchedx and tPulsex where x is the respective output will determine if the signal will be pulsed and how long the pulse is or latched steady BLO...

Page 778: ...BIT1 CMDBIT2 CMDBIT3 CMDBIT4 CMDBIT5 CMDBIT6 CMDBIT7 CMDBIT8 CMDBIT9 CMDBIT10 CMDBIT11 CMDBIT12 CMDBIT13 CMDBIT14 CMDBIT15 CMDBIT16 CMDBIT17 CMDBIT18 CMDBIT19 CMDBIT20 CMDBIT21 CMDBIT22 CMDBIT23 CMDBIT24 CMDBIT25 CMDBIT26 CMDBIT27 CMDBIT28 CMDBIT29 CMDBIT30 CMDBIT31 CMDBIT32 IEC09000925 V1 EN Figure 364 AUTOBITS function block 14 9 4 Signals Table 460 AUTOBITS Input signals Name Type Default Descr...

Page 779: ...Command out bit 16 CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17 CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18 CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19 CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20 CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21 CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22 CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23 CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24 CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25 CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26 CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Comm...

Page 780: ...DLinkTimeout 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 2 000 Data link confirm timeout in s DLinkRetries 0 255 1 3 Data link maximum retries tRxToTxMinDel 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Rx to Tx minimum delay in s ApLayMaxRxSize 20 2048 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment size ApLayMaxTxSize 20 2048 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size StopBits 1 2 1 1 Stop bits Parity No Even Odd Even Parity tRTSWar...

Page 781: ...pLayMaxTxSize 20 2048 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment size Table 468 CH2TCP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off TCP IP UDP Only Off Operation mode TCPIPLisPort 1 65535 1 20000 TCP IP listen port UDPPortAccData 1 65535 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDPPortInitNUL 1 65535 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response...

Page 782: ...Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off TCP IP UDP Only Off Operation mode TCPIPLisPort 1 65535 1 20000 TCP IP listen port UDPPortAccData 1 65535 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDPPortInitNUL 1 65535 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response UDPPortCliMast 0 65535 1 0 UDP port to remote client master Table 473 CH4TCP Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Un...

Page 783: ...t T 2 BinCnt16EvWout T 5 BinCnt32EvWith T 6 BinCnt16EvWith T 1 BinCnt32EvWou tT Object 22 default variation Obj30DefVar 1 AI32Int 2 AI16Int 3 AI32IntWithoutF 4 AI16IntWithoutF 5 AI32FltWithF 6 AI64FltWithF 3 AI32IntWithoutF Object 30 default variation Obj32DefVar 1 AI32IntEvWoutF 2 AI16IntEvWoutF 3 AI32IntEvWithFT 4 AI16IntEvWithFT 5 AI32FltEvWithF 6 AI64FltEvWithF 7 AI32FltEvWithFT 8 AI64FltEvWit...

Page 784: ...event buffer timeout UREvCntThold2 1 100 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold tUREvBufTout2 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout UREvCntThold3 1 100 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold tUREvBufTout3 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout DelOldBufFull No Yes No Delete oldest event...

Page 785: ...ct 3 default variation Obj4DefVar 1 DIChWithoutTim e 2 DIChWithTime 3 DIChWithRelTim e 3 DIChWithRelTim e Object 4 default variation Obj10DefVar 1 BO 2 BOStatus 2 BOStatus Object 10 default variation Obj20DefVar 1 BinCnt32 2 BinCnt16 5 BinCnt32WoutF 6 BinCnt16WoutF 5 BinCnt32WoutF Object 20 default variation Obj22DefVar 1 BinCnt32EvWout T 2 BinCnt16EvWout T 5 BinCnt32EvWith T 6 BinCnt16EvWith T 1 ...

Page 786: ...100 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold tUREvBufTout1 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout UREvCntThold2 1 100 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold tUREvBufTout2 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout UREvCntThold3 1 100 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold...

Page 787: ...s MasterIPNetMsk 0 18 IP Address 1 255 255 255 255 Master IP net mask Obj1DefVar 1 BISingleBit 2 BIWithStatus 1 BISingleBit Object 1 default variation Obj2DefVar 1 BIChWithoutTim e 2 BIChWithTime 3 BIChWithRelTim e 3 BIChWithRelTim e Object 2 default variation Obj3DefVar 1 DIWithoutFlag 2 DIWithFlag 1 DIWithoutFlag Object 3 default variation Obj4DefVar 1 DIChWithoutTim e 2 DIChWithTime 3 DIChWithR...

Page 788: ...ayer confim timeout ApplMultFrgRes No Yes Yes Enable application for multiple fragment response ConfMultFrag No Yes Yes Confirm each multiple fragment UREnable No Yes Yes Unsolicited response enabled UREvClassMask Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1 2 and 3 Off Unsolicited response event class mask UROfflineRetry 0 10 1 5 Unsolicited response retries befor...

Page 789: ... paired point tSelectTimeout 1 0 60 0 s 0 1 30 0 Select timeout tBrokenConTout 0 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout tKeepAliveT 0 3600 s 1 10 Keep Alive timer Table 480 MST3TCP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On SlaveAddress 0 65519 1 1 Slave address MasterAddres 0 65519 1 1 Master address ValMasterAddr No Yes Yes Valida...

Page 790: ...Obj32DefVar 1 AI32IntEvWoutF 2 AI16IntEvWoutF 3 AI32IntEvWithFT 4 AI16IntEvWithFT 5 AI32FltEvWithF 6 AI64FltEvWithF 7 AI32FltEvWithFT 8 AI64FltEvWithFT 1 AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32 default variation Table 481 MST3TCP Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description AddrQueryEnbl No Yes Yes Address query enable tApplConfTout 0 00 300 00 s 0 01 10 00 Application layer confim...

Page 791: ...er timeout DelOldBufFull No Yes No Delete oldest event when buffer is full ExtTimeFormat LocalTime UTC UTC External time format DNPToSetTime No Yes No Allow DNP to set time in IED tSynchTimeout 30 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is generated TSyncReqAfTout No Yes No Time synchronization request after timeout Averag3TimeReq No Yes No Use average of 3 time requests PairedPoint N...

Page 792: ...ault variation Obj22DefVar 1 BinCnt32EvWout T 2 BinCnt16EvWout T 5 BinCnt32EvWith T 6 BinCnt16EvWith T 1 BinCnt32EvWou tT Object 22 default variation Obj30DefVar 1 AI32Int 2 AI16Int 3 AI32IntWithoutF 4 AI16IntWithoutF 5 AI32FltWithF 6 AI64FltWithF 3 AI32IntWithoutF Object 30 default variation Obj32DefVar 1 AI32IntEvWoutF 2 AI16IntEvWoutF 3 AI32IntEvWithFT 4 AI16IntEvWithFT 5 AI32FltEvWithF 6 AI64F...

Page 793: ...olicited response class 2 event count report treshold tUREvBufTout2 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout UREvCntThold3 1 100 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold tUREvBufTout3 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 5 00 Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout DelOldBufFull No Yes No Delete oldest event when buffer is full ExtTimeFormat LocalTime UTC...

Page 794: ...MDBITxx outputs will be set to 0 The BLOCK acts like an overriding the function still receives data from the DNP3 master Upon deactivation of BLOCK all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again momentarily For AUTOBITS the PSTO input determines the operator place The command can be written to the block while in Remote If PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs ...

Page 795: ...UT2 BOOLEAN Single command output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Single command output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Single command output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Single command output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Single command output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Single command output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Single command output 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Single command output 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN Single command output 10 OUT11 BOOLEAN Single command output 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN Single comman...

Page 796: ...racters in PCM600 The output signals can be of the types Off Steady or Pulse This configuration setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block The length of the output pulses are 100 ms In steady mode SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of th...

Page 797: ... fault It provides a settable pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length as well as all functionality necessary for correct co operation with autoreclosing functions The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving faults and breaker lock out 15 1 3 Function block IEC05000707 2 en vsd SMPPTRC BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PS...

Page 798: ...eparate phase selection 1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase selection P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three phase SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function Table 488 SMPPTRC Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal TRL1 BOO...

Page 799: ...pping logic common 3 phase output SMPPTRC is settable tTripMin The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening For three phase tripping logic common 3 phase output SMPPTRC has a single input TRIN through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs are routed It has a ...

Page 800: ...ions within the IED requiring these signals There are also separate output signals indicating single phase two phase or three phase trip These signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser SMBRREC function The expanded SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults A special input is also pr...

Page 801: ...oop TRIN L1TRIP OR OR OR AND AND AND OR OR OR AND OR AND OR AND AND t tWaitForPHS L2TRIP L3TRIP IEC10000056 3 en vsd 1 PTREF 1PTRZ IEC10000056 V3 EN Figure 369 Phase segregated front logic 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 15 Logic 795 Technical manual ...

Page 802: ... TTRIP 150 ms t OR t 2000 ms OR AND OR OR 150 ms t OR t 2000 ms OR AND OR OR AND OR 150 ms t t 2000 ms OR AND OR OR AND AND AND BLOCK IEC10000268 V2 EN Figure 370 Additional logic for the 1ph 3ph operating mode Section 15 1MRK502052 UEN B Logic 796 Technical manual ...

Page 803: ...dx BLOCK tTripMin tEvolvingFault tTripMin tTripMin tEvolvingFault tEvolvingFault IEC05000520 WMF V4 EN Figure 371 Additional logic for the 1ph 2ph 3ph operating mode 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 15 Logic 797 Technical manual ...

Page 804: ...2 or 30 ms whichever is greater 3 pole trip delay 0 020 0 500 s 0 2 or 10 ms whichever is greater Single phase delay two phase delay and evolving fault delay 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 10 ms whichever is greater 15 2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC 15 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC Section 15 1M...

Page 805: ...3 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 IEC13000197 1 en vsd IEC13000197 V1 EN Figure 373 TMAGAPC function block 15 2 4 Signals Table 492 TMAGAPC Input signals Name Ty...

Page 806: ...OOLEAN 0 Binary input 17 INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18 INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19 INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20 INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21 INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22 INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23 INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24 INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25 INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26 INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27 INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28 I...

Page 807: ...6 has logical value 1 the first output signal OUTPUT1 will get logical value 1 2 when any one of second 16 inputs signals INPUT17 to INPUT32 has logical value 1 the second output signal OUTPUT2 will get logical value 1 3 when any one of all 32 input signals INPUT1 to INPUT32 has logical value 1 the third output signal OUTPUT3 will get logical value 1 By use of the settings ModeOutput1 ModeOutput2 ...

Page 808: ...tput contacts in the IED When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker s the pulse time shall be set to at least 0 150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils 15 2 7 Technical data Table 495 Number of TMAGAPC instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms TMAGAPC 6 6 15 3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH 15 3 1 ...

Page 809: ...ription BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9 INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10 INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11 IN...

Page 810: ... logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM signal from the function block When any one of 16 input signals INPUT1 to INPUT16 has logical value 1 the ALARM output signal will get logical value 1 The function has a drop off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady signal ALARM Input 1 Input 16 1 200 ms t IEC13000191 1 en vsd IEC130...

Page 811: ...NPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 WARNING IEC13000182 1 en vsd IEC13000182 V1 EN 15 4 4 Signals Table 500 WRNCALH Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4 INPUT5 BOO...

Page 812: ...ult Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On 15 4 6 Operation principle The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 WARNING output signal The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output WARNING signal from the function block When any one of 16 input signals INPUT1 to INPUT16 ...

Page 813: ...7 2 device number Logic for group indication INDCALH 15 5 2 Functionality The group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication signals to a common indication LED and or contact in the IED 15 5 3 Function block IEC13000183 1 en vsd INDCALH BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 IND IEC13...

Page 814: ...LEAN 0 Binary input 13 INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14 INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15 INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16 Table 505 INDCALH Output signals Name Type Description IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16 15 5 5 Settings Table 506 INDCALH Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On 15 5 6 Operation principle The ...

Page 815: ...at the end of their function name A number of logic blocks and timers are always available as basic for the user to adapt the configuration to the specific application needs The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their features These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension logic package with the same number of instances AND function block Each block has four inpu...

Page 816: ...respectively Each block has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if after a power interruption the flip flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption The SET input has priority TIMERSET function has pick up and drop out delayed outputs related to the input signal The timer has a settable time delay XOR function block Each block has two outputs wh...

Page 817: ...of AND instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms AND 60 60 160 15 6 2 Controllable gate function block GATE The Controllable gate function block GATE is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting 15 6 2 1 Function block IEC04000410 2 en vsd GATE INPUT OUT IEC04000410 V2 EN Figure 377 GATE function block 1...

Page 818: ...Number of GATE instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms GATE 10 10 20 15 6 3 Inverter function block INV 15 6 3 1 Function block IEC04000404_2_en vsd INV INPUT OUT IEC04000404 V2 EN Figure 378 INV function block 15 6 3 2 Signals Table 515 INV Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input Table 516 INV Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Outpu...

Page 819: ... function block 15 6 4 2 Signals Table 518 LLD Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 519 LLD Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle 15 6 4 3 Technical data Table 520 Number of LLD instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms LLD 10 10 20 15 6 5 OR function block The OR function is used t...

Page 820: ... 6 to OR gate Table 522 OR Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate 15 6 5 3 Technical data Table 523 Number of OR instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms OR 60 60 160 15 6 6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER The pulse PULSETIMER function can be used for example for pulse extensions or limiting the op...

Page 821: ...4 Technical data Table 527 Number of PULSETIMER instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms PULSETIMER 10 10 20 0 000 90000 000 s 0 5 10 ms 15 6 7 Reset set with memory function block RSMEMORY The Reset set with memory function block RSMEMORY is a flip flop with memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively Each RSMEMORY function bl...

Page 822: ...T BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset Table 530 RSMEMORY Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal 15 6 7 3 Settings Table 531 RSMEMORY Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Memory Off On On Operating mode of the memory function 15 6 7 4 Technical data Table 532 Number of RSMEMOR...

Page 823: ...SET OUT NOUT 0 0 Last value Inverted last value 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 15 6 8 1 Function block SRMEMORY SET RESET OUT NOUT IEC04000408_2_en vsd IEC04000408 V2 EN Figure 383 SRMEMORY function block 15 6 8 2 Signals Table 534 SRMEMORY Input signals Name Type Default Description SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset Table 535 SRMEMORY Output signals Name Type Descri...

Page 824: ...The timer has a settable time delay It also has an Operation setting On and Off that controls the operation of the timer On Off t tdelay tdelay IEC08000289 2 en vsd Input IEC08000289 V2 EN Figure 384 TIMERSET status diagram 15 6 9 1 Function block IEC04000411 2 en vsd TIMERSET INPUT ON OFF IEC04000411 V2 EN Figure 385 TIMERSET function block 15 6 9 2 Signals Table 538 TIMERSET Input signals Name T...

Page 825: ...ange or Value Accuracy 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms TIMERSET 15 15 30 0 000 90000 000 s 0 5 10 ms 15 6 10 Exclusive OR function block XOR The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables XOR has two inputs and two outputs One of the outputs is inverted The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same Table 542 Truth table ...

Page 826: ...on needs The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their features ANDQT AND function block The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of input signals Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is inverted INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal Single position input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output TIME input is copied to time p...

Page 827: ...emory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the state before the interruption or be reset The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input signal SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively Each block has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if the block af...

Page 828: ...ical data Table 548 Number of ANDQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms ANDQT 20 100 15 7 2 Single point indication related signals combining function block INDCOMBSPQT The value of single point input SP_IN is copied to the value part of the SP_OUT output The TIME input is copied to the time part of the SP_OUT output State input bits are copied to the corresponding stat...

Page 829: ...550 INDCOMBSPQT Output signals Name Type Description SP_OUT BOOLEAN Single point indication 15 7 2 3 Technical data Table 551 Number of INDCOMBSPQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms INDCOMBSPQT 10 10 15 7 3 Single point input signal attributes converting function block INDEXTSPQT The value part of the single point input signal SI_IN is copied to SI_OUT output The time...

Page 830: ...N Single indication TIME GROUP SIGNAL Timestamp of input BLOCKED BOOLEAN Blocked for update SUBST BOOLEAN Substituted INVALID BOOLEAN Invalid value TEST BOOLEAN Testmode 15 7 3 3 Technical data Table 554 Number of INDEXTSPQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms INDEXTSPQT 10 10 15 7 4 Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT Component which sets quality invalid of outputs ...

Page 831: ...TPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16 iec08000169 vsd IEC08000169 V1 EN Figure 390 INVALIDQT function block 15 7 4 2 Signals Table 555 INVALIDQT Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 6...

Page 832: ...Indication output 8 OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Indication output 9 OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Indication output 10 OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Indication output 11 OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Indication output 12 OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Indication output 13 OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Indication output 14 OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Indication output 15 OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Indication output 16 15 7 4 3 Technical data Table 557 Number of INVALIDQT instances Logic block Qu...

Page 833: ...utput signal 15 7 5 3 Technical data Table 560 Number of INVERTERQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms INVERTERQT 20 100 15 7 6 ORQT function block The ORQT function block ORQT is used to form general combinatory expressions OR with boolean variables ORQT function block has up to six inputs and two outputs One of the outputs is inverted It can propagate the quality val...

Page 834: ...nput signal 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6 Table 562 ORQT Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal 15 7 6 3 Technical data Table 563 Number of ORQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms ORQT 20 100 15 7 7 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT The pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT can be used for example ...

Page 835: ...RQT INPUT OUT IEC15000145 vsd IEC15000145 V1 EN Figure 393 PULSETIMERQT function block 15 7 7 2 Signals Table 564 PULSETIMERQT Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 565 PULSETIMERQT Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal 15 7 7 3 Settings Table 566 PULSETIMERQT Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ...

Page 836: ... propagate the quality the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850 Table 568 Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block RESET SET OUT NOUT 0 0 Last value Inverted last value 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 15 7 8 1 Function block RSMEMORYQT SET RESET OUT NOUT IEC14000069 1 en vsd IEC14000069 V1 EN Figure 394 RSMEMORYQT function block 15 7 8 2 Signals Table 569 RSMEMORYQT Input signals Name T...

Page 837: ...k has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if after a power interruption the flip flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption The SET input has priority SRMEMORYQT can propagate the quality the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850 Table 573 Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block SET RESET OUT NOUT 0 0 Last value Inverted la...

Page 838: ...h cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms SRMEMORYQT 10 30 15 7 10 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT The Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT has two outputs for delay of the input signal at pick up and drop out The timer has a settable time delay t It also has an Operation setting On Off that controls the operation of the timer When the output changes value the timestamp of the output signal is up...

Page 839: ...ETQT Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On t 0 000 90000 000 s 0 001 0 000 Delay for settable timer n 15 7 10 4 Technical data Table 581 Number of TIMERSETQT instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms TIMERSETQT 10 30 0 000 90000 000 s 0 5 10 ms 15 7 11 Exclusive OR function block XORQ...

Page 840: ... INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT IEC09000300 1 en vsd IEC09000300 V1 EN Figure 397 XORQT function block 15 7 11 2 Signals Table 583 XORQT Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2 Table 584 XORQT Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal 15 7 11 3 Technical data Table 585 Number of XOR...

Page 841: ...0 XOR 49 15 9 Fixed signals FXDSIGN 15 9 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Fixed signals FXDSIGN 15 9 2 Functionality The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre set fixed signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a certain lev...

Page 842: ... String signal with no characters ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off 15 9 5 Settings The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 15 9 6 Operation principle There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block OFF is a boolean signal fixed to OFF boolean 0 value ON is a boolean si...

Page 843: ... integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary logical signals into an integer 15 10 2 Function block IEC07000128 2 en vsd B16I BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 OUT IEC07000128 V2 EN Figure 399 B16I function block 15 10 3 Signals Table 588 B16I Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN1 BO...

Page 844: ... The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx where 1 x 16 to an integer Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768 This follows the general formula INx 2x 1 where 1 x 16 The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on theoutput OUTasasum oftheintegervaluesofalltheinputsINxthatareactiv...

Page 845: ...096 0 IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0 IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0 IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0 The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx where 1 x 16 are active that is 1 is 65535 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the B16I function block 15 10 7 Technical data Table 591 Number of B16I instances Function Quantity with cycle time...

Page 846: ...IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 OUT IEC13000303 1 en vsd IEC13000303 V1 EN Figure 400 BTIGAPC function block 15 11 4 Signals Table 592 BTIGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 IN8 BOOLEA...

Page 847: ... x 16 The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated OUT is an integer When all INx where 1 x 16 are activated that is Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT The BTIGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station computer for ex...

Page 848: ...ue when activated when all INx where 1 x 16 are active that is 1 is 65535 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block 15 11 8 Technical data Table 595 Number of BTIGAPC instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms BTIGAPC 4 4 8 15 12 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 15 12 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 i...

Page 849: ...on INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input Table 597 IB16 Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14...

Page 850: ...uts OUTx where 1 x 16 The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer on input INP The values of the different OUTx are according to the table below When an OUTx is not activated its value is 0 When all OUTx where 1 x 16 are activated that is Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is connected to input INP The IB16 function is designed for receiving the integer input lo...

Page 851: ...node representation ITBGAPC 15 13 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation ITBGAPC 15 13 2 Functionality Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is used to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and rece...

Page 852: ...ble 599 ITBGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection Table 600 ITBGAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN...

Page 853: ...f the values of all activated OUTx 2x 1 where 1 x 16 will be equal to the integer value received over IEC 61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via IEC 61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of activated outputs OUTx ...

Page 854: ...tor place The integer number that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block while the PSTO is in position Remote If PSTO is in position Off or Local then no changes are applied to the outputs 15 13 7 Technical data Table 602 Number of ITBGAPC instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms ITBGAPC 4 4 8 15 14 Pulse integrator TIGAPC 15 14 1 Identification Functio...

Page 855: ...s basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On tDelay 0 000 600 000 s 0 001 1 000 Time delay to operate tReset 0 000 600 000 s 0 001 1 000 Time delay to reset 15 14 6 Operation principle In the pulse integrator TIGAPC the time during which the input is high is integrated This means there is no output until the sum of the input pulses equals the set ti...

Page 856: ... t t In Integration 1 t int tDelay tReset Out IEC13000174 2 en vsd IEC13000174 V1 EN Figure 405 IN pulse too short for integration to reach the set tDelay 0 0 0 t t t 1 In Integration t int t Delay Out t Reset t Reset tReset IEC13000176 2 en vsd IEC13000176 V1 EN Figure 406 IN pulse too short for integration to reach the set tDelay and tReset resets integration before next pulse can be integrated ...

Page 857: ...of value Accuracy Time integration continuous active 3 0 999999 99 s 0 2 or 20 ms whichever is greater Time integration continuous active 8 0 999999 99 s 0 2 or 50 ms whichever is greater Time integration continuous active 100 0 999999 99 s 0 2 or 250 ms whichever is greater Table 607 Number of TIGAPC instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms TIGAPC 30 15 15 Elapsed time integra...

Page 858: ...0 V2 EN Figure 408 TEIGAPC logics The main features of TEIGAPC Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999 9 seconds Supervision of overflow Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10 milliseconds Retain the integration value Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time Report of the integrated time 15 15 3 Function block TEIGAPC BLOCK IN RESE...

Page 859: ...gs basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On tWarning 1 00 999999 99 s 0 01 600 00 Time limit for warning supervision tAlarm 1 00 999999 99 s 0 01 1200 00 Time limit for alarm supervision 15 15 6 Operation principle The elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC provides time integration accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high b...

Page 860: ...rt RESET Reset of the integration value Consequently all other outputs are also reset unconditionally on the input IN value reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero BLOCK Freeze the integration and block reset the other outputs unconditionally on the signal value BLOCK request overrides RESET request Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression overflow if output ACCTIME 99999...

Page 861: ...s Inprinciple ashorterfunctioncycletime longerintegratedtimelengthormorepulses may lead to reduced accuracy 15 15 6 2 Memory storage The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non volatile memory 15 15 7 Technical data Table 611 TEIGAPC Technical data Function Cycle time ms Range or value Accuracy Elapsed time integration 3 0 999999 9 s 0 2 or 20 ms whichever is greater 8 0 999999 9...

Page 862: ...856 ...

Page 863: ...MSQI I1 I2 I0 SYMBOL VV V1 EN Voltage sequence component measurement VMSQI U1 U2 U0 SYMBOL TT V1 EN Phase neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU U SYMBOL UU V1 EN 16 1 2 Functionality Measurement functions is used for power system measurement supervision and reporting to the local HMI monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example via IEC 61850 The possibility to continuously monitor me...

Page 864: ...duces the impact of noise in the inputs Dead band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting Main menu Measurement Monitoring Service values CVMMXN The measuremen...

Page 865: ... negative sequence amplitude and angle U sequence voltages positive zero and negative sequence amplitude and angle 16 1 3 Function block The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware TRM and the logic configuration made in PCM600 CVMMXN I3P U3P S S_RANGE P_INST P P_RANGE Q_INST Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD U U_RANGE I I_RANGE F F_RANGE IEC10000016 1 en vsd IEC100...

Page 866: ... I1ANGL I2 I2RANG I2ANGL IEC05000703 V2 EN Figure 414 CMSQI function block IEC05000704 2 en vsd VMSQI U3P 3U0 3U0RANG 3U0ANGL U1 U1RANG U1ANGL U2 U2RANG U2ANGL IEC05000704 V2 EN Figure 415 VMSQI function block IEC09000850 1 en vsd VNMMXU U3P UL1 UL1RANG UL1ANGL UL2 UL2RANG UL2ANGL UL3 UL3RANG UL3ANGL IEC09000850 V1 EN Figure 416 VNMMXU function block Section 16 1MRK502052 UEN B Monitoring 860 Tech...

Page 867: ...PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value U_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range Ta...

Page 868: ...L23 REAL UL23 Amplitude magnitude of reported value UL23RANG INTEGER UL23 Amplitude range UL23ANGL REAL UL23 Angle magnitude of reported value UL31 REAL UL31 Amplitude magnitude of reported value UL31RANG INTEGER UL31 Amplitude range UL31ANGL REAL UL31 Angle magnitude of reported value Table 619 CMSQI Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group connection abstract block 3 Ta...

Page 869: ...rted value U2 REAL U2 Amplitude magnitude of reported value U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle magnitude of reported value Table 623 VNMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description U3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage input Table 624 VNMMXU Output signals Name Type Description UL1 REAL UL1 Amplitude magnitude of reported value UL1RANG INTEGER UL1 Amplitude range UL1ANGL...

Page 870: ...e Unit Step Default Description SLowLim 0 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of SBase SLowLowLim 0 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of SBase SMin 0 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of SBase SMax 0 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of SBase SRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type PMin 2000 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 200 0 Minimum value in of SBase PMax 2000 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 20...

Page 871: ... 0 180 0 Deg 0 1 0 0 Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I U k 0 000 1 000 0 001 0 000 Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement U and I Table 626 CVMMXN Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s SZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0 001 of range SHiHiLi...

Page 872: ... 1 000 0 001 1 000 Low Low limit physical value PFLimHyst 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits UDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s UZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0 001 of range UHiHiLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of UBase UHiLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of UBase ULowLim 0 0 2...

Page 873: ...ate current at 30 of Ir IAmpComp100 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100 of Ir IAngComp5 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Angle calibration for current at 5 of Ir IAngComp30 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Angle calibration for current at 30 of Ir IAngComp100 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Angle calibration for current at 100 of Ir Table 627 CMMXU Non group settings bas...

Page 874: ...000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100 of Ir IAngComp5 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Angle calibration for current at 5 of Ir IL1Min 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of IBase IAngComp30 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Angle calibration for current at 30 of Ir IAngComp100 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Angle calibration for current at 100 of Ir IL1LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hyste...

Page 875: ...epInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s UL2ZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 1 Zero point clamping UL23Max 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of UBase UL23RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type UL23AnDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s UL31DbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s UL3...

Page 876: ... 0 UB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of UBase UL31Min 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of UBase UL31LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range and is common for all limits Table 631 CMSQI Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description 3I0DbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s 3I0ZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 1 Zero point clamp...

Page 877: ... 000 Hysteresis value in of range and is common for all limits I2AngDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s I2AngMin 180 000 180 000 Deg 0 001 180 000 Minimum value I2AngRepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type Table 632 CMSQI Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description 3I0HiHiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 150 0 High High ...

Page 878: ...lic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 3U0LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range and is common for all limits 3U0AngDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s Operation Off On Off Operation Mode On Off 3U0AngZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0 001 of r...

Page 879: ...e calibrate voltage at 30 of Ur UAmpPreComp100 10 000 10 000 0 001 0 000 Amplitude factor to pre calibrate voltage at 100 of Ur Table 634 VMSQI Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description 3U0HiHiLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of UBase 3U0HiLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of UBase 3U0LowLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of UBase 3U0LowLow...

Page 880: ...L1AnDbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s UL2DbRepInt 1 300 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s Db In of range Int Db In s UL2ZeroDb 0 100000 m 1 1 Zero point clamping UL2Max 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of UBase UL2RepTyp Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Cyclic Reporting type UL2LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range and is common f...

Page 881: ...it in of UBase UL2Min 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of UBase UL3HiHiLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of UBase UL3HiLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of UBase UL3LowLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of UBase UL3LowLowLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of UBase UL3Min 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of UBase 16 1 6 Monitored data Table 637 CVMMXN Moni...

Page 882: ...magnitude of reported value UL12ANGL REAL deg UL12 Angle magnitude of reported value UL23 REAL kV UL23 Amplitude magnitude of reported value UL23ANGL REAL deg UL23 Angle magnitude of reported value UL31 REAL kV UL31 Amplitude magnitude of reported value UL31ANGL REAL deg UL31 Angle magnitude of reported value Table 640 CMSQI Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description 3I0IMAG REAL 3I0 A...

Page 883: ... Description 3U0IMAG REAL 3U0 Amplitude magnitude of instantaneous value 3U0 REAL kV 3U0 Amplitude magnitude of reported value 3U0ANGIM REAL 3U0 Angle magnitude of instantaneous value 3U0ANGL REAL deg 3U0 Angle magnitude of reported value U1IMAG REAL U1 Amplitude magnitude of instantaneous value U1 REAL kV U1 Amplitude magnitude of reported value U1ANGIM REAL U1 Angle magnitude of instantaneous va...

Page 884: ... The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations Locally by means of the local HMI Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report function Phase angle reference All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel The General setting ...

Page 885: ...ue output has one corresponding supervision level output X_RANGE The output signal is an integer in the interval 0 4 0 Normal 1 High limit exceeded 3 High high limit exceeded 2 below Low limit and 4 below Low low limit The output may be connected to a measurement expander block XP RANGE_XP to get measurement supervision as binary signals The logical value of the functional output signals changes a...

Page 886: ...easured value passes any of the defined threshold limits IEC05000500 2 en vsdx Value 1 Y t Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value Reported 1st Value Reported Value 5 Value Reported Y1 Y2 Y5 Value Reported Value Reported Y3 Y4 Set value for t XDbRepInt t t t t IEC05000500 V2 EN Figure 418 Periodic reporting Amplitude dead band supervision If a measuring value is changed compared to the last reported value a...

Page 887: ...here an example of reporting with integral dead band supervision is shown The picture is simplified the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other The last value reported Y1 in figure 420 serves as a basic value for further measurement A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is mul...

Page 888: ...ion The measurement function must be connected to three phase current and three phase voltage input in the configuration tool group signals but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED The end user can freely select by a parameter setting which one of the nine available measuring modes shall b...

Page 889: ... EQUATION1392 V1 EN Equation 142 Used when only UL1L2 phase to phase voltage is available 5 L2L3 2 3 2 3 L L L L S U I I EQUATION1393 V1 EN Equation 143 2 3 2 3 2 L L L L U U I I I EQUATION1394 V1 EN Equation 144 Used when only UL2L3 phase to phase voltage is available 6 L3L1 3 1 3 1 L L L L S U I I EQUATION1395 V1 EN Equation 145 3 1 3 1 2 L L L L U U I I I EQUATION1396 V1 EN Equation 146 Used wh...

Page 890: ...unction are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output X_RANGE The output signal is an integer in the inter...

Page 891: ...ctor This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula 1 Old Calculated X k X k X EQUATION1407 V1 EN Equation 157 where X is a new measured value that is P Q S U I or PF to be given out from the function XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution...

Page 892: ...pervision Compensation facility In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete measurement chain CT error VT error IED input transformer errors and so on it is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement This is achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent p...

Page 893: ...ts This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180 0 degrees With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar Frequency Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block It is simply obtained from the pre processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as...

Page 894: ... interval 0 4 see section Measurement supervision 16 1 7 5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI CMSQI The measurement functions must be connected to three phase current CMSQI or voltage VMSQI input in the configuration tool to be operable No outputs other than X_RANG are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals Input signals are obtained fro...

Page 895: ...1 4 0 Ir 1 0 at 0 1 Ir I 0 5 Ir 0 5 at 0 5 Ir I 4 0 Ir Table 645 VMMXU technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Voltage 10 to 300 V 0 5 of U at U 50 V 0 2 of U at U 50 V Phase angle 10 to 300 V 0 5 at U 50 V 0 2 at U 50 V Table 646 CMSQI technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Current positive sequence I1 Three phase settings 0 1 4 0 Ir 0 3 of Ir at I 0 5 Ir 0 3 of I at I 0 5 Ir Cur...

Page 896: ... 175 V 0 5 of U at U 50 V 0 2 of U at U 50 V Phase angle 5 to 175 V 0 5 at U 50 V 0 2 at U 50 V 16 2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG 16 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Gas medium supervision SSIMG 63 16 2 2 Functionality Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition Binary infor...

Page 897: ...f the insulation medium from CB PRES_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal PRES_LO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal SET_P_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout Table 650 SSIMG Output signals Name Type Description PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level PRES_LO BO...

Page 898: ...ES_LO and gas pressure signal PRESSURE are taken into account to initiate the alarms PRES_ALM and PRES_LO When PRESSURE is less than PressAlmLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_ALM is high then the gas pressure alarm PRES_ALM will be initiated Similarly if pressure input PRESSURE is less than PressLOLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_LO is high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level Tem...

Page 899: ...t can block both alarms and the lockout indication 16 2 7 Technical data Table 652 SSIMG Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Pressure alarm level 1 00 100 00 10 0 of set value Pressure lockout level 1 00 100 00 10 0 of set value Temperature alarm level 40 00 200 00 2 5 of set value Temperature lockout level 40 00 200 00 2 5 of set value Time delay for pressure alarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 ...

Page 900: ... Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms LEVEL REAL 0 0 Level input from CB TEMP REAL 0 0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB LVL_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal LEVEL_LO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal SET_L_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout Table 65...

Page 901: ...and oil level signal LEVEL are taken into account to initiate the alarms LVL_ALM and LVL_LO When LEVEL is less than LevelAlmLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_ALM is high then the oil level indication alarm LVL_ALM will be initiated Similarly if oil level input LEVEL is less than LevelLOLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_LO is high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit then ...

Page 902: ...arms and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication 16 3 7 Technical data Table 656 SSIMLTechnical data Function Range or value Accuracy Oil alarm level 1 00 100 00 10 0 of set value Oil lockout level 1 00 100 00 10 0 of set value Temperature alarm level 40 00 200 00 2 5 of set value Temperature lockout level 40 00 200 00 2 5 of set value Time delay for oil alarm 0 000 60 000...

Page 903: ...N Figure 425 SSCBR function block 16 4 4 Signals Table 657 SSCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I O POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for clos...

Page 904: ...LEAN Pressure below lockout level 16 4 5 Settings Table 659 SSCBR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups PhSel Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3 Phase L1 Phase selection RatedOperCurr 100 00 5000 00 A 0 01 1000 00 Rated operating current of the breaker OperNoRate...

Page 905: ...01 0 010 Correction for open travel time CloseTimeCorr 0 100 0 100 s 0 001 0 010 Correction for close travel time DirCoef 3 00 0 50 0 01 1 50 Directional coefficient for CB life calculation CBLifeAlmLevel 1 99999 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life ContTrCorr 0 010 0 010 s 0 001 0 005 Correction for time difference in auxiliary and main contacts open time OperTimeDelay 0 000 0 200 s 0 001 0 0...

Page 906: ...e IPOWPH REAL Accumulated I CurrExponent integrated over CB open travel time SPCHT REAL s The charging time of the CB spring 16 4 7 Operation principle The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions The subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of the subfunctions is described b...

Page 907: ...OS CLOSEPOS INVDPOS CB Status CB Operation Monitoring CB Operation Cycles Accumulated energy Remaining Life of CB RSTCBWR IPOWLOPH IPOWALPH MONALM INADAYS PRESALM PRESLO GPRESALM GPRESLO SPCHALM SPCHT RSTSPCHT CB Spring Charge Monitoring RSTIPOW TRCMD IEC12000624 3 en vsd IEC12000624 V3 EN Figure 426 Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 16 Monitoring 901 Technic...

Page 908: ...ntacts Similarly the closing travel time is measured between the opening of the POSOPEN and closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts A compensation factor has been added to consider the time difference between auxiliary contact operation and the actual physical opening of the breaker main contact tOpen t1 t2 t3 tClose t4 Main Contact POSCLOSE POSOPEN 0 1 0 1 1 0 tTravelOpen tOpen t1 t2 tTravelCl...

Page 909: ...circuit breaker that is whether the breaker is in the open closed or error position The operation is described in Figure 429 Phase current check Contact position indicator POSCLOSE POSOPEN I3P ILRMSPH OPENPOS CLOSEPOS INVDPOS IEC12000613 3 en vsd IEC12000613 V3 EN Figure 429 Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status Phase current check The module compares the phase current I3...

Page 910: ...2000620 V3 EN Figure 430 Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker Circuit breaker remaining life estimation If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the RatedOperCurr setting the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one operation If the interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the RatedFltC...

Page 911: ...dications from the trip coil circuit TRIND is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS POSCLOSE BLOCK BLKALM Accumulated energy calculation Alarm limit Check I3P ILRMSPH LRSTIPOW TRIND IPOWPH IPOWALPH IPOWLOPH I3P IL TRCMD IEC12000619 3 en vsd IEC12000619 V3 EN Figure 431 Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy Accumulated energy calculation Accumulated energy can be calculated ei...

Page 912: ...put TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay between the trip initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the setting OperTimeDelay The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value The value can be reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input RSTIPOW Alarm limit check The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the...

Page 913: ...rated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the OperAlmLevel threshold setting If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the OperLOLevel setting the OPERLO output is activated The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLKALM input is activated 16 4 7 6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring The circuit breaker operation monitori...

Page 914: ... SPRCHRD BLOCK BLKALM Spring charging time measurement Alarm limit Check SPRCHRST RSTSPCHT SPCHT SPCHALM IEC12000621 V2 EN Figure 435 Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge indication Spring charging time measurement The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the start of circuit breaker spring charging time SPRCHRD indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged The spring char...

Page 915: ...LO alarm can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers The alarm signals from the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM 16 4 8 Technical data Table 662 SSCBR Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Alarm level for open and clo...

Page 916: ...e station level These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function EVENT The event function block is used for LON and SPA communication Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function 16 5 3 Function block IEC05000697 2 en vsd EVENT BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11...

Page 917: ...NPUT5 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 5 INPUT6 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 6 INPUT7 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 7 INPUT8 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 8 INPUT9 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 9 INPUT10 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 10 INPUT11 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 11 INPUT12 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 12 INPUT13 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 13 INPUT14 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 14 INPUT15 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 15 INPUT16 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 16 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 16...

Page 918: ... AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 3 EventMask4 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 4 EventMask5 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 5 EventMask6 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 6 EventMask7 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Repo...

Page 919: ...RepIntVal2 0 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 2 MinRepIntVal3 0 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3 MinRepIntVal4 0 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 4 MinRepIntVal5 0 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 5 MinRepIntVal6 0 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 6 MinRepIntVal7 0 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 7 MinRepIntVal8 0 3600 s 1 2 Mini...

Page 920: ...als have a resolution of 1 ms The outputs from the EVENT function are formed by the reading of status events and alarms by the station level on every single input The user defined name for each input is intended to be used by the station level All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer which contains up to 1000 events If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is...

Page 921: ... signals A41RADR Disturbance report DRPRDRE Disturbance report A1RADR Disturbance report A2RADR Disturbance report A3RADR Disturbance report A4RADR Disturbance report B1RBDR Disturbance report B2RBDR Disturbance report B3RBDR Disturbance report B4RBDR Disturbance report B5RBDR Disturbance report B6RBDR 16 6 2 Functionality Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and or ...

Page 922: ...n the IED in the standard Comtrade format as a reader file HDR a configuration file CFG and a data file DAT The same applies to all events which are continuously saved in a ring buffer The local HMI is used to get information about the recordings The disturbance report files may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool 16 6 3 Function block DRPRDRE DRPOFF RECS...

Page 923: ...13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 IEC05000432 V3 EN Figure 441 B1RBDR function block binary inputs example for B1RBDR B6RBDR 16 6 4 Signals Table 665 DRPRDRE Output signals Name Type Description DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared M...

Page 924: ...for input 9 GRPINPUT10 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 10 Table 667 A2RADR Input signals Name Type Default Description GRPINPUT11 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 11 GRPINPUT12 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 12 GRPINPUT13 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 13 GRPINPUT14 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 14 GRPINPUT15 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 15 GRPINPUT16 GROUP SIGNAL Gro...

Page 925: ...Group signal for input 30 Table 669 A4RADR Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31 INPUT32 REAL 0 Analog channel 32 INPUT33 REAL 0 Analog channel 33 INPUT34 REAL 0 Analog channel 34 INPUT35 REAL 0 Analog channel 35 INPUT36 REAL 0 Analog channel 36 INPUT37 REAL 0 Analog channel 37 INPUT38 REAL 0 Analog channel 38 INPUT39 REAL 0 Analog channel 39 INPUT40 REAL 0 A...

Page 926: ...T20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 20 INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 21 INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 22 INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 23 INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 24 INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 25 INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 26 INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 27 INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 28 INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 29 INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 30 INPUT31 ...

Page 927: ...INPUT52 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 52 INPUT53 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 53 INPUT54 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 54 INPUT55 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 55 INPUT56 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 56 INPUT57 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 57 INPUT58 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 58 INPUT59 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 59 INPUT60 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 60 INPUT61 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 61 INPUT62 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 62 INPU...

Page 928: ...EAN 0 Binary channel 84 INPUT85 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 85 INPUT86 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 86 INPUT87 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 87 INPUT88 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 88 INPUT89 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 89 INPUT90 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 90 INPUT91 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 91 INPUT92 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 92 INPUT93 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 93 INPUT94 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 94 INPUT95 BOOLEAN ...

Page 929: ...Off Operation06 Off On Off Operation On Off Operation07 Off On Off Operation On Off Operation08 Off On Off Operation On Off Operation09 Off On Off Operation On Off Operation10 Off On Off Operation On Off Table 678 A1RADR Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description NomValue01 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 1 UnderTrigOp01 Off On Off Use under l...

Page 930: ...ignal OverTrigOp04 Off On Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 4 on or not off OverTrigLe04 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 4 in of signal NomValue05 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 5 UnderTrigOp05 Off On Off Use under level trigger for analog channel 5 on or not off UnderTrigLe05 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 5 in of signal Ove...

Page 931: ... not off UnderTrigLe09 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 9 in of signal OverTrigOp09 Off On Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 9 on or not off OverTrigLe09 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 9 in of signal NomValue10 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 10 UnderTrigOp10 Off On Off Use under level trigger for analog channel 10 on or not of...

Page 932: ...channel 12 on or not off UnderTrigLe12 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 12 in of signal OverTrigOp12 Off On Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 12 on or not off OverTrigLe12 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 12 in of signal NomValue13 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 13 UnderTrigOp13 Off On Off Use under level trigger for analog chan...

Page 933: ...igger for analog channel 17 on or not off UnderTrigLe17 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 17 in of signal OverTrigOp17 Off On Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 17 on or not off OverTrigLe17 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 17 in of signal NomValue18 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 18 UnderTrigOp18 Off On Off Use under level trigge...

Page 934: ...n On off Operation27 Off On Off Operation On off Operation28 Off On Off Operation On off Operation29 Off On Off Operation On off Operation30 Off On Off Operation On off Table 682 A3RADR Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description NomValue21 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 21 UnderTrigOp21 Off On Off Use under level trigger for analog channel 21...

Page 935: ... off OverTrigLe24 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 24 in of signal NomValue25 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 25 UnderTrigOp25 Off On Off Use under level trigger for analog channel 25 on or not off UnderTrigLe25 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 25 in of signal OverTrigOp25 Off On Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 25 on or not off...

Page 936: ... analog channel 29 in of signal OverTrigOp29 Off On Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 29 on or not off OverTrigLe29 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 29 in of signal NomValue30 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 30 UnderTrigOp30 Off On Off Use under level trigger for analog channel 30 on or not off UnderTrigLe30 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for ana...

Page 937: ...ger level for analog channel 32 in of signal OverTrigOp32 Off On Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 32 on or not off OverTrigLe32 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 32 in of signal NomValue33 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 33 UnderTrigOp33 Off On Off Use under level trigger for analog channel 33 on or not off UnderTrigLe33 0 200 1 50 Under trigger ...

Page 938: ...vel for analog channel 37 in of signal OverTrigOp37 Off On Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 37 on or not off OverTrigLe37 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 37 in of signal NomValue38 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 38 UnderTrigOp38 Off On Off Use under level trigger for analog channel 38 on or not off UnderTrigLe38 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level ...

Page 939: ... Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 2 TrigDR03 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED03 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3 TrigDR04 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED04 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4 TrigDR05 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED05 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set...

Page 940: ... Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11 TrigDR12 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED12 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12 TrigDR13 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED13 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13 TrigDR14 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED14 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set L...

Page 941: ...70 5 103 FunType6 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo6 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType7 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo7 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 7 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType8 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 8 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo8 0 255 1 0 Information number...

Page 942: ...IndicationMa01 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 1 TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 2 IndicationMa02 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 2 TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 3 IndicationMa03 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary cha...

Page 943: ...ow Indication mask for binary channel 11 TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 12 IndicationMa12 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 12 TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 13 IndicationMa13 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 13 TrigLevel14 Tri...

Page 944: ...etLED20 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 20 TrigDR21 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED21 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 21 TrigDR22 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED22 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 22 TrigDR23 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED23 Off Start Trip St...

Page 945: ...29 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 29 TrigDR30 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED30 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 30 TrigDR31 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED31 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 31 TrigDR32 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED32 Off Start Trip Start a...

Page 946: ...70 5 103 FunType24 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 24 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo24 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 24 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType25 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 25 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo25 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 25 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType26 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 26 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo26 0 255 1 0 Informa...

Page 947: ...for binary input 19 IndicationMa19 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 19 TrigLevel20 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 20 IndicationMa20 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 20 TrigLevel21 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 21 IndicationMa21 Hide Show Show Indica...

Page 948: ...nnel 29 TrigLevel30 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 30 IndicationMa30 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 30 TrigLevel31 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 31 IndicationMa31 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 31 TrigLevel32 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigge...

Page 949: ...DR39 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED39 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 39 TrigDR40 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED40 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 40 TrigDR41 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED41 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 41 TrigDR42 Off On Off Trigger o...

Page 950: ...0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 33 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo33 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 33 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType34 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 34 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo34 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 34 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType35 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 35 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo35 0 255 1 0 Information number for bin...

Page 951: ...5 1 0 Function type for binary channel 43 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo43 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 43 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType44 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 44 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo44 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 44 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType45 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 45 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo45 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary ...

Page 952: ...gative 0 slope for binary input 38 IndicationMa38 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 38 TrigLevel39 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 39 IndicationMa39 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 39 TrigLevel40 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 40 IndicationMa40 Hide S...

Page 953: ...ndicationMa48 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 48 Table 691 B4RBDR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description TrigDR49 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED49 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 49 TrigDR50 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED50 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary chan...

Page 954: ...p Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 57 TrigDR58 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED58 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 58 TrigDR59 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED59 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 59 TrigDR60 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED60 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set ...

Page 955: ...5 1 0 Information number for binary channel 51 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType52 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 52 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo52 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 52 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType53 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 53 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo53 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 53 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType54 0 255 1 0 Function type for binar...

Page 956: ...0 Function type for binary channel 63 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo63 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 63 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType64 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 64 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo64 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 64 IEC 60870 5 103 Table 692 B4RBDR Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description TrigLevel49 Trig on 0 Trig on 1...

Page 957: ...rigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 58 IndicationMa58 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 58 TrigLevel59 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 59 IndicationMa59 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 59 TrigLevel60 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary inpu...

Page 958: ...etLED68 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 68 TrigDR69 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED69 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 69 TrigDR70 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED70 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 70 TrigDR71 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED71 Off Start Trip St...

Page 959: ...77 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 77 TrigDR78 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED78 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 78 TrigDR79 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED79 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 79 TrigDR80 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED80 Off Start Trip Start a...

Page 960: ...70 5 103 FunType72 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 72 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo72 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 72 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType73 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 73 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo73 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 73 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType74 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 74 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo74 0 255 1 0 Informa...

Page 961: ...for binary input 67 IndicationMa67 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 67 TrigLevel68 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 68 IndicationMa68 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 68 TrigLevel69 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 69 IndicationMa69 Hide Show Show Indica...

Page 962: ...nnel 77 TrigLevel78 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 78 IndicationMa78 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 78 TrigLevel79 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 79 IndicationMa79 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 79 TrigLevel80 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigge...

Page 963: ...DR87 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED87 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 87 TrigDR88 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED88 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 88 TrigDR89 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED89 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 89 TrigDR90 Off On Off Trigger o...

Page 964: ...0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 81 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo81 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 81 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType82 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 82 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo82 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 82 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType83 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 83 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo83 0 255 1 0 Information number for bin...

Page 965: ...5 1 0 Function type for binary channel 91 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo91 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 91 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType92 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 92 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo92 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 92 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType93 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 93 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo93 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary ...

Page 966: ...gative 0 slope for binary input 86 IndicationMa86 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 86 TrigLevel87 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 87 IndicationMa87 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 87 TrigLevel88 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 88 IndicationMa88 Hide S...

Page 967: ... Type Values Range Unit Description MemoryUsed INTEGER Memory usage 0 100 UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 1 activated OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 1 activated UnTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 2 activated OvTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 2 activated UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analo...

Page 968: ...OvTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 12 activated UnTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 13 activated OvTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 13 activated UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 14 activated OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 14 activated UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN Under level trig for...

Page 969: ...vated OvTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 24 activated UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 25 activated OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 25 activated UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 26 activated OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 26 activated UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN Under level tr...

Page 970: ...vel trig for analog channel 36 activated OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 36 activated UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 37 activated OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 37 activated UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 38 activated OvTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 38 activated Un...

Page 971: ...recorder Indications Disturbance recorder AxRADR BxRBDR Disturbance Report Binary signals Analog signals DRPRDRE IEC09000337 3 en vsdx IEC09000337 V3 EN Figure 442 Disturbance report functions and related function blocks The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above The event list function is working con...

Page 972: ... binary channels and recording time Figure 444 shows the number of recordings versus the total recording time tested for a typical configuration that is in a 50 Hz system it is possible to record 100 where the average recording time is 3 4 seconds The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report Event list EL Event recorder ER Indications IND and Trip value recorder TVR 100 400 ...

Page 973: ...which have occurred during the disturbance The information is available via the local HMI or PCM600 see section for more detailed information Event list EL The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time tagged events The list information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state The oldest data is overwritten The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or PCM6...

Page 974: ...isturbance recording continues after all activated triggers are reset Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time TimeLimit Limit time The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and preve...

Page 975: ...needed for analog configuration of the Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool SMT external signal configuration In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used The preprocessor function block SMAI calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the three phases are connected AI4 input not used SM...

Page 976: ...turbance recording But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI IndicationMask Show Hide Trigger signals The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report except the event list which runs continuously As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled a complete disturbance report is...

Page 977: ...nder over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600 Post Retrigger Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition during a recording after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset However under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post fault recording for instance by automatic reclosing to a still fa...

Page 978: ... in first out Maximum total recording time 3 4 s recording time and maximum number of channels typical value 340 seconds 100 recordings at 50 Hz 280 seconds 80 recordings at 60 Hz Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz 1 2 kHz at 60 Hz Recording bandwidth 5 300 Hz 16 7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP 16 7 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IE...

Page 979: ... Single status report input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 9 INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 10 ...

Page 980: ...port output 12 OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 13 OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 14 OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 15 OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 16 16 7 5 Settings Table 701 BINSTATREP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description t 0 0 60 0 s 0 1 10 0 Time delay of function 16 7 6 Operation principle The Log...

Page 981: ...s MVGAPC are provided with measurement supervision functionality All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits low low limit low limit high limit and high high limit Themeasurevalueexpanderblock RANGE_XP hasbeenintroducedtoenable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals below low low limit below low limit normal above high limit or ab...

Page 982: ...ge output of a measuring function block CVMMXN CMMXU VMMXU VNMMXU CMSQI VMSQ or MVGAPC The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to table 704 Table 704 Input integer value converted to binary output signals Measured supervised value is below low low limit between low low and low limit between low and high limit between high high and high limit abov...

Page 983: ...four limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated until the reset of the function Moreover the content of L4UFCNT is stored in flash memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption 16 9 3 1 Design Figure 450 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function BLOCK CountType INPUT RESET ERROR OVERFLOW LIMIT1 4 CounterLimit1 4 MaxValue OnMa...

Page 984: ...ue The counter stops counting the input and all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state The error condition remains until the correct settings for counter limits and or initial value setting s are applied The function can be blocked through a block input During the block time input is not counted and outputs remain in their previous states However the counter can be initialized a...

Page 985: ...L4UFCNT Output signals Name Type Description ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and or initial value settings OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than MaxValue LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit1 LIMIT2 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit2 LIMIT3 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLim...

Page 986: ...5 1 400 Value of the fourth limit MaxValue 1 65535 1 500 Maximum count value OnMaxValue Stop Rollover Steady Rollover Pulsed Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after reaching maxValue with steady or pulsed overflow flag InitialValue 0 65535 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the function 16 9 7 Monitored data Table 708 L4UFCNT Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description VALU...

Page 987: ...al energy meter for calculation of energy consumption values The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the PCFCNT function A scaled service value is available over the station bus The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality 17 1 3 Function block PCFCNT BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT INVALID RESTAR...

Page 988: ...value is generated SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information 17 1 5 Settings Table 712 PCFCNT Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On EventMask NoEvents ReportEvents NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse counter CountCriteria Off RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria Sc...

Page 989: ...at is the reported value is a 32 bit signed integer with a range 0 2147483647 The counter is reset at initialization of the IED The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity Scaled Value pulse count x scale Time and Pulse Counter Quality The Pulse Counter Quality consists of Invalid board hardware error or configuration error Wrapped around Blocked Adjusted The transmiss...

Page 990: ...input of the function block for the Binary Input Module BIM The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter Each pulse counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an Event function block for event recording INVALID RESTART BLOCKED and NEW_VAL The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is...

Page 991: ...sure active as well as reactive power values Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the accumulated active and reactive energy pulses in forward and reverse direction Energy values can be read or generated as pulses Maximum demand power values are also calculated by the function This function includes zero point c...

Page 992: ...RFPULSE ERRPULSE EAFALM EARALM ERFALM ERRALM EAFACC EARACC ERFACC ERRACC MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD MAXPRRD IEC14000019 1 en vsd IEC14000019 V1 EN Figure 455 ETPMMTR function block 17 2 4 Signals Table 715 ETPMMTR Input signals Name Type Default Description P REAL 0 Measured active power Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop to ac...

Page 993: ...and value for set interval MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse direction 17 2 5 Settings Table 717 ETPMMTR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On EnaAcc Off O...

Page 994: ...ping level at reactive Power DirEnergyAct Forward Reverse Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward Reverse DirEnergyReac Forward Reverse Forward Direction of reactive energy flow Forward Reverse EAFPrestVal 0 000 100000000 000 MWh 0 001 0 000 Preset Initial value for forward active energy EARPrestVal 0 000 100000000 000 MWh 0 001 0 000 Preset Initial value for reverse active energy ERFPrese...

Page 995: ...Q Maximum Power Demand Calculation Energy Accumulation Calculation STARTACC STOPACC RSTDMD MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD MAXPRRD EAFALM EARALM ERFALM ERRALM EAFACC EARACC ERFACC ERRACC ACCINPRG EAFPULSE EARPULSE ERFPULSE ERRPULSE RSTACC IEC13000185 2 en vsd IEC13000185 V2 EN Figure 456 ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and contr...

Page 996: ... menu or with the input signal RSTACC Figure 458 shows the logic for integration of energy in active forward direction Similarly the integration of energy in active reverse reactive forward and reactive reverse is done T F T F T F S X 60 0 q 1 0 0 q 1 RSTACC EAFPrestVal ACCINPRG P ACTIVE FORWARD EAFACC a b a b EALim IEC13000187 4 en vsd q 1 unit delay IEC13000187 V4 EN Figure 458 Logic for integra...

Page 997: ...tion of integrated active forward energy The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time interval tEnergy The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction When the RSTDMD input is active from th...

Page 998: ...lay IEC13000189 V4 EN Figure 460 Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm 17 2 8 Technical data 17 2 8 1 Technical data Table 720 Function Range or value Accuracy Energy metering MWh Export Import MVarh Export Import Input from MMXU No extra error at steady load Section 17 1MRK502052 UEN B Metering 992 Technical manual ...

Page 999: ...3 Distributed Network Protocol is a set of communications protocols used to communicate data between components in process automation systems For a detailed description of the DNP3 protocol see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual 18 3 IEC 61850 8 1 communication protocol 18 3 1 Communication interfaces and protocols Table 721 Supported station communication interfaces and protocols Protocol Eth...

Page 1000: ...f Maintenance All levels Off Remote Mode Control AllowGOOSESimulation No Yes No Allow enabling of GOOSE Simulation IEC61850BufTimEnable Disabled Enabled Enabled Enable BRC buf time behavior 18 3 3 Technical data Table 723 Communication protocols Function Value Protocol IEC 61850 8 1 Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE FX Protocol IEC 60870 5 103 Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 ...

Page 1001: ...14 IN15 IN16 IEC14000020 1 en vsd IEC14000020 V1 EN Figure 462 SP16GAPC function block 18 3 4 3 Signals Table 724 SPGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status Table 725 SP16GAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input ...

Page 1002: ... in the local HMI or PCM600 18 3 4 5 Monitored data Table 726 SPGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description OUT GROUP SIGNAL Output status Table 727 SP16GAPC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description OUT1 GROUP SIGNAL Output 1 status OUT2 GROUP SIGNAL Output 2 status OUT3 GROUP SIGNAL Output 3 status OUT4 GROUP SIGNAL Output 4 status OUT5 GROUP SIGNAL Output 5 status O...

Page 1003: ...uests this signal Additional configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600 to get the IEC 61850 8 1 communication established For more information refer to the Engineering manual 18 3 5 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC 18 3 5 1 Functionality Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC function is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other...

Page 1004: ...h High limit multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV hLim 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 800 00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV lLim 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 800 00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV llLim 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 900 00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV min 50...

Page 1005: ...50 8 1 redundant station bus communication Function description LHMI and ACT identification IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Parallel Redundancy Protocol Status PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH Duo driver configuration PRP 18 3 6 1 Functionality Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439 3 Edition 1 and IEC 62439 3 Edition 2 parallel redundancy proto...

Page 1006: ... 255 255 255 0 IP Mask 18 3 6 5 Monitored data Table 734 PRPSTATUS Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description AB Beh INTEGER 2 Blocked 3 Test 4 Test blocked 5 Off 1 On AB Link Beh CD Beh INTEGER 1 On 2 Blocked 3 Test 4 Test blocked 5 Off CD Link Beh PRP Beh INTEGER 2 Blocked 3 Test 4 Test blocked 5 Off 1 On PRP Beh 18 3 6 6 Principle of operation The communication is performed in paral...

Page 1007: ...eceived on one or both channels within the last 10 s the output PRP A LINK and or PRP B LINK is set to 0 which indicates an error Switch A Switch B 1 2 Data Data Data Data IEC09000758 3 en Original vsd IED Configuration PRP PRPSTATUS 1 2 OEM AB CD Duo Redundancy Supervision Station Control System IEC09000758 V3 EN Figure 465 Redundant station bus 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 18 Station communication 1...

Page 1008: ...ardization Organization ISO In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available For other addresses refer to section It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general 18 4 2 Settings Table 735 HORZCOMM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Table 736 ADE Non group settin...

Page 1009: ...e system and support for multi master implementations The LON bus also has an open concept so that the terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables Introduction of LON protocol For more information refer to LON bus LonWorks Network in Protection and Control User s manual and Technical description LON protocol Configuration of LON LON network tool LNT...

Page 1010: ...input 15 on EVENT 17 function block has the address 1280 14 15 1 1294 For double indications only the first eight inputs 1 8 must be used Inputs 9 16 can be used for other types of events at the same EVENT block Three EVENT function blocks EVENT 1 to EVENT 3 running with a fast loop time 3 ms are available as basic in the IEDs The remaining EVENT function blocks EVENT 4 to EVENT 9 run with a loop ...

Page 1011: ...tion block SMBI is always reported on change no changed detection is done in the EVENT function block Other Boolean signals for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event masked in the EVENT function block Double indications Double indications can only be reported via switch control SCSWI functions Event reporting is based on the information coming from SCSWI functions so...

Page 1012: ...nication Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 670 series IEDs Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 650 series IEDs The supported network variable type is SNVT_state NV type 83 SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values Multiple command send function block MULTICMDSND is used to pack the information to one value Thi...

Page 1013: ...nections NVConnections New en05000719 vsd IEC05000719 V1 EN Figure 467 The network variables window in LNT There are two ways of downloading NV connections Either the users can use the drag and drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window drag them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there or they can perform it by selecting the traditional me...

Page 1014: ...incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input and the outgoing optical fibre to the TX transmitter output Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and connection of fibre cables Table 738 SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control Name Function block SPA address Description BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block command ...

Page 1015: ...r block command BL_CMD SCSWI17 1 I 5499 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI18 1 I 5523 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI19 1 I 5545 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI20 1 I 5571 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI21 1 I 5594 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI22 1 I 5619 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI23 1 I 5643 SPA parameters for...

Page 1016: ...ncel command CANCEL SCSWI09 1 I 5299 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI10 1 I 5323 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI11 1 I 5347 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI12 1 I 5371 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI13 1 I 5395 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI14 1 I 5419 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI15 1 I 5443 SPA parameters ...

Page 1017: ...and before operate command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI02 1 I 5129 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI03 1 I 5151 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI04 1 I 5176 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI05 1 I 5200 SPA parameters for select Open...

Page 1018: ...and SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI23 1 I 5633 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI24 1 I 5657 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI25 1 I 5681 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI26 1 I 5705 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOp...

Page 1019: ... 01 so on SCSWI13 1 I 5394 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI14 1 I 5418 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI15 1 I 5442 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI16 1 I 5466 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI17 1 I 5490 SPA p...

Page 1020: ...ition to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR04 2 I 7904 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR05 2 I 7923 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR06 2 I 7942 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR07 2 I 7961 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR08 2 I 7980 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXCBR0...

Page 1021: ...d Sub Value SXSWI11 3 I 378 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI12 3 I 397 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI13 3 I 416 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI14 3 I 435 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI15 3 I 454 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI16 3 I 473 SPA parameter for...

Page 1022: ...XCBR06 2 I 7941 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR07 2 I 7962 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR08 2 I 7979 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR09 3 I 8 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR10 3 I 25 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXCBR11 3 I 46 SPA parameter for substitute en...

Page 1023: ... Sub Enable SXSWI12 3 I 398 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI13 3 I 417 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI14 3 I 436 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI15 3 I 455 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI16 3 I 474 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI17 3 I 493 SPA parameter for...

Page 1024: ...te block command Update Block SXCBR08 2 I 7981 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR09 3 I 6 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR10 3 I 27 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR11 3 I 44 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR12 3 I 57 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR13 3 I 73 SPA parameter for u...

Page 1025: ...SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI14 3 I 434 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI15 3 I 453 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI16 3 I 472 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI17 3 I 491 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI18 3 I 510 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI19 ...

Page 1026: ... are available For other addresses refer to section It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general 18 5 2 Design Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC requires the following equipment Optical fibres Opto electrical converter for the PC PC The software needed in the PC either local or remote is PCM600 SPA cannot be used ...

Page 1027: ...onstruction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self initiated need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and consequently can request required data In addition the master can send data to the slave Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling for example for event information or only on demand The master requests slave...

Page 1028: ...5 CH3 4 O 6550 MIM5 CH4 4 O 6553 MIM5 CH5 4 O 6554 MIM5 CH6 4 O 6557 MIM6 CH1 4 O 6565 MIM6 CH2 4 O 6568 MIM6 CH3 4 O 6569 MIM6 CH4 4 O 6572 MIM6 CH5 4 O 6573 MIM6 CH6 4 O 6576 MIM7 CH1 4 O 6584 MIM7 CH2 4 O 6587 MIM7 CH3 4 O 6588 MIM7 CH4 4 O 6591 MIM7 CH5 4 O 6592 MIM7 CH6 4 O 6595 MIM8 CH1 4 O 6603 MIM8 CH2 4 O 6606 MIM8 CH3 4 O 6607 MIM8 CH4 4 O 6610 MIM8 CH5 4 O 6611 MIM8 CH6 4 O 6614 MIM9 CH...

Page 1029: ...2 CH1 4 O 6679 MIM12 CH2 4 O 6682 MIM12 CH3 4 O 6683 MIM12 CH4 4 O 6686 MIM12 CH5 4 O 6687 MIM12 CH6 4 O 6690 MIM13 CH1 4 O 6698 MIM13 CH2 4 O 6701 MIM13 CH3 4 O 6702 MIM13 CH4 4 O 6705 MIM13 CH5 4 O 6706 MIM13 CH6 4 O 6709 MIM14 CH1 4 O 6717 MIM14 CH2 4 O 6720 MIM14 CH3 4 O 6721 MIM14 CH4 4 O 6724 MIM14 CH5 4 O 6725 MIM14 CH6 4 O 6728 MIM15 CH1 4 O 6736 MIM15 CH2 4 O 6739 MIM15 CH3 4 O 6740 MIM15...

Page 1030: ... 6 O 2842 6 O 2841 PCFCNT 11 6 O 2848 6 O 2847 PCFCNT 12 6 O 2854 6 O 2853 PCFCNT 13 6 O 2860 6 O 2859 PCFCNT 14 6 O 2866 6 O 2865 PCFCNT 15 6 O 2872 6 O 2871 PCFCNT 16 6 O 2878 6 O 2877 I O modules To read binary inputs the SPA addresses for the outputs of the I O module function block are used that is the addresses for BI1 BI16 For SPA addresses refer to section Related documents in Product Guid...

Page 1031: ...md3 4 S 4641 5 O 513 SINGLECMD1 Cmd4 4 S 4642 5 O 514 SINGLECMD1 Cmd5 4 S 4643 5 O 515 SINGLECMD1 Cmd6 4 S 4644 5 O 516 SINGLECMD1 Cmd7 4 S 4645 5 O 517 SINGLECMD1 Cmd8 4 S 4646 5 O 518 SINGLECMD1 Cmd9 4 S 4647 5 O 519 SINGLECMD1 Cmd10 4 S 4648 5 O 520 SINGLECMD1 Cmd11 4 S 4649 5 O 521 SINGLECMD1 Cmd12 4 S 4650 5 O 522 SINGLECMD1 Cmdt13 4 S 4651 5 O 523 SINGLECMD1 Cmd14 4 S 4652 5 O 524 SINGLECMD1...

Page 1032: ...ified way connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED for control of a circuit breaker A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command control The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD 1 are shown in table 744 SINGLECMD BLOCK OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OU...

Page 1033: ... stored in a buffer which contains up to 1000 events If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED Terminal Restarted 0E50 and Event buffer overflow 0E51 Input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool PST under Mai...

Page 1034: ...2 22E44 22E46 22E48 22E50 22E52 22E54 22E56 22E58 22E60 22E62 22E0 22E4 22E8 22E12 22E16 22E20 22E24 22E28 22E1 22E5 22E9 22E13 22E17 22E21 22E25 22E29 22E2 22E6 22E10 22E14 22E18 22E22 22E26 22E30 22E3 22E7 22E11 22E15 22E19 22E23 22E27 22E31 EVENT 2 EVENT 3 EVENT 20 230 240 410 23E 24E 41E 23E 24E 41E 23E 24E 41E 23E 23E 41E 23E 24E 41E 23E 24E 41E These values are only applicable if the event m...

Page 1035: ...es and ST bayonet connector for glass fibre cables The SLM can be equipped with either type or connector or with a combination of both types of connectors This is identified with a tag Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input and the outgoing optical fibre to the TX transmitter output Pay special attention to instructions concerning handling and connection of fibre cables For se...

Page 1036: ...Units are generated 9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected IL2 IL3 UL1 UL2 UL3 P Q F are optional but there can be no holes 3 4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present 3 3 Will be generated if IL2 Ul1L2 P and Q present 3 2 Will be generated if IL2 UL1L2 and P or Q missing 3 1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing otherwise IL2 in 9 Description for I103MEAS function block 9 ...

Page 1037: ... voltage phase L2 UL3 REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase L3 UL1L2 REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase phase L1 L2 UN REAL 0 0 Service value for residual voltage UN P REAL 0 0 Service value for active power Q REAL 0 0 Service value for reactive power F REAL 0 0 Service value for system frequency 18 6 2 5 Settings Table 748 I103MEAS Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Def...

Page 1038: ... 18 6 3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870 5 103 I103MEASUSR 18 6 3 1 Functionality I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor direction These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range and the Information number parameter for each block 18 6 3 2 Identification Function description Function block name IEC 606...

Page 1039: ...Description FunctionType 1 255 1 25 Function type 1 255 InfNo 1 255 1 1 Information number for measurands 1 255 MaxMeasur1 0 05 10000000000 00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on input 1 MaxMeasur2 0 05 10000000000 00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on input 2 MaxMeasur3 0 05 10000000000 00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on input 3 MaxMeasur4 0 05 10000000000 00 0 ...

Page 1040: ... 18 6 4 3 Function block I103AR BLOCK 16_ARACT 128_CBON 130_BLKD IEC10000289 2 en vsd IEC10000289 V2 EN Figure 473 I103AR function block 18 6 4 4 Signals Table 751 I103AR Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting 16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16 auto recloser active 128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128 circuit breaker on by auto recloser 130...

Page 1041: ...atus earth fault for IEC 60870 5 103 I103EF 18 6 5 3 Function block IEC10000290 1 en vsd I103EF BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV IEC10000290 V1 EN Figure 474 I103EF function block 18 6 5 4 Signals Table 753 I103EF Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting 51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51 earth fault forward 52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52 earth fau...

Page 1042: ...l Trip of the device and therefore must be connected to the general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC 60870 5 103 I103FLTPROT 18 6 6 2 Identification Function description Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IE...

Page 1043: ...er 64 start phase L1 65_STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65 start phase L2 66_STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66 start phase L3 67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67 start residual current IN 68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68 trip general 69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69 trip phase L1 70_TRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70 trip phase L2 71_TRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71 t...

Page 1044: ... Information number 89 trip measuring system neutral N 90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90 over current trip stage low 91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91 over current trip stage high 92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92 earth fault trip stage low 93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93 earth fault trip stage high ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress SMBRREC INPROGR FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 ...

Page 1045: ...LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19 reset LEDs 21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21 test mode is active 22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22 setting changed 23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23 setting group 1 is active 24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24 setting group 2 is active 25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25 setting group 3 is active 26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information numbe...

Page 1046: ...RAL IEC10000293 V1 EN Figure 477 I103SUPERV function block 18 6 8 4 Signals Table 759 I103SUPERV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting 32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32 measurand supervision of I 33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33 measurand supervision of U 37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37 I high high back up protection 38_VTFF B...

Page 1047: ...ils 18 6 9 2 Identification Function description Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870 5 103 I103USRDEF 18 6 9 3 Function block I103USRDEF BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 RT_START IEC10000294 3 en vsdx IEC10000294 V3 EN Figure 478 I103USRDEF function block 18 6 9 4 Signals Table 761 I10...

Page 1048: ...1 255 1 1 Information number for binary input 1 1 255 InfNo2 1 255 1 2 Information number for binary input 2 1 255 InfNo3 1 255 1 3 Information number for binary input 3 1 255 InfNo4 1 255 1 4 Information number for binary input 4 1 255 InfNo5 1 255 1 5 Information number for binary input 5 1 255 InfNo6 1 255 1 6 Information number for binary input 6 1 255 InfNo7 1 255 1 7 Information number for b...

Page 1049: ...ance of the function block with a FUN Refer to the IEC 60870 5 103 standard for details The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a userdefined INF Refer to the IEC 60870 5 103 standard for details The TypNon parameters determine if messages use absolute or relative time This adheres to the TYPE IDENTIFICATION TYP message types 1 time tagged message and 2 time t...

Page 1050: ...e Description 16 AR BOOLEAN Information number 16 off on of autorecloser 17 DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17 block of differential protection 18 PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18 block of protection 18 6 10 5 Settings Table 765 I103CMD Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 1 Function type 1 255 18 6 11 IED commands for IEC 60870 5 103 I103...

Page 1051: ...OOLEAN 0 Block of commands Table 767 I103IEDCMD Output signals Name Type Description 19 LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19 reset LEDs 23 GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23 activate setting group 1 24 GRP2 BOOLEAN Information number 24 activate setting group 2 25 GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25 activate setting group 3 26 GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26 activate setting group 4 18 6 11 5 Set...

Page 1052: ...ds user defined for IEC 60870 5 103 I103USRCMD 18 6 12 3 Function block IEC10000284 1 en vsd I103USRCMD BLOCK OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 IEC10000284 V1 EN Figure 481 I103USRCMD function block 18 6 12 4 Signals Table 769 I103USRCMD Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands Table 770 I103USRCMD Output signals Name Type Descript...

Page 1053: ...tion number for output 8 1 255 18 6 13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870 5 103 I103GENCMD 18 6 13 1 Functionality I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870 5 103 The function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to implement double point command schemes The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON OFF or 2 steady ON OFF out...

Page 1054: ... 1 1 Information number for command output 1 255 18 6 14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870 5 103 I103POSCMD 18 6 14 1 Functionality I103POSCMD is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and interprets any state transition into commands then sent over an established IEC 60870 5 103 link Additionally it listens for general interrogation GI requests and re...

Page 1055: ...Master such as Scada with its equivalent in the IED 18 6 14 2 Identification Function description Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870 5 103 I103POSCMD 18 6 14 3 Function block IEC10000286 1 en vsd I103POSCMD BLOCK POSITION SELECT IEC10000286 V1 EN Figure 483 I103POSCMD function block 18 6 14 4 Signals Table ...

Page 1056: ...et Characteristics 1 4 Setting groups File transfer disturbance files Time synchronization For detailed information about IEC 60870 5 103 refer to the IEC 60870 standard part 5 Transmission protocols and to the section 103 Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment IEC 60870 5 103 vendor specific implementation The signal and setting tables specify the information typ...

Page 1057: ...gnals Table 778 Pre defined I103CMD supported indications INF Description 16 Auto recloser on off 17 Teleprotection on off 18 Protection on off Function commands in control direction user defined I103USRCMD Function command blocks in control direction with user defined output signals Number of instances 4 Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with parameter Fu...

Page 1058: ...1 active 24 Setting group 2 active 25 Setting group 3 active 26 Setting group 4 active Function status indications in monitor direction user defined I103USRDEF Function indication block in monitor direction with user defined input signals Number of instances 20 Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType Information number is required for each input signal Table 781 I103USRDEF Informatio...

Page 1059: ...peration 1 Y 1 7 9 38 VT fuse failure 1 Y 1 7 9 46 Group warning 1 Y 1 7 9 47 Group alarm 1 Y 1 7 9 Earth fault indications in monitor direction I103EF Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions Number of instances 1 Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType Information number is defined for each output signal Table 783 I103EF supported indications INF...

Page 1060: ...SCL Fault location in ohm Yes Fault indications in monitor direction type 2 I103FltStd Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions The instance type is suitable for line differential transformer differential overcurrent and earth fault protection functions FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal Number of instances ...

Page 1061: ...unction type is selected with parameter FunctionType Information number is defined for each output signal Table 784 I103AR supported indications INF Description 16 Autorecloser active 128 CB on by Autorecloser 130 Autorecloser blocked Measurands Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands Typically connected to monitoring function for example to power measurement CVMMXN Measurands in...

Page 1062: ... max 1 2 rated or client scaled max 1 0 maxVal If the client has a hard coded gain of 1 2 rated then client scaled max 1 2 times maxVal 1 2 Resolution is maxVal 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best accuracy Table 785 I103MEAS supported indications INF Description 148 IL1 144 145 146 148 IL2 148 IL3 147 IN Neutral current 148 UL1 148 UL2 148 UL3 145 146 UL1 UL2 147 UN Neutral v...

Page 1063: ...nts will be 3 Input3 NOT connected 1 2 that is only Input1 and Input2 will be transmitted Disturbance recordings The following elements are used in the ASDUs Application Service Data Units defined in the standard Analog signals 40 channels the channel number for each channel has to be specified Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function...

Page 1064: ... uploaded a disturbance Deviations from the standard Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard however some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the IED series This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard ASDU23 In list of recorded disturbances ASDU23 an information element named SOF sta...

Page 1065: ...OF while the FAN must be incremented NOF is just as FAN equal to disturbance number Interoperability physical layer Supported Electrical Interface EIA RS 485 Yes number of loads 32 Optical interface glass fibre Yes plastic fibre Transmission speed 9600 bit s Yes 19200 bit s Yes Link Layer DFC bit used Yes Connectors connector F SMA No connector BFOC 2 5 Yes Interoperability application layer Suppo...

Page 1066: ... Yes Private data Yes Generic services No 18 6 15 2 Communication ports The serial communication module SLM is used for SPA IEC 60870 5 103 DNP and LON communication This module is a mezzanine module and is placed assembled on the Numerical module NUM The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fibre cables snap in or two glass fibre cables ST bayonet or a combination of pl...

Page 1067: ...onality GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via the IEC 61850 8 1 station communication bus This is typically used for sending apparatus position indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1 of n control GOOSE can also be used to exchange any boolean integer double point and analog measured values between IEDs 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 18 Station com...

Page 1068: ...PP8VAL APP9_OP APP9_CL APP9VAL APP10_OP APP10_CL APP10VAL APP11_OP APP11_CL APP11VAL APP12_OP APP12_CL APP12VAL APP13_OP APP13_CL APP13VAL APP14_OP APP14_CL APP14VAL APP15_OP APP15_CL APP15VAL COMMVALID TEST IEC07000048 V3 EN Figure 484 GOOSEINTLKRCV function block 18 7 3 Signals Table 788 GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals Section 18 ...

Page 1069: ...sition is open APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid APP9_OP BOOLEAN ...

Page 1070: ...L BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid TEST BOOLEAN Test Output 18 7 4 Settings Table 790 GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On S...

Page 1071: ... EN Figure 485 GOOSEBINRCV function block 18 8 2 Signals Table 791 GOOSEBINRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals Table 792 GOOSEBINRCV Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1 DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2 DVALID2 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3...

Page 1072: ...T11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11 DVALID11 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12 DVALID12 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12 OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13 DVALID13 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13 OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14 DVALID14 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14 OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15 DVALID15 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15 OUT16 B...

Page 1073: ... 18 9 3 Function block IEC10000249 1 en vsd GOOSEDPRCV BLOCK DPOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST IEC10000249 V1 EN Figure 486 GOOSEDPRCV function block 18 9 4 Signals Table 794 GOOSEDPRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function Table 795 GOOSEDPRCV Output signals Name Type Description DPOUT INTEGER Double point output DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point o...

Page 1074: ...ss to receive the double point values The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple level If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH If quality data validity is INVALID QUESTIONABLE OVERFLOW FAILURE or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW 18 10 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV 18 10 1 Identificati...

Page 1075: ...BOOLEAN Test output 18 10 5 Settings Table 799 GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On 18 10 6 Operation principle The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from th...

Page 1076: ...ption IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV 18 11 2 Functionality GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE 18 11 3 Function block IEC10000251 1 en vsd GOOSEMVRCV BLOCK MVOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST IEC10000251 V1 EN Figure 488 GOOSEMVRCV function block 18 1...

Page 1077: ...n from the sending IED does not happen The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to receive the measured value The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple level If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH If quality data validity is INVALID ...

Page 1078: ...BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output TEST BOOLEAN Test output 18 12 5 Settings Table 805 GOOSESPRCV Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On 18 12 6 Operation principle The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data The COMMVALID ou...

Page 1079: ...cks enabling several IEDs to send and receive signals via the interbay bus The sending function block MULTICMDSND takes 16 binary inputs LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function block MULTICMDRCV which has 16 binary outputs 18 13 2 Design 18 13 2 1 General The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of two modes Steady or Pulse 1 Stead...

Page 1080: ...re 490 MULTICMDRCV function block IEC06000008 2 en vsd MULTICMDSND BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 ERROR IEC06000008 V2 EN Figure 491 MULTICMDSND function block 18 13 4 Signals Table 806 MULTICMDRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function Section 18 1MRK502052 UEN B St...

Page 1081: ...ut 15 INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 Table 808 MULTICMDRCV Output signals Name Type Description ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 OUTPUT10 BOOL...

Page 1082: ...interval between transmission of output data 18 13 6 Operation principle There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block The first two are fast 8 ms cycle time while the others are slow 100 ms cycle time Each instance has 16 binary inputs to which 16 independent signals can be connected Connected signals are sent through MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent MULTICMDRCV located on a dif...

Page 1083: ... There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to Each server can be configured with IP address IP port number and protocol format The format can be either syslog RFC 5424 or Common Event Format CEF from ArcSight 18 15 2 Settings Table 814 ACTIVLOG Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ExtLogSrv1Type Off SYSLOG UDP IP SYSLOG TCP IP CEF TCP IP Off Exte...

Page 1084: ...al log server 4 type ExtLogSrv4Port 1 65535 1 514 External log server 4 port number ExtLogSrv4IP 0 18 IP Address 1 127 0 0 1 External log server 4 IP address ExtLogSrv5Type Off SYSLOG UDP IP SYSLOG TCP IP CEF TCP IP Off External log server 5 type ExtLogSrv5Port 1 65535 1 514 External log server 5 port number ExtLogSrv5IP 0 18 IP Address 1 127 0 0 1 External log server 5 IP address ExtLogSrv6Type O...

Page 1085: ...ction IED or for the transmission of only binary signals up to 192 in the other IEDs The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for any purpose for example communication scheme related signals transfer trip and or other binary signals between IEDs Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with a Line Data Communication Module LCDM The LDCMs then act as ...

Page 1086: ...51 2 en vsd LDCMRecBinStat3 COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL IEC05000451 V2 EN Figure 493 LDCMRecBinStat function block 19 1 4 Signals Table 815 LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals Name Type Description COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message N...

Page 1087: ... message NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non valid address LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal i...

Page 1088: ...lues are substituted LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link 19 1 5 Settings Table 818 LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ChannelMode Blocked Normal OutOfService Normal Channel mode of LDCM 0 OFF 1 ON 2 OutOfService TerminalNo 0 255 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential communication RemoteTermNo 0 255 1 0 Terminal number...

Page 1089: ...t values ComFailAlrmDel 5 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error signal is activated ComFailResDel 5 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error signal is reset RedChSwTime 5 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in redundant channel RedChRturnTime 5 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from redundant channel AsymDelay 20 00 20 00 ms 0 01 0 00 Asymmetric delay when co...

Page 1090: ...d current values ComFailAlrmDel 5 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error signal is activated ComFailResDel 5 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error signal is reset RedChSwTime 5 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in redundant channel RedChRturnTime 5 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from redundant channel AsymDelay 20 00 20 00 ms 0 01 0 00 Asymmetric delay...

Page 1091: ...t Description CommStatus BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 SyncErr 2 No RXD 3 LocalGPSErr 4 RemGPSErr 5 LocAndRemG PSErr 6 LocalADErr 7 RemADErr 8 LocAndRemA DErr 9 AddressErr 10 FreqConfErr 11 LatencyConf Err Status of communication link Table 823 LDCMRecBinStat3 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description CommStatus BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 SyncErr 2 No RXD 3 LocalGPSErr 4 RemGPSErr 5 LocAndRemG PSErr 6 LocalADEr...

Page 1092: ...arate addressing is included in the data field The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the correct equipment There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the messages up Each terminal in the system is given a number The terminal is then programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number If the CRC function detects a faulty message th...

Page 1093: ...ls Name Type Default Description CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group1 line L1 to remote end CT1L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group1 line L2 to remote end CT1L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group1 line L3 to remote end CT1N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group1 neutral N to remote end CT2L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT group2 lin...

Page 1094: ...1088 ...

Page 1095: ...erests of our customers both the IED and the tools that are accessing the IED are protected by means of authorization handling The authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED local through the local HMI remote through the communication ports The IED users can be created deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management tool 1MRK502052 UEN B Sec...

Page 1096: ...perate different areas of the IED and tools functionality The pre defined user types are given in Table 825 Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when writing particular data to the IED from PCM600 The meaning of the legends used in the table R Read W Write No access rights Section 20 1MRK502052 UEN B Basic IED functions 1090 Technical manual ...

Page 1097: ...ading database loading from XML file R W R W R W File dumping database dumping to XML file R W R W R W File transfer FTP file transfer R W R W R W R W R W File transfer limited FTP file transfer R R W R R W R W R W R W File Transfer SPA File Transfer R W R W Database access for normal user R R W R R W R W R W R W User administration user management FTP File Transfer R R W R R R R R W User administ...

Page 1098: ... User identity field so upon pressing the key the user can change the user name by browsing the list of users with the up and down arrows After choosing the right user name the user must press the E key again When it comes to password upon pressing the key the following character will show up After all the letters are introduced passwords are case sensitive choose OK and press the key again If eve...

Page 1099: ...s as well as perform control actions ENGINEER Engineer Can create and load configurations and change settings for the IED and also run commands and manage disturbances INSTALLER Installer Can load configurations and change settings for the IED SECADM Security administrator Can change role assignments and security settings Can deploy certificates SECAUD Security auditor Can view audit logs RBACMNT ...

Page 1100: ...denied until communication is re established All communication between the central management and the IEDs is protected using secure communication Customers using SDM600 are required to generate and distribute certificates during the engineering process of the substation These certificates ensure mutual trust between IED and for example SDM600 FTP PCM600 and other system Table 828 Authority relate...

Page 1101: ...king timeout 20 3 FTP access with password FTPACCS 20 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number FTP access with SSL FTPACCS 20 3 2 FTP access with TLS FTPACCS The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate with TLS The automatic negotiation mode acts on configured port number 21 and s...

Page 1102: ...nd FTP with Explicit SSL PasvPortStart 0 65515 1 49200 First TCP data port for PASV PasvPortEnd 0 65535 1 49232 Last TCP data port for PASV 20 4 Authority status ATHSTAT 20 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Authority status ATHSTAT 20 4 2 Functionality Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function b...

Page 1103: ...ngly into the IED and it was blocked the output USRBLKED the fact that at least one user is logged on the output LOGGEDON Whenever one of the two events occurs the corresponding output USRBLKED or LOGGEDON is activated The output can for example be connected on Event EVENT function block for LON SPA The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus 20 5 Self supervision with internal event l...

Page 1104: ...ion Checking of digitized measuring signals Other alarms for example hardware and time synchronization The self supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI from the Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS SCS system Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self supervision function can be reviewed The information can be found under Main menu Dia...

Page 1105: ...Set Reset OR e g IOM2 Error e g IO n Error OR OR Internal FAIL Set Reset LON ERROR Watchdog RTE fatal error RTE Appl fail RTE OK IEC61850 not ready RTCERROR FTF fatal error RTC OK TIMESYNCHERROR Time reset SYNCH OK Settings changed NUMFAIL Set Reset OR Internal WARN Set Reset OR NUMWARNING OR 1 second pulse SETCHGD RTCERROR en04000519 1 vsd IEC04000519 V2 EN Figure 500 Software self supervision IE...

Page 1106: ...Internal Fail status Internal fail This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active LMDERROR WATCHDOG APPERROR RTEERROR or any of the HW dependent signals WARNING Internal Warning status Internal warning This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active RTCERROR IEC61850ERROR TIMESYNCHERROR RTCERROR Real Time Clock status R...

Page 1107: ... Description Displayed on local HMI as Reasons for activation PSM PSM Error Power Supply Module Error status PSM1 Activated if the module has a hardware error BIM BIM Error Binary In Module Error status BIMn Activated if the module has a hardware error n slot number BOM BOM Error Binary Out Module Error status BOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error n slot number IOM IOM Error In Out Mod...

Page 1108: ...orm er Module Error status TRM41 20 5 5 2 Supervision of analog inputs The analog signals to the A D converter is internally distributed into two different converters one with low amplification and one with high amplification When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels a direct comparison of the two A D converter channels can be performed If the validation fails the CPU will be in...

Page 1109: ...o groups of parameter settings related to time System time Synchronization The System time group relates to setting the on off and start end of the Daylight Saving Time DST for the local time zone in relation to Coordinated Universal Time UTC The Synchronization group relates to selecting the coarse and fine synchronization sources As well as defining the synchronization master and accuracy levels...

Page 1110: ...me synchronization mode for application SyncAccLevel Class T5 1us Class T4 4us Unspecified Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy Table 837 BININPUT Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ModulePosition 3 16 1 3 Hardware position of IO module for time synchronization BinaryInput 1 16 1 1 Binary input number for time synchronization BinDetection PositiveE...

Page 1111: ...March April May June July August September October November December March Month in year when daylight time starts DayInWeek Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts WeekInMonth Last First Second Third Fourth Last Week in month when daylight time starts UTCTimeOfDay 24 00 23 30 00 30 00 00 00 30 48 00 1 00 UTC Time of day in hours when d...

Page 1112: ...h in year when daylight time ends DayInWeek Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends WeekInMonth Last First Second Third Fourth Last Week in month when daylight time ends UTCTimeOfDay 24 00 23 30 00 30 00 00 00 30 48 00 1 00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time ends Section 20 1MRK502052 UEN B Basic IED functions 1106 Technical manu...

Page 1113: ...9 00 9 30 10 00 10 30 11 00 11 30 12 00 12 45 13 00 14 00 1 00 Local time from UTC Table 843 IRIG B Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SynchType BNC Opto Opto Type of synchronization TimeDomain LocalTime UTC LocalTime Time domain Encoding IRIG B 1344 1344TZ IRIG B Type of encoding TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ PlusTZ PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard 1MRK502052 UE...

Page 1114: ...ently from each other See figure 501 SW time Time Regulator fast or slow Time tagging and general synchronisation Time Regulator Setting see technical reference manual Comm unication Events Synchronization for differential protection ECHO mode or GPS Diff comm unication IEC 61850 9 2 Connected when GPS time is used for differential protection IEC08000287 2 en vsd External Synchronization sources T...

Page 1115: ...ial protection is based on the hardware clock Thus there is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock The synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only when GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre IEEE 1344 is used for differential protection The two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock synchronization unit with two modes fast and sl...

Page 1116: ...ng Synchronization principle From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels Function Synchronization from a higher level Optional synchronization of modules at a lower level IEC09000342 1 en vsd IEC09000342 V1 EN Figure 503 Synchronization principle A function is said t...

Page 1117: ...et and the following message also has a large offset the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500 milliseconds If the offset is more than the threshold the clock jumps a whole number of seconds so the remaining offset is less than 500ms The remaining offset is then slowly adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is remov...

Page 1118: ... coarse time synch source However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only The only reason to use SNTP as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine source The combination SNTP as both fine and coarse source shall not be used SNTP server requirements The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network that is not more than 4 5 switches or routers away from the IED The SNTP serv...

Page 1119: ...for any other binary input If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available a simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED The definition of a minute...

Page 1120: ...lse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that the fourth pulse will occur on a minute border After the first three minutes the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or if the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up time If the minute pulse is removed for example for an ...

Page 1121: ...module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG B clocks as IRIG B previously did not have any year information IEEE1344 is compatible with IRIG B and contains year information and information of the time zone 20 6 4 Technical data Table 844 Time synchronization time tagging Function Value Time tagging resolution events and sampled measurement values 1 ms Time tagging error with ...

Page 1122: ...up 3 as active ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active ACTGRP5 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 5 as active ACTGRP6 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 6 as active Table 846 ACTVGRP Output signals Name Type Description GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active GRP5 BOOLEAN Setti...

Page 1123: ...ly from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED To do this PCM600 must be used The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary Input signals tha...

Page 1124: ...ock has an input where the number of setting groups used is defined Switching can only be done within that number of groups The number of setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool 20 8 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK 20 8 1 Functionality Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED configu...

Page 1125: ...ple The Change lock function CHNGLCK is configured using ACT The function when activated will still allow the following changes of the IED state that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED Monitoring Reading events Resetting events Reading disturbance data Clear disturbances Reset LEDs Reset counters and other runtime component states Control operations Set system time Enter and exit from test ...

Page 1126: ...n However if during TESTMODE operation power is removed and later restored the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED No settings will be changed thus mistakes are avoided 20 9 2 Function block TESTMODE IED_TEST TEST IED_TEST BLOCK NOEVENT INP...

Page 1127: ... 20 9 5 Operation principle Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED Set the IED in test mode by configuration activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE setting TestMode to On in the local HMI under Main menu TEST IED test mode While the IED is in test mode the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows...

Page 1128: ...0 10 IED identifiers TERMINALID 20 10 1 Functionality IED identifiers TERMINALID function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the system not only in the substation but in a whole region or a country Use only characters A Z a z and 0 9 in station object and unit names 20 10 2 Settings Table 853 TERMINALID Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Station...

Page 1129: ...Factory defined settings The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in the case of maintenance repair interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation Systems and upgrading The factory made settings can not be changed by the customer They can only be viewed The settings are found in the local HMI under Main menu Diagnostics IED status...

Page 1130: ...BI function is used within the Application Configuration Tool ACT in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in for one IED configuration 20 12 2 Function block IEC05000434 2 en vsd SMBI VIN1 VIN2 VIN3 VIN4 VIN5 VIN6 VIN7 VIN8 VIN9 VIN10 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 IEC05000434 V2 EN Figure 509 SM...

Page 1131: ...ix for binary inputs SMBI function see figure 509 receives its inputs from the real hardware binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool SMT or ACT and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs BI1 to BI10 The inputs and outputs as well as the whole block can be given a user defined name These names will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be connected...

Page 1132: ...n Signal Matrix Tool BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool 20 13 4 Operation principle The Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO function see figure 510 rec...

Page 1133: ...on 20 14 2 Function block SMMI AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 IEC05000440 vsd IEC05000440 V3 EN Figure 511 SMMI function block 20 14 3 Signals Table 857 SMMI Input signals Name Type Default Description AI1 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input AI2 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input AI3 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input AI4 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input AI5 REAL ...

Page 1134: ...or function block analyses the connected four analog signals three phases and neutral and calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude phase angle frequency true RMS value harmonics sequence components and so on This information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in ACT for example protection measurement or monitoring functions 20 15 2 ...

Page 1135: ... phase L3 or L3 L1 quantity GRP1N STRING Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity Table 860 SMAI1 Output signals Name Type Description SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT reference function G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3 phase group G1AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 1 G1AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 2 G1AI3 GROUP SIGNAL ...

Page 1136: ...oup 2 analog input 3 phase group G2AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 1 G2AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 2 G2AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3 G2AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 4 G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample 20 15 4 Settings Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available Internal nomina...

Page 1137: ...e InternalDFTRef DFTRefGrp1 DFTRefGrp2 DFTRefGrp3 DFTRefGrp4 DFTRefGrp5 DFTRefGrp6 DFTRefGrp7 DFTRefGrp8 DFTRefGrp9 DFTRefGrp10 DFTRefGrp11 DFTRefGrp12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef DFT reference ConnectionType Ph N Ph Ph Ph N Input connection type AnalogInputType Voltage Current Voltage Analog input signal type Table 864 SMAI1 Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Desc...

Page 1138: ... or residual value either voltage or current see figure 512 and figure 513 SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired phase angle RMS value frequency and frequency derivates etc 244 values in total The BLOCK input will force all outputs to value zero if BLOCK is TRUE 1 System phase rotation and frequency are defined using the PhaseRotation and Frequency set...

Page 1139: ...nType is Ph N all three inputs GRPxL1 GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage If only one phase phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph Ph the user is advised to connect two not three of the inputs GRPxL1 GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the same voltage input as shown in figure 514 to make SMAI calculate a positive sequence voltage SMAI...

Page 1140: ...ctionality Global base values function GBASVAL is used to provide global values common for all applicable functions within the IED One set of global values consists of values for current voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of base values This facilitates consistency throughout...

Page 1141: ...0 parameter setting tree 20 17 3 Settings Table 868 PRIMVAL Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Frequency 50 0 60 0 Hz 10 0 50 0 Rated system frequency PhaseRotation Normal L1L2L3 Inverse L3L2L1 Normal L1L2L3 System phase rotation 20 18 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM 20 18 1 Functionality Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two set...

Page 1142: ...IGNAL Group 2 three phase analog input from second SMAI Table 870 3PHSUM Output signals Name Type Description SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT reference function AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase inputs AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both SMAI blocks AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 2 sig...

Page 1143: ...eqMeasMinVal 5 200 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in of UBase 20 18 5 Operation principle Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three phase signals from Signal matrix for analog inputs function SMAI In the same way the BLOCK input will reset all the outputs of the function to 0 20 19 Denial of service DOS 20 19 1 Functionality The Denial of service functions DOSFRNT DOSLANAB ...

Page 1144: ... BOOLEAN Ethernet link status WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state Table 874 DOSLANAB Output signals Name Type Description LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state Table 875 DOSLANCD Output signals Name Type Description LI...

Page 1145: ... 4 DiscardAll 5 StopPoll Frame rate control state Quota INTEGER Quota level in percent 0 100 Table 878 DOSLANCD Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description DoSStatus INTEGER 0 Off 1 Normal 2 Throttle 3 DiscardLow 4 DiscardAll 5 StopPoll Frame rate control state Quota INTEGER Quota level in percent 0 100 20 19 6 Operation principle The Denial of service functions DOSFRNT DOSLANAB and DOS...

Page 1146: ...es the Ethernet link status WARNING indicates that communication frame rate is higher than normal ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication Section 20 1MRK502052 UEN B Basic IED functions 1140 Technical manual ...

Page 1147: ...dware 21 1 Overview 21 1 1 Variants of case size with local HMI display IEC04000458 2 en psd IEC04000458 V2 EN Figure 519 1 2 19 case with local HMI display 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1141 Technical manual ...

Page 1148: ...n psd IEC05000762 V2 EN Figure 520 3 4 19 case with local HMI display IEC04000460 2 en psd IEC04000460 V2 EN Figure 521 1 1 19 case with local HMI display Section 21 1MRK502052 UEN B IED hardware 1142 Technical manual ...

Page 1149: ... 1 2 PG V 3 EN 1MRK002801 AC 2 670 1 2 PG V3 EN Module Rear Positions PSM X11 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X31 and X32 etc to X51 and X52 SLM X301 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or RS485 X302 LDCM or RS485 X303 OEM X311 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or GTM X312 X313 TRM X401 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1143 Technical manual ...

Page 1150: ...MRK002801 AC 3 670 1 2 PG V3 EN Module Rear Positions PSM X11 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X31 and X32 etc to X101 and X102 SLM X301 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or RS485 X302 LDCM or RS485 X303 OEM X311 A B C D LDCM RS485 or GTM X312 X313 TRM X401 Section 21 1MRK502052 UEN B IED hardware 1144 Technical manual ...

Page 1151: ...C 4 670 1 2 PG V3 EN Module Rear Positions PSM X11 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X31 and X32 etc to X71 and X72 SLM X301 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or RS485 X302 LDCM or RS485 X303 OEM X311 A B C D LDCM RS485 or GTM X312 X313 X322 X323 TRM 1 X401 TRM 2 X411 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1145 Technical manual ...

Page 1152: ...MRK002801 AC 5 670 1 2 PG V3 EN Module Rear Positions PSM X11 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X31 and X32 etc to X161 and X162 SLM X301 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or RS485 X302 LDCM or RS485 X303 OEM X311 A B C D LDCM RS485 or GTM X312 X313 TRM X401 Section 21 1MRK502052 UEN B IED hardware 1146 Technical manual ...

Page 1153: ...C 6 670 1 2 PG V3 EN Module Rear Positions PSM X11 BIM BOM SOM IOM or MIM X31 and X32 etc to X131 and X132 SLM X301 A B C D LDCM IRIG B or RS485 X302 LDCM or RS485 X303 OEM X311 A B C D LDCM RS485 or GTM X312 X313 X322 X323 TRM 1 X401 TRM 2 X411 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1147 Technical manual ...

Page 1154: ... BIM Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs Binary output module BOM Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double pole command outputs including supervision function Binary I O module IOM Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs 10 outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs Line data communication modules LDCM short range medium range long range X21 Modules used for digital communication t...

Page 1155: ...plane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector The NUM has one PMC slot 32 bit IEEE P1386 1 compliant and two PC MIP slots onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC PC MIP slots and external PCI accesses through the backplane are buffe...

Page 1156: ...module PSM 21 2 3 1 Introduction The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation between the IED and the battery system An internal fail alarm output is available 21 2 3 2 Design There are two types of the power supply module They are designed for different DC input voltage ranges see table 886 The power supply module contains a built in self Section 21 ...

Page 1157: ...10 A during 0 1 s 21 2 4 Local human machine interface Local HMI Refer to section Local HMI for information 21 2 5 Transformer input module TRM 21 2 5 1 Introduction The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers The module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs ...

Page 1158: ...nnels 12 current channels 6 current channels The rated values and channel type measurement or protection of the current inputs are selected at order Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with current transformers intended for protection purposes due to limitations in overload characteristics The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM For configuration of the input and output signa...

Page 1159: ... Current Ir 1 or 5 A 0 2 40 Ir Operative range 0 100 x Ir Permissive overload 4 Ir cont 100 Ir for 1 s Burden 150 mVA at Ir 5 A 20 mVA at Ir 1 A Ac voltage Ur 110 V 0 5 288 V Operative range 0 340 V Permissive overload 420 V cont 450 V 10 s Burden 20 mVA at 110 V Frequency fr 50 60 Hz 5 max 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1153 Technical...

Page 1160: ...as twelve analog inputs 2 PC MIP slots and 1 PMC slot The PC MIP slot is used for PC MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according to table 889 The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board Table 889 PC MIP cards and PMC cards PC MIP cards PMC cards SR LDCM SLM LR LDCM OEM 1 ch MR LDCM OEM 2 ch X21 LDCM IRIG B RS485 21 2 6 2 Design The Analog digital conversion module input signals a...

Page 1161: ...rted to the numerical module NUM with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1 2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency PMC PCI to PCI PC MIP PC MIP AD3 AD1 AD2 AD4 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 1 2v 2 5v level shift en05000474 vsd IEC05000474 V1 EN Figure 525 The ADM layout 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 11...

Page 1162: ...onfiguration of the input signals refer to section Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals When blocked a hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency making it possible to use the input for pulse counting The blocking frequency may also be set Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operat...

Page 1163: ...1 EN Operation Operation uncertain No operation This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module NUM The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the input despite the low steady state power consumption which is shown in figure 527 and 528 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1157 Technical manual ...

Page 1164: ... input inrush current for the standard version of BIM en07000105 1 vsd 50 5 5 ms mA IEC07000105 V2 EN Figure 528 Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse counting capabilities Section 21 1MRK502052 UEN B IED hardware 1158 Technical manual ...

Page 1165: ...nput module status BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 value BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2 value BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3 value BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4 value BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5 value BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6 value BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7 value Table continues on next page 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1159 Technical manual ...

Page 1166: ...0 001 0 001 Debounce time for binary inputs OscBlock 1 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit OscRelease 1 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit 21 2 7 5 Monitored data Table 892 BIM Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description STATUS BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Binary input module status 21 2 7 6 Technical data Table 893 BIM Binary input module Quantity Rated value Nominal range Binary inputs 16 DC...

Page 1167: ...put Counter input frequency 10 pulses s max Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses s max Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1 40 Hz Release settable 1 30 Hz Debounce filter Settable 1 20 ms Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range 21 2 8 Binary output modules BOM 21 2 8 1 Introduction The binary output modul...

Page 1168: ...ing the trip coil current a parallel reinforcement is required For configuration of the output signals refer to section Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO xx00000299 vsd 2 1 3 Output module IEC00000299 V1 EN Figure 530 Relay pair example 1 Output connection from relay 1 2 Output signal power source connection 3 Output connection from relay 2 Section 21 1MRK502052 UEN B IED hardware 1162 Technic...

Page 1169: ...ry output 2 BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3 BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4 BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5 BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6 BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7 BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8 BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9 BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10 BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11 BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12 Table continues on next page 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1163 Technic...

Page 1170: ...t part of IOM module status 21 2 8 4 Settings Table 897 BOM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On On Operation Off On 21 2 8 5 Monitored data Table 898 BOM Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description STATUS BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Binary output part of IOM module status BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 1 value BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Nor...

Page 1171: ...EAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 5 status BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 6 value BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 6 force BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 6 status BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 7 value BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 7 force BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 7 status BO8VALUE BO...

Page 1172: ...0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 12 status BO13VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 13 value BO13FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 13 force BO13 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 13 status BO14VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 14 value BO14FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 14 force BO14 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 14 status BO...

Page 1173: ...N 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 19 status BO20VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 20 value BO20FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 20 force BO20 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 20 status BO21VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 21 value BO21FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 21 force BO21 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 21 status ...

Page 1174: ... 1 s Per process connector pin continuous 8 A 10 A 12 A Making capacity at inductive load with L R 10 ms 0 2 s 1 0 s 30 A 10 A Breaking capacity for AC cos j 0 4 250 V 8 0 A Breaking capacity for DC with L R 40 ms 48 V 1 A 110 V 0 4 A 125 V 0 35 A 220 V 0 2 A 250 V 0 15 A Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated The activation time for...

Page 1175: ...mechanical relay outputs with change over contacts The SOM consists mainly of An MCU A CAN driver 6 static relays outputs 6 electromechanical relay outputs A DC DC converter Connectors interfacing CAN bus to backplane CBM IO connectors to binary outputs 2 pcs The following parts are supervised Interruption in relay coil Short circuit of relay coil Driver failure Z IEC09000974 1 en vsd IEC09000974 ...

Page 1176: ...O4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4 BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5 BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6 BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 7 BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 8 BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 9 BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 10 BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 11 BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 12 Table 901 SOM Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Static binary out...

Page 1177: ... BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 2 force BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 2 status BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 3 value BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 3 force BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 3 status BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 4 value BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 4 force BO4 BOOL...

Page 1178: ...VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 9 value BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 9 force BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 9 status BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 10 value BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 10 force BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 10 status BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 11 value BO11FORCE BOOL...

Page 1179: ... 10 A Breaking capacity for DC with L R 40 ms 48 V 1 A 110 V 0 4 A 60 V 0 75 A 125 V 0 35 A 220 V 0 2 A 250 V 0 15 A Operating time 1 ms 1 ms Table 905 SOM Static Output module data reference standard IEC 61810 2 Electromechanical relay outputs Function of quantity Trip and signal relays Max system voltage 250 V AC DC Number of outputs 6 Test voltage across open contact 1 min 1000 V rms Current ca...

Page 1180: ...tected contacts Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn off from connected contacts and increase the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times This is achieved with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady state current see figure 527 Inputs are debounced by software Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply earth faults...

Page 1181: ...put contacts named XB to rear position X32 X42 and so on The binary input output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of the contacts The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary input output module 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1175 Technical manua...

Page 1182: ... Binary input 7 value BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8 value OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning Table 907 IOMOUT Input signals Name Type Default Description BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1 BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2 BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3 BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4 BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5 BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6 BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7 B...

Page 1183: ... Description BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 1 value BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 1 force BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 1 status BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 2 value BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 2 force BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 2 status BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 3 value BO3FOR...

Page 1184: ...AN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 8 value BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 8 force BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 8 status BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 9 value BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 9 force BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 9 status BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 10 value BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Fo...

Page 1185: ...put Counter input frequency 10 pulses s max Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1 40 Hz Release settable 1 30 Hz Debounce filter Settable 1 20 ms Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range Table 912 IOM Binary input output module contact data reference standard IEC 61810 2 Function or quantity Trip and signal relay...

Page 1186: ...activation is possible with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life Maximum two relays per BOM IOM should be activated continuously due to power dissipation Table 913 IOM with MOV and IOM 220 250 V 110mA contact data reference standard IEC 61810 2 Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays parallel reed rel...

Page 1187: ...he 20 to 20 mA range from for example OLTC position temperature or pressure transducers The module has six independent galvanically separated channels 21 2 11 2 Design The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated protection filtering reference A D conversion and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest o...

Page 1188: ...nals Table 914 MIM Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Milliampere input module status CH1 REAL Analog input 1 CH2 REAL Analog input 2 CH3 REAL Analog input 3 Table continues on next page Section 21 1MRK502052 UEN B IED hardware 1182 Technical manual ...

Page 1189: ...current of transducer for Channel 2 IMaxCh2 25 00 25 00 mA 0 01 20 00 Max current of transducer for Channel 2 ValueMinCh2 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 4 000 Min primary value corr to IMinCh2 ValueMaxCh2 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 20 000 Max primary value corr to IMaxCh2 EnDeadBandCh3 Off On Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for channel 3 DeadBandCh3 0 00 20 00 mA 0 01 1 0...

Page 1190: ...de deadband reporting for channel 6 DeadBandCh6 0 00 20 00 mA 0 01 1 00 Deadband amplitude for channel 6 IMinCh6 25 00 25 00 mA 0 01 4 00 Min current of transducer for Channel 6 IMaxCh6 25 00 25 00 mA 0 01 20 00 Max current of transducer for Channel 6 ValueMinCh6 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 4 000 Min primary value corr to IMinCh6 ValueMaxCh6 10000000000 000 10000000000 000 0 001 20 000 M...

Page 1191: ...munication module SLM is used for SPA IEC 60870 5 103 DNP3 and LON communication The module has two optical communication ports for plastic plastic plastic glass or glass glass One port is used for serial communication SPA IEC 60870 5 103 and DNP3 port and one port is dedicated for LON communication 21 2 12 2 Design The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM mod...

Page 1192: ...ctors are viewed from the rear side of the IED contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and contact 1 in the lowest position 21 2 12 3 Technical data Table 918 SLM LON port Quantity Range or value Optical connector Glass fiber type ST Plastic fiber type HFBR snap in Fiber optical budget Glass fiber 11 dB 1000m 3000 ft typically Plastic fiber 7 dB 10m 35ft typically Fiber diameter Glass fiber 6...

Page 1193: ...idrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave This variant requires however a control of the output The 4 wire connection has separated signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves No special control signal is needed in this case 21 2 13 2 Design The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module RS485 co...

Page 1194: ... pinouts A second 2 pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO ground It can be used in two combinations like Unconnected No ground of the IO part Soft grounded The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV 21 2 13 3 Technical data Table 921 Galvanic RS485 communication module Quantity Range or value Communication speed 2400 19200 bauds External connectors RS 485 6 p...

Page 1195: ...o optical ports with ST connectors 21 2 14 2 Functionality The Optical Ethernet module OEM is used when communication systems according to IEC 61850 8 1 have been implemented 21 2 14 3 Design The Optical Ethernet module OEM is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card on the ADM The OEM is a 100BASE FXmodule and available as a single channel or double channel unit IEC05000472 1 en Original vsd 1 ...

Page 1196: ...module sends and rereceives data to and from another LDCM module The IEEE ANSI standard format is used The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer The module has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 540 Line data communication module LDCM Each module has one optical port one for each remote end to which the IED communicates Alternative cards for Long range 1550 ...

Page 1197: ...mat with two PCI connectors and one I O ST type connector C IEC06000393 1 en Original vsd IEC06000393 V2 EN Figure 541 The MR LDCM and LR LDCM layout PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I O FC PC type connector 21 2 15 3 Technical data 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1191 Technical manual ...

Page 1198: ...ation C37 94 implementation Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous Transmission rate Data rate 2 Mb s 64 kbit s 2 Mb s 64 kbit s 2 Mb s 64 kbit s Clock source Internal or derived from received signal Internal or derived from received signal Internal or derived from received signal depending on optical budget calculation C37 94 originally defined just for multimode using same header ...

Page 1199: ...e X 21 LDCM module 1 2 3 4 en07000239 wmf 1 8 9 15 IEC07000239 V1 EN Figure 543 The X 21 LDCM module external connectors 1 Earth selection connector for IO screw terminals 2 pole 2 Earth pin 3 Soft earth pin see figure 544 4 X 21 Micro D sub 15 pole male connector according to the V11 X 27 balanced version 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1193 Technical manual ...

Page 1200: ...eave the connector without any connection 3 Soft earth Connect soft earth pin 3 see figure 543 X 21 connector Table 924 Pinout for the X 21 communication connector Pin number Signal 1 Shield earth 2 TXD A 3 Control A 4 RXD A 6 Signal timing A 8 Earth 9 TXD B 10 Control B 11 RXD B 13 Signal timing B 5 7 12 14 15 Not used 21 2 16 3 Functionality The data format is HDLC The speed for the transmission...

Page 1201: ...e The DTE Signal Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices 21 2 16 4 Technical data Table 925 Galvanic X 21 line data communication module X 21 LDCM Quantity Range or value Connector X 21 Micro D sub 15 pole male 1 27 mm 0 050 pitch Connector ground selection 2 pole screw terminal Standard CCITT X21 Communication speed 64 kbit s Insu...

Page 1202: ...hnical data Table 927 GPS time synchronization module GTM Function Range or value Accuracy Receiver 1µs relative UTC Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new position or after power loss longer than 1 month 30 minutes Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer than 48 hours 15 minutes Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter than 48 hours 5 minutes 21 2 ...

Page 1203: ...e SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM Choose cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max 26 dB at 1 6 GHz Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the antenna or to the receiver Short circuit the end of the antenna cable with some metal device when first connected to the antenna When the antenna is connected to the cable connect t...

Page 1204: ...accurate time synchronizing of the IED from a station clock The Pulse Per Second PPS input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC 61850 9 2LE is used Electrical BNC and optical connection ST for 0XX and 12X IRIG B support 21 2 19 2 Design The IRIG B module has two inputs One input is for the IRIG B that can handle both a pulse width modulated signal also called unmodulated and an amplitude modul...

Page 1205: ...o Opto Type of synchronization TimeDomain LocalTime UTC LocalTime Time domain Encoding IRIG B 1344 1344TZ IRIG B Type of encoding TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ PlusTZ PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard 21 2 19 4 Technical data Table 930 IRIG B Quantity Rated value Number of channels IRIG B 1 Number of optical channels 1 Electrical connector Electrical connector IRIG B BNC Pulse width modulated 5 Vpp Am...

Page 1206: ... k ohm Optical connector Optical connector IRIG B Type ST Type of fibre 62 5 125 μm multimode fibre Supported formats IRIG B 00x Accuracy 1μs 21 3 Dimensions 21 3 1 Case without rear cover C B D E A IEC08000164 2 en vsd IEC08000164 V2 EN Figure 547 Case without rear cover Section 21 1MRK502052 UEN B IED hardware 1200 Technical manual ...

Page 1207: ...U 1 2 x 19 265 9 223 7 201 1 252 9 205 7 190 5 203 7 465 1 187 6 482 6 6U 3 4 x 19 265 9 336 0 201 1 252 9 318 0 190 5 316 0 465 1 187 6 482 6 6U 1 1 x 19 265 9 448 3 201 1 252 9 430 3 190 5 428 3 465 1 187 6 482 6 The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1201 Technical manual ...

Page 1208: ... Case size Tolerance Cut out dimensions mm A 1 B 1 C D 6U 1 2 x 19 210 1 254 3 4 0 10 0 12 5 6U 3 4 x 19 322 4 254 3 4 0 10 0 12 5 6U 1 1 x 19 434 7 254 3 4 0 10 0 12 5 E 188 6 mm without rear protection cover 229 6 mm with rear protection cover Section 21 1MRK502052 UEN B IED hardware 1202 Technical manual ...

Page 1209: ... F IEC05000505 V1 EN Figure 551 Panel cut out dimensions for side by side flush mounting Case size mm Tolerance A 1 B 1 C 1 D 1 E 1 F 1 G 1 6U 1 2 x 19 214 0 259 3 240 4 190 5 34 4 13 2 6 4 diam 6U 3 4 x 19 326 4 259 3 352 8 190 5 34 4 13 2 6 4 diam 6U 1 1 x 19 438 7 259 3 465 1 190 5 34 4 13 2 6 4 diam 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1203 Technical manual ...

Page 1210: ...nal resistor unit for high impedance differential protection WARNING USE EXTREME CAUTION Dangerously high voltages might be present on this equipment especially on the plate with resistors Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object protected with this equipment is de energized If required by national law standard enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover or in a separate box Sect...

Page 1211: ... EN Figure 553 Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit en06000234 eps inches 18 98 18 31 0 33 7 50 10 47 7 68 0 79 1 50 IEC06000234 V2 EN Figure 554 Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1205 Technical manual ...

Page 1212: ...zes 1 2 x 19 3 4 x 19 1 1 x 19 1 4 x 19 RHGS6 6U Only a single case can be mounted in each cut out on the cubicle panel for class IP54 protection Flush mounting cannot be used for side by side mounted IEDs when IP54 class must be fulfilled Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases side by side in one 1 cut out To obtain IP54 class protection an additional factory mounted sealing must...

Page 1213: ...unting details PosNo Description Quantity Type 1 Sealing strip used to obtain IP54 class The sealing strip is factory mounted between the case and front plate 2 Fastener 4 3 Groove 4 Screw self tapping 4 2 9x9 5 mm 5 Joining point of sealing strip 6 Panel 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1207 Technical manual ...

Page 1214: ...mounting of IED size 1 2 x 19 or 3 4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side by side mounted IEDs or IEDs together with RHGS cases is to be selected so that the total size equals 19 Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and the angles on the IED Screws with wrong dimension may damage...

Page 1215: ...3 EN Figure 557 19 panel rack mounting details The required torque for the screws is 3 5 Nm Pos Description Quantity Type 1a Mounting angles which can be mounted either to the left or right side of the case 2 2 Screw 8 M4x6 3 Washer 8 M4x6 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1209 Technical manual ...

Page 1216: ...s and the angles on the IED Screws with wrong dimension may damage the PCBs inside the IED If fiber cables are bent too much the signal can be weakened Wall mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication modules with fiber connection 21 4 3 2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting IEC13000266 1 en vsd 1 2 3 4 5 6 IEC13000266 V1 EN Figure 558 Wall mounting details Section 21 1MRK502052 U...

Page 1217: ... cover recommended to be used with this type of mounting See figure 559 To reach the rear side of the IED a free space of 80 mm is required on the unhinged side 80 mm 1 3 2 IEC06000135 2 en vsd IEC06000135 V3 EN Figure 559 How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED PosNo Description Type 1 Screw M4x10 2 Screw M5x8 3 Rear protection cover Ordered separately 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 ...

Page 1218: ...se only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and the angles on the IED Screws with wrong dimension may damage the PCBs inside the IED 21 4 4 2 Mounting procedure for side by side rack mounting 3 4 2 1 IEC04000456 3 en vsd 5 IEC04000456 V3 EN Figure 560 Side by side rack mounting details The required torque for the screws is 3 5 Nm PosNo Description Quantity Type 1 Mount...

Page 1219: ...ing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base 21 4 5 Side by side flush mounting 21 4 5 1 Overview If IP54 is required it is not allowed to flush mount side by side mounted cases If your application demands side by side flush mounting the side by side mounting details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used The mounting kit has to be ordered separate...

Page 1220: ...the side for 1 2 19 case or bottom of the relay 21 4 5 2 Mounting procedure for side by side flush mounting 1 2 3 4 IEC06000181 2 en vsd IEC06000181 V2 EN Figure 562 Side by side flush mounting details RHGS6 side by side with 1 2 x 19 IED The required torque for the screws is 3 5 Nm PosNo Description Quantity Type 1 Mounting plate 2 2 3 Screw washer 16 M4x6 4 Mounting angle 2 Section 21 1MRK502052...

Page 1221: ... kg 33 lb 6U 1 1 x 19 18 kg 40 lb 21 5 2 Electrical safety Table 934 Electrical safety according to IEC 60255 27 Equipment class I protective earthed Overvoltage category III Pollution degree 2 normally only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected 21 5 3 Connection system Table 935 CT and VT circuit connectors Conne...

Page 1222: ... influence Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence Ambient temperature operate value 20 C 10 C to 55 C 0 02 C Relative humidity Operative range 10 90 0 95 10 90 Storage temperature 40 C to 70 C Table 938 Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation Dependence on Reference value Within nominal range Influence Ripple in DC auxiliary voltage Operative range max 2 ...

Page 1223: ...Hz burst disturbance 2 5 kV IEC 60255 26 100 kHz slow damped oscillatory wave immunity test 2 5 kV IEC 61000 4 18 Class III Ring wave immunity test 100 kHz 2 4 kV IEC 61000 4 12 Class IV Surge withstand capability test 2 5 kV oscillatory 4 0 kV fast transient IEEE ANSI C37 90 1 Electrostatic discharge Direct application Indirect application 15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact d...

Page 1224: ... ANSI C37 90 Impulse voltage test 5 kV 1 2 50 ms 0 5 J Insulation resistance 100 MW at 500 VDC Table 942 Environmental tests Test Type test value Reference standard Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at 25 C IEC 60068 2 1 Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at 40 C IEC 60068 2 1 Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at 70 C IEC 60068 2 2 Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at 85 C IEC 60068...

Page 1225: ...t Class II IEC 60255 21 1 Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255 21 1 Shock response test Class I IEC 60255 21 2 Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255 21 2 Bump test Class I IEC 60255 21 2 Seismic test Class II IEC 60255 21 3 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 21 IED hardware 1219 Technical manual ...

Page 1226: ...1220 ...

Page 1227: ...REX060 is used to inject voltage and current signals to the generator or motor stator and rotor circuits REX060 generates two square wave signals with different frequencies for injection into the stator and rotor circuits respectively The response from the injected voltage and currents are then measured by the REX060 unit and amplified to a level suitable for the analog voltage inputs of IED For l...

Page 1228: ...22 1 1 2 REX060 Front panel controls IEC11000053 1 en vsd IEC11000053 V1 EN Figure 563 REX060 front panel Section 22 1MRK502052 UEN B Injection equipment hardware 1222 Technical manual ...

Page 1229: ... unlock the keys A key lock LED indicates when the keypad is unlocked Moves the cursor in the direction of the arrows When the cursor is in the value change state pressing the up button increases the value and pressing the down button decreases the value Pressing the clear button cancels changes that have not been stored Pressing the enter button stores the changed value If the value is outside ra...

Page 1230: ...der to limit the exposure of the field circuit Alternatively it can be located in the excitation cubicle The surface of REX061 unit may be temporarily very hot due to heat dissipation up to about 50 C above the ambient temperature It must be installed to get a open air convection and prevent contact with combustible material to the surface Section 22 1MRK502052 UEN B Injection equipment hardware 1...

Page 1231: ...00039 2 en vsd IEC11000039 V2 EN Figure 567 REX062 measures and drilling plan REX062 shall be mounted close to the IED It is recommended that REX060 and REX062 are mounted in the same cubicle as the IED The surface of REX061 unit may be temporarily very hot due to heat dissipation up to about 65 C above the ambient temperature It must 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 22 Injection equipment hardware 1225 T...

Page 1232: ...ct voltage and current signals to the generator or motor stator and rotor circuits REX060 generates two square wave signals with different frequencies for injection into the stator and rotor circuits respectively The response from the injected voltage and currents are then measured by the REX060 unit and amplified to a level suitable for the analog voltage inputs of IED 22 2 2 Design REX060 consis...

Page 1233: ... Figure 569 Normal display content When the injection unit REX060 is energized the ABB logotype is shown followed by current REX060 revision status When the start up sequence is completed the main menu normal display content is shown The duration of the start up sequence is a few seconds LCD backlight is active during a period of 30 seconds after pressing any button Backlight activation by pressin...

Page 1234: ...ion occurrence Not applicable Overvoltage reset Stator module SIM and rotor module RIM injection outputs are protected against voltages exceeding maximum operating range 10 of rated VT DT for the stator and 75 of max voltage during gain dependent time for the rotor by a relay blocking the injection circuit This blocking is controlled by measuring the sense voltage and remains blocked by stored sta...

Page 1235: ...ut The following binary outputs exist on the REX060 INJ_BLOCKED_NC on X61 terminal 5 Indicates to the IED that the injection on X62 is blocked The reason for blocking is indicated in the REX060 LCD SAT_NO on X61 pin 6 Indicates to the IED that there is a risk of saturated amplifier on voltage and or current output at X61 indication is also given in the REX060 LCD COMMON on X61 terminal 7 Common re...

Page 1236: ... any connection to a hazardous voltage by the use of protective impedance This enables the usage of standard oscilloscope or handheld DVM The measure ports cause an additional rotor impedance of 20 MΩ per terminal to ground However the rotor calibration procedure extracts this impedance REX061 Coupling Capacitor unit Rotor Rotor Injection Measuring point Ground measuring Measuring point Ground inj...

Page 1237: ...d IEC11000041 V1 EN Figure 571 REX062 Principal design REX062 input protection REX062 limits overvoltage by a varistor at the injection output to stator Normally REX060 will interrupt the injection circuit in case of excessive over current in the injection chain Fuse within REX062 is an additional protection in case of failure within REX062 during over voltage condition A blown REX062 fuse require...

Page 1238: ... R Distribution Transformer Stator X1 7 Rotor X1 1 Rotor Injection X1 9 Ground X1 10 REX061 Coupling Capacitor unit PE X1 2 Injection A X1 4 Injection B External A X1 9 External B X1 10 I sense A X1 6 I sense B X1 8 REX062 Shunt Resistor unit PE IEC11000017 1 en vsd IEC11000017 V1 EN Figure 572 Example installation when REX062 unit is required 22 5 Technical data 22 5 1 Hardware Table 947 REX060 T...

Page 1239: ...V Burden static excitation system X1 1 to X1 7 0 5 VA at 100 V external disturbance Burden static excitation system X1 1 or X1 7 to 0 V 1 0 VA at 100 V external disturbance Burden brushless excitation system X1 1 and X1 7 to 0 V 1 5 VA at 100 V external disturbance Installation category III Pollution degree 2 Table 950 REX062 Technical data Specifications Values Case size 218 x 150 x 243 mm W x D ...

Page 1240: ...ation Indirect application 15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact discharge IEEE ANSI C37 90 3 Fast transient disturbance test 4 kV IEC 60255 26 Zone A Surge immunity test 1 2 kV and 2 4 kV 1 2 50 µs High energy IEC 60255 26 Zone A Power frequency immunity test 150 300 V 50 Hz IEC 60255 26 Zone A Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A m 3 s 100 A m cont IEC 61000 4 8 Radiated ...

Page 1241: ... J IEC 60664 1 IEC 60255 27 Insulation resistance 100 MΩ at 500V DC IEC 60255 27 Table 955 Mechanical tests Test Reference standards Requirements Vibration response test IEC 60255 21 1 Class 2 Vibration endurance test REG670 and REX060 REX061 and REX062 IEC 60255 21 1 Class 1 Class 2 Shock response test REG670 and REX060 REX061 and REX062 IEC 60255 21 2 Class 1 Class 2 Shock withstand test REG670 ...

Page 1242: ...umidity 93 95 IEC 60068 2 78 IEC 60068 2 30 22 5 3 Influencing factors Table 957 Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence Test Type test values Influence Auxiliary voltage dependence operate value 20 of EL 0 01 Ripple in DC auxiliary voltage operate value 15 of EL 0 01 Table 958 Temperature influence Test Type test values Influence Ambient temperature operate value 25 C to 55 C 0 02 C Storage tempera...

Page 1243: ...Section 23 Labels 23 1 Labels on IED Front view of IED IEC15000506 1 en vsd 1 4 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 IEC15000506 V1 EN 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 23 Labels 1237 Technical manual ...

Page 1244: ...ule MIM 4 Ordering and serial number 5 Manufacturer 6 Transformer designations 7 Transformer input module rated currents and voltages 8 Optional customer specific information 9 Order number dc supply voltage and rated frequency 10 Product type description and serial number Rear view of IED 1 2 3 4 en06000573 ep IEC06000573 V1 EN Section 23 1MRK502052 UEN B Labels 1238 Technical manual ...

Page 1245: ...ution label 3 Class 1 laser product label IEC06000575 V1 EN 4 Warning label 23 2 Labels on injection equipment Front view of injection unit REX060 IEC11000226 V1 EN 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 23 Labels 1239 Technical manual ...

Page 1246: ...dc supply voltage 1c Stator and rotor input module designations 1d Manufacturer 2 IEC11000234 1 en vsd IEC11000234 V1 EN 2 Ordering and serial number Rear view of injection unit REX060 IEC11000227 V1 EN 1 Warning label 2 Caution label 3 ESD label 4 Warning label Section 23 1MRK502052 UEN B Labels 1240 Technical manual ...

Page 1247: ...1 IEC11000229 V1 EN 1 Warning label hot surface 2 Ordering number Rear view of coupling capacitor unit REX061 IEC11000228 V1 EN 1 Warning label 2 Caution label 3 ESD label 4 Warning label 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 23 Labels 1241 Technical manual ...

Page 1248: ...2 IEC11000231 V1 EN 1 Warning label hot surface 2 Ordering number Rear view of shunt resistor unit REX062 IEC11000230 V1 EN 1 Warning label 2 Caution label 3 ESD label 4 Warning label Section 23 1MRK502052 UEN B Labels 1242 Technical manual ...

Page 1249: ...oaded from http www abb com substationautomation Connection diagrams for Customized products Connection diagram 670 series 2 0 1MRK002801 AE Connection diagrams for Configured products Connection diagram REG670 2 0 A20 1MRK002803 GA Connection diagram REG670 2 0 B30 1MRK002803 GB Connection diagram REG670 2 0 C30 1MRK002803 GC 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 24 Connection diagrams 1243 Technical manual ...

Page 1250: ...1244 ...

Page 1251: ...icated applications current dependent time characteristics are used Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections operating in series xx05000129 vsd I I I IEC05000129 V1 EN Figure 574 Three overcurrent protections operating in series en05000130 vsd Time Fault point position Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 1 IEC05000130 V1 EN Figure 575 Definit...

Page 1252: ... must be a time margin between the operation time of the protections This required time margin is dependent of following factors in a simple case with two protections in series Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co ordinated Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault Reset times of the protections Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections A...

Page 1253: ...he maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active At time t3 the protection A1 is reset that is the timer is stopped In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level the reset time shall be minimized In some applications it i...

Page 1254: ...s In case of definite time lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached or until the current drops below the reset value start value minus the hysteresis and the reset time has elapsed For definite time delay curve ANSI IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are chosen The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 158 æ ö ç ç ç æ ö ç ç è ø è ø p A t s...

Page 1255: ... where j 1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected that is when 1 i in EQUATION1193 V1 EN Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection algorithm n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled that is when a trip is given and i j is the fault current at time j For inverse time operation the in...

Page 1256: ...lue is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics there are also two additional inverse curves available the RI curve and the RD curve The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI The curve is described by equation 162 0 339 0 235 æ ö ç ç ç è ø k t s in i EQUATION1194 V1 ...

Page 1257: ...p A t s B k i C in EQUATION1196 V1 EN Equation 164 Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled There is the possibility to choose between three different reset time lags Instantaneous Reset IEC Reset ANSI Reset If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis If IEC reset is chosen the ...

Page 1258: ...d IEC set constant time reset For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are available instantaneous IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time If the current dependent type is used settings pr tr and cr must be given see equation 166 r pr t t s k i cr in æ ö ç ç ç æ ö ç ç è ø è ø EQUATION1198 V2 EN Equation 166 For RI a...

Page 1259: ... 1 tr t k I EQUATION1250 SMALL V1 EN I Imeasured Iset k 0 05 2 00 in steps of 0 01 ANSI IEEE C37 112 2 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086 B 0 0185 P 0 02 tr 0 46 ANSI Moderately Inverse A 0 0515 B 0 1140 P 0 02 tr 4 85 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A 64 07 B 0 250 P 2 0...

Page 1260: ...k I CR EQUATION1253 SMALL V1 EN I Imeasured Iset k 0 05 999 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 00 20 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 P 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 TR 0 005 100 000 in steps of 0 001 CR 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 PR 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 Table 961 RI and RD type inverse time characteristics Function Range or value Accuracy RI type inverse c...

Page 1261: ...EE C37 112 5 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086 B 0 0185 P 0 02 tr 0 46 ANSI Moderately Inverse A 0 0515 B 0 1140 P 0 02 tr 4 85 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A 64 07 B 0 250 P 2 0 tr 30 ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A 28 55 B 0 712 P 2 0 tr 13 46 ANSI Long Time Inverse A...

Page 1262: ...e A 120 P 1 0 Programmable characteristic Operate characteristic æ ö ç ç è ø P A t B k I C EQUATION1370 SMALL V1 EN Reset characteristic PR TR t k I CR EQUATION1253 SMALL V1 EN I Imeasured Iset k 0 05 999 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 00 20 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 P 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 TR 0 005 100 000 in steps of 0 001 CR 0 1 10 0 in steps...

Page 1263: ... Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic 1 P A t B k tDef I æ ö ç ç ç è ø EQUATION1249 SMALL V2 EN Reset characteristic 2 1 tr t k I EQUATION1250 SMALL V1 EN I Imeasured Iset 0 10 k 2 00 1 5 x Iset I 20 x Iset ANSI IEEE C37 112 5 0 or 160 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Invers...

Page 1264: ... IEC Long time inverse A 120 P 1 0 Programmable characteristic Operate characteristic æ ö ç ç è ø P A t B k I C EQUATION1370 SMALL V1 EN Reset characteristic PR TR t k I CR EQUATION1253 SMALL V1 EN I Imeasured Iset k 0 05 999 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 00 20 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 P 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 TR 0 005 100 000 in steps of 0 001...

Page 1265: ... protection Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic 1 P A t B k tDef I æ ö ç ç ç è ø EQUATION1249 SMALL V2 EN Reset characteristic 2 1 tr t k I EQUATION1250 SMALL V1 EN I Imeasured Iset 0 10 k 3 00 ANSI IEEE C37 112 5 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086 B ...

Page 1266: ...ltage protection Function Range or value Accuracy Type A curve æ ö ç è ø t k U U U EQUATION1436 SMALL V1 EN U Uset U Umeasured k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 5 0 or 45 ms whichever is greater Type B curve 2 0 480 32 0 5 0 035 t k U U U EQUATION1437 SMALL V2 EN k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Type C curve 3 0 480 32 0 5 0 035 t k U U U EQUATION1438 SMALL V2 EN k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Programmable c...

Page 1267: ...5 æ ö ç è ø k t U U U EQUATION1432 SMALL V1 EN U Uset U Umeasured k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Programmable curve é ù ê ú ê ú ê ú æ ö ê ú ç ëè ø û P k A t D U U B C U EQUATION1433 SMALL V1 EN U Uset U Umeasured k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 50 100 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 0 1 0 in steps of 0 1 D 0 000 60 000 in steps of 0 001 P 0 000 3 000 in steps of 0 001 1MRK...

Page 1268: ...U EQUATION1437 SMALL V2 EN k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Type C curve 3 0 480 32 0 5 0 035 t k U U U EQUATION1438 SMALL V2 EN k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Programmable curve æ ö ç è ø P k A t D U U B C U EQUATION1439 SMALL V1 EN k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 50 100 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 0 1 0 in steps of 0 1 D 0 000 60 000 in steps of 0 001 P 0 000 3 000 in st...

Page 1269: ...A070750 V2 EN Figure 579 ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 25 Inverse time characteristics 1263 Technical manual ...

Page 1270: ...A070751 V2 EN Figure 580 ANSI Very inverse time characteristics Section 25 1MRK502052 UEN B Inverse time characteristics 1264 Technical manual ...

Page 1271: ...A070752 V2 EN Figure 581 ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 25 Inverse time characteristics 1265 Technical manual ...

Page 1272: ...A070753 V2 EN Figure 582 ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics Section 25 1MRK502052 UEN B Inverse time characteristics 1266 Technical manual ...

Page 1273: ...A070817 V2 EN Figure 583 ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 25 Inverse time characteristics 1267 Technical manual ...

Page 1274: ...A070818 V2 EN Figure 584 ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics Section 25 1MRK502052 UEN B Inverse time characteristics 1268 Technical manual ...

Page 1275: ...A070819 V2 EN Figure 585 ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 25 Inverse time characteristics 1269 Technical manual ...

Page 1276: ...A070820 V2 EN Figure 586 IEC Normal inverse time characteristics Section 25 1MRK502052 UEN B Inverse time characteristics 1270 Technical manual ...

Page 1277: ...A070821 V2 EN Figure 587 IEC Very inverse time characteristics 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 25 Inverse time characteristics 1271 Technical manual ...

Page 1278: ...A070822 V2 EN Figure 588 IEC Inverse time characteristics Section 25 1MRK502052 UEN B Inverse time characteristics 1272 Technical manual ...

Page 1279: ...A070823 V2 EN Figure 589 IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 25 Inverse time characteristics 1273 Technical manual ...

Page 1280: ...A070824 V2 EN Figure 590 IEC Short time inverse time characteristics Section 25 1MRK502052 UEN B Inverse time characteristics 1274 Technical manual ...

Page 1281: ...A070825 V2 EN Figure 591 IEC Long time inverse time characteristics 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 25 Inverse time characteristics 1275 Technical manual ...

Page 1282: ...A070826 V2 EN Figure 592 RI type inverse time characteristics Section 25 1MRK502052 UEN B Inverse time characteristics 1276 Technical manual ...

Page 1283: ...A070827 V2 EN Figure 593 RD type inverse time characteristics 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 25 Inverse time characteristics 1277 Technical manual ...

Page 1284: ...GUID ACF4044C 052E 4CBD 8247 C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN Figure 594 Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection Section 25 1MRK502052 UEN B Inverse time characteristics 1278 Technical manual ...

Page 1285: ...GUID F5E0E1C2 48C8 4DC7 A84B 174544C09142 V1 EN Figure 595 Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 25 Inverse time characteristics 1279 Technical manual ...

Page 1286: ...GUID A9898DB7 90A3 47F2 AEF9 45FF148CB679 V1 EN Figure 596 Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection Section 25 1MRK502052 UEN B Inverse time characteristics 1280 Technical manual ...

Page 1287: ...GUID 35F40C3B B483 40E6 9767 69C1536E3CBC V1 EN Figure 597 Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection 1MRK502052 UEN B Section 25 Inverse time characteristics 1281 Technical manual ...

Page 1288: ...GUID B55D0F5F 9265 4D9A A7C0 E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN Figure 598 Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection Section 25 1MRK502052 UEN B Inverse time characteristics 1282 Technical manual ...

Page 1289: ...tion ASDU Application service data unit AWG American Wire Gauge standard BBP Busbar protection BFOC 2 5 Bayonet fibre optic connector BFP Breaker failure protection BI Binary input BIM Binary input module BOM Binary output module BOS Binary outputs status BR External bistable relay BS British Standards BSR Binary signal transfer function receiver blocks BST Binary signal transfer function transmit...

Page 1290: ...MTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE ANSI C37 111 1999 IEC 60255 24 Contra directional Way of transmitting G 703 over a balanced line Involves four twisted pairs two of which are used for transmitting data in both directions and two for transmitting clock signals COT Cause of transmission CPU Central processing unit CR Carrier ...

Page 1291: ...rence EnFP End fault protection EPA Enhanced performance architecture ESD Electrostatic discharge F SMA Type of optical fibre connector FAN Fault number FCB Flow control bit Frame count bit FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech data and protection signals FOX 512 515 Access multiplexer FOX 6Plus Compact time division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex ch...

Page 1292: ...ansient performance IEC 60870 5 103 Communication standard for protection equipment A serial master slave protocol for point to point communication IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard IEC 61850 8 1 Communication protocol standard IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE 802 12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits s on twisted pair or optical f...

Page 1293: ...according to IEC 60529 IP 20 Ingression protection according to IEC 60529 level 20 IP 40 Ingression protection according to IEC 60529 level 40 IP 54 Ingression protection according to IEC 60529 level 54 IRF Internal failure signal IRIG B InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B standard 200 ITU International Telecommunications Union LAN Local area network LIB 520 High voltage software m...

Page 1294: ...ion and control IED manager PC MIP Mezzanine card standard PMC PCI Mezzanine card POR Permissive overreach POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level that is in near proximity to the measured and or controlled components PSM Power supply module PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600 PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio PUTT Per...

Page 1295: ...isition SPA a serial master slave protocol for point to point and ring communication SRY Switch for CB ready condition ST Switch or push button to trip Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator SVC Static VAr compensation TC Trip coil TCS Trip circuit supervision TCP Transmission control protocol The most common transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet TCP IP Transmissi...

Page 1296: ...s the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals UTC is derived from International Atomic Time TAI by the addition of a whole number of leap seconds to synchronize it with Universal Time 1 UT1 thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth s orbit the rotational axis tilt 23 5 degrees but still showing the Earth s irregular rotation on which UT1 is based The Coo...

Page 1297: ...1291 ...

Page 1298: ...r notice ABB AB does not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential errors or possible lack of information in this document We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject matter and illustrations contained herein Any reproduction disclosure to third parties or utilization of its contents in whole or in part is forbidden without prior written consent of ABB AB Copyright 2014 ABB ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for Relion REG670

Reviews:

Related manuals for Relion REG670

Brands by name

Popular brands

ABB Relion REG670, Technical Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for Relion REG670

Reviews:

Related manuals for Relion REG670

Brands by name

Popular brands